Home

GREEN Series User's Manual - Detailed Instruction -

1. The functionality of a contact input can be varied by changing the setting of the contact input registration parameter External contact inputs OD Contact 5V Transistor contact AUTO when DI1 ON DI 7gle o No 201 19 MAN when DI1 OFF 5V STOP when DI2 ON pi2 taleo DI2 fig O RUN when DI2 OFF i pI When switching among target setpoints 1 to 8 DIZ 40 o 5V DIS 40 H SPP SPB SPH SPB SPI6 SPI7 SPB SP 2 SPP SP3 SPH SP5 SPB SPI SPB Dl4 Dis on OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON oFF p14 39 O 45V 39 i D14 OFF ON ON OFFIOFF ON ON OFF Note The numbers of contact Input terminals differ according DI5 i DIS OFFOFFIOFF ON ON ON ON OFF 38 38 to the controllers suffix code Check the numbers of Die OFF OFFOFFJOFFIOFFOFFIOFF ON DI5 38 00 5V input terminals DI1 to DI8 of the controller that you Tall of he contact inputs are set to OFF DI6 have by the following table the controller uses the immediately DI6 37 gt o 5V 37 O shows available x shows not available pregpdio iget sapon ae DI7 36 XJ lO Model and Contact input terminals No function DI7 COM yf suffix codes DH DI2 DI3 Di4 DI5 Di
2. same as LOOP1 3 After the above operation pressing the poe og key for at least 3 seconds to go back to the operating display ALY 4 Then press the key for at least 3 seconds again to display the operating parameter main menu MODE UTS50 UT520 Operating parameter Map Press 4 key one time to display main operating x menu LP1 GE dispi Be s Then display the submenu 1 PID a e i AHY i Y i 5 Press the key 2 times to display the R move HEG ure e usr pvi pve gt sme i parameter 1 A1 ee ale ee a i The alarm timer time can be set to this Set Gene i parameter 4 Aq ee ne e Adjust the time value using the 4 OL Pan o 770 an af Z keys then press the i key to Sa se a register it l VOD i AT TSP 7 SP 8 5P i The unit of time has been set when the fwon i E ME 7AT eas parameter AL1 value registered Hg ice a 7a Bm 1 UPR 1 A4 7 A4 8 A4 ae E DNR tP 7 P 8 P ines 5 70 eo aneas RFL 1 0H 7 0H 8 0H i PEPI ORB TOL 7 0L 8 0L i oa Ge ee Par 1 DR 7 DR 8 DR 1 Pc 7 Pc 8 Pc 1 lc 7 lc 8 lc 1 Dc 7 De 8 Dc 1 He 7 He 8 Ho 1 DB 7 DB 8 DB 1 RP RHY RDV 1 PO 7 PO 8 PO 1 0c 7 0c 8 0c
3. i kd 3 Perform the key operation following the e acme parameter map to show the STC y SET parameter setting display for the ie ieee ee ee ee required program pattern number P EDE to 300 UP750 1 to 30 UPS5O a ell 4 Adjust the STC parameter value using E Cas ar the 5 0 keys then press the gon dosctatesegeees PRL SS T UP750 key to register it it l E a SS i a iY F Py pene ete e ea SSP1 TSP1 TSP1 TSP1 P SSP2 TSP2 TSP2 TSP2 stor Me me e eT KO PID PID PD Po few e Cem 1WZ1 ONn ONn ONn 1 1 WZ2 OFFn OFFn OFFn iwN rv fava Ta faea awao EH E pe i WIM IC IC Ie 3 WZ1 3 WZ2 Y y 3 WTM x zZ xy 4 WZ1 4 WZ2 4 WTM 5 WZ1 RCY 5 WZ2 RST 5 WTM REN The parameter setting operation for the start code is completed Pressing the key at least 3 seconds to go back to the operating display IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 5 2 References Related to Program Setup gt Ref 5 12 E Starting operation at start target setpoint STC 0 Factory set default The start target setpoint is the target setpoint at which programmed operation starts When selected as the start condition the target setpoint can be
4. IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 3 1 References Related to Contact Input gt Ref 3 32 The following parameters are used Change parameters as explained in the User s Manuals Initial Settings and Parameter Map e Setup parameters Contact Input Registration Parameters PROG RST LOC HOLD etc lt lt 1 2 gt gt UP750 Detauit D register Description Setting range I relay number plus 5000 No 9 Code Note1 PROG Start of program operation 5165 1147 When Din changes from DI5 OFF to ON Note2 RST Stop of program operation 5166 1148 When Din changes from DI6 OFF to ON Note2 LOC Start of local mode operation 5167 1149 M a ig from The setting range equals the D17 range of I Relay numbers HOLD Start of hold mode operation each number plus 5000 0 1150 When Din changes from that correspond to the DI not specified OFF to ON Note2 numbers of the contact input terminals you want to use ADV Advance of segment Note1 0 1151 When Din changes from not specified OFF to ON Note2 The relationship between A M1 Loop 1 AUTO MAN switching the DI numbers and the 0 1152 AUTO when contact input is ON Relay numbers are as not specified MAN when c
5. For example when you want to use the DI2 terminal number 18 for the function of Auto and Manual mode switching of the primary loop call up the parameter A M1 setting display and set the value to 5162 The 5162 means I relay number of DI2 plus 5000 e Refer to the Table 3 1 7 Note The parameter A M1 is factory set to the DI5 as shown in the table below IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 3 1 References Related to Contact Input gt Ref 3 16 The following parameters are used Change parameters as explained in the User s Manuals Initial Settings and Parameter Map e Setup parameters Contact Input Registration Parameters A M R L S R CAS AUT MAN SP 0 etc lt lt 1 2 gt gt UT750 ti Derau t D resistor Description Setting range I Relay number plus 5000 No Code Note1 A M1 Loop 1 Auto Manual 5165 1129 Switching Note2 DI5 A M2 Loop 2 Auto Manual 5166 1130 Switching Note2 The setting range equals the DI6 when the secondary loop range of I Relay numbers is used h R L1 Loop 1 Remote Local pa
6. Tp The terminal numbers of UT32L are same as of UT35LU DIS is a setup parameter Changing DIS setpoint allows you to change the function of external contact input Terminal Correspondence between parameters DIS and external contact input functions When DIS OFF When DIS 1 Factory shipped setting When DIS 2 When DIS 3 When DIS 4 UD Contact Dit No function 2 SP when DI1 ON Hides the LOCK parameter when DI1 ON When suiteting taraet 2 Sp when DI1 ON Di q9 c No 19 u 1 SP when DI1 OFF Shows the LOCK parameter when DI1 OFF 1 SP SPB SPIL SPI 1 SP when DI1 OFF DI2 AUTO when DI2 ON Dit OFF ON OFF ON STOP when DI2 ON Lo No 18 No function MAN when DI2 0FF No function DE IOFFOFFONTON RUN when pi2 oFF P 2 18 Ne 20 Common Common Common Common Common COM a Fig 3 1 1 UT350 UT320 Contact Input Terminals The UT350 and UT320 are designed so that the functions assigned to their contact input terminals can be changed using the DIS setup parameter If necessary reassign functions by referring to the table in the Fig 3 1 1 IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 3 1 References Related to Contact Input gt Ref 3 3 The following parameters are used Change parameters as explained in the User s Manuals Initial Settin
7. Referring to the User s Manual above display the setup parameter main menu LOOP1 Then display the submenu CTL Press the GJ key time and again to display the parameter ZON Adjust the parameter value to 0 or 1 using the 4 amp keys then press the key to register it For example when you want to select Zone PID selects by PV Method adjust the parameter value to 1 and register it by pressing the key This completes the setting operation If other settings are unnecessary return to operating display IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 4 1 References Related to Target Setpoints gt Ref 4 11 2 1 When Zone PID selects PV Method Is Selected The zone PID selects by PV method automatically switches between PID setpoints according to the measured value PV For this reason the same group of PID constants are used to perform control within the same PV range irrespective of whether the program is performing a ramp up or ramp down operation Zone PID control is used for such applications as reactors where the gain of chemical reaction varies with temperature As shown in the figure below the area defined by the minimum and maximum values of a measurem
8. TIP The message unused event no E NO is displayed in LCD display as shown in the figure This time the parameter code ALL E is displayed on PV display LED IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 Ref 5 53 lt Toc gt lt Ref 5 3 Handy Features for Creating and Editing Programs gt lt lt Ref 5 3 Handy Features for Creating and Editing Programs gt gt Ref 5 3 4 Copying Program Patterns A CAUTION It is impossible to copy the program pattern when the controller is in the program operating mode Stop reset the program operation when you want to copy the program pattern The copying program patterns function can be used with UP750 and UP550 It is possible to copy existing program patterns This function can simplify the pattern creating process because an existing pattern can be copied and then edited only in the necessary places The parameter used to copy the program pattern is as follows Program Parameter Parameters for Editing Programs Copy UP750 oe Description Setting range Default e P only Code l 1 to 30 when UP550 _ none Copy Program pattern copying 1 to 300 when UP750 To copy the program patterns carry out the operation shown below i Refer to the Parameter Map and Program Parameter Map in the user s Manual First display the operating parameter main menu PROG then press the key to d
9. This completes the setting operation If other settings are unnecessary return to operating display IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 5 1 References Related to Segment Operation gt Ref 5 3 E When segment time is selected Factory set default The segment time criterion bases segment operation on the TSP1 target setpoint Note and the TIME seg ment time The target setpoint is the control target to be attained at segment end whereas the segment time is the time duration from the start of that segment to the end Note TSP2 can also be used if using dual loop control with the UP750 With the UP35 parameters are used Target setpoint of last segment Start target setpoint if program just started PV A n 1 to 99 Segment n operatio TIME Segment time gt Time Fig 5 1 1 Segment operation when segment time is selected The following parameters are used Change parameters as explained in the User s Manuals Initial Settings Programming and Parameter Maps e Program Parameters TSP1 TSP2 TIME Target setpoint TSP1 or TSP2 the n SP1 n SPA nis either parameter No 1 or 2 The unit of time is determined by TMU UP750 UP35 UP550 va B register No Description Setting Range Default UP750 UP550 only Code Code TSP1 i oP I Target setpoint o
10. oPPA yay AZ se Como charge te dap afte parameters C Operation parameters __ Setpoint AJ Serpant A4 setpoint ct Stoning Ser sxtening AE woo mhen E a SPa TESE p e P SP bP P Pi d asp rumoer u meara agral ame d I I SI v FEL PY ipune bf rr ceivatve time ed id 4d Sd Ed id Output high mt a loH heating side output oH JoH toH SoH BoH ToH renne uput wt dar E lot coating ae output col Jot Hol SoL Gol Tol fare Sa a rE cay lar Manual reset car dar Yar Sar Gar Tar ONOFF convoi rb5 ise tH aeeie CH 3H HH SH BH ji rFL rme ldr lon SENNO gdr 3dr Yde Sde bdr Idr orb section bana Pe proportional band gPe Pc 4Pc SPc GPc We oH gim Uc Regen cic Jec Me Sc bice e ONOFF 7 ork owi idc dakais imo gde dc 4de Sde Bde Idc ISP sepr tHe Scene CHe Hc 4Hc SHe Gc Te CSP stpane Idb Dead band edb 3db 4db Sdb Bdb idb Preset output a nome Po acd 2Po 3Po 4Po 5Po GPo Po 4 ipo loc peer aaa coc doc Yoc Soc foc loc SSP _scpoms GSP spons TSP san7 BSP spons Eey 3 When the Model Is UT35 The UT35 and UT32 to the each target setpoints or UT320 accept a maximum of four target setpoints Therefore if the zone PID selection method is selected three zones are formed since two reference points are se
11. lt Toc gt lt Ref 2 2 References Related to Retransmission Output gt Ref 2 20 Ref 2 2 _ References Related to Retransmission Output A IMPORTANT Applicable models of this section UP750 UP550 UP35 UT750 UT5 UT400 UT3 UP750 UP550 UP35 UT750 UT550 UT450 UT350 UT520 UT420 UT320 Note The functions discussed in this section apply to all the models of UT and UP series However some of the functions are unavailable with certain models Such models if any will be clearly noted in each of the following items from 1 to 3 These sections provide references related to Retransmission Output listed below Only read the following descriptions if necessary and carry out the required operation 1 Changing the type of retransmission output signal 2 Retransmitting program pattern 2 for UP750 UP550 only 3 Using the loop power supply function IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 2 2 References Related to Retransmission Output gt Ref 2 21 lt lt Ref 2 2 Reference Related to Retransmission Output gt gt Ref 2 2 1 Changing the type of retransmission output signal The type of retransmission output signal can be changed with all the GREEN Series UT or UP Controllers We show th
12. UT4 0 and UT3 A CAUTION The preset output value output when the controller operation stopped will not be limited even when the n OH and n OL limits of output have been set 105 0 Range of output signal variation Output low limit Signal output from the terminal Variable range n OH Vv n OL OL v 5 0 105 0 lt Original variable range gt Note Setting range 5 0 n OL lt n OH 105 0 Fig 2 1 2 The following parameters are used Change parameters as explained in the User s Manuals Initial Settings and Parameter Map Operating parameters PID related Parameters n OH n OL UP750 UT5 UP35 UP550 UT4000 UT3 UT750 Description Setting range Default D register No Code Code Code n OH n oH oH Output high limit 5 0 to 105 100 0 254 n OH OH Heating side output high OL lt OH When UP350 UT300 limit in heating cooling 0 0 to 100 0 See Table 2 1 4 control Note2 in heating cooling except for UP350 UT300 Note1 control n OL n ol ob Output low limit 5 0 to 105 0 0 255 n OL OL Cooling side output high OL lt OH 100 0 When UP350 UT300 limit in heating cooling 0 0 to 100 0 in heat
13. lt Toc gt lt Ref 3 2 References Related to Contact Output gt 4 Cascade control UT mode 4 E UT750 D register and l relay numbers assigned to DO Output Type Function contact outputs at the factory before shipment DOI neay Alari output The registered numbers of the alarm and other DO2 Relay Alarm 2 ouput functions assigned to contact output registration DO3 Relay Alarm 3 output i parameters DO1 to DO7 are shown below or cooling side control in heating cooling control Note Model Function Registered number DO4 Transistor Alarm 4 output Alarm 1 output 5689 l relay number or cooling side control in heating cooling control Note E A Alarm 2 output 5690 l relay number DO5 Transistor Alarm 3 output UT520 Alarm 3 output 5691 l relay number DO6 Transistor Alarm 4 output Alarm 4 output 5693 l relay number per Transistor Notassigneg Cooling output 1607 D register number Note When heating cooing control using relay or transistor output via DO3 in control output is selected cooling side output is assigned UT750 only to DO3 or DO4 above Cooling output 1609 D register number via DO4 E UT550 UT520 UT551 UT550 UT551 and FAIL output 1609 D register number DO Output Type Function DO1 Relay Alarm 1 output DO2 Relay Alarm 2 output DO3 Relay Alarm 3 output Note2 DO4 Note1 Transistor Alarm 4 output Note2 DO5
14. Submenu gs IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 3 4 References Related to Instrument Alarms and Events gt Ref 3 84 lt lt Ref 3 4 References Related to Instrument Alarms and Events gt gt Ref 3 4 3 Setting Hysteresis On off Bandwidth of an Instrument Alarm Setting the hysteresis on off bandwidth of an instrument alarm is possible with the UP550 or UP750 Note1 The PV event hysteresis function of the UP550 UP750 is the same as the instrument alarm hysteresis function shown in Figures 3 4 2 and 3 4 3 For information on PV event hysteresis also refer to the following explanation Note however that parameters used to set PV event hysteresis differ from those used to set instrument alarm hysteresis If necessary see Ref 3 4 5 Using PV Events Note2 The UP35Lhhas no instrument alarm function and therefore there is no need for instrument alarm hysteresis The controller s PV hysteresis function is the same as described below however If you want to set the hysteresis of a PV event when using the UP35 see Ref 3 4 5 Using PV Events The parameters Alarm 1 Hysteresis HY1 to Alarm 4 Hysteresis HY4 correspond to instrument alarm types 1 AL1 to 4 AL4 You can set the hysteresis on off bandwidth of
15. IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 3 3 References Related to Alarms gt Ref 3 70 lt lt Ref 3 3 Reference Related to Alarms gt gt Ref 3 3 4 Using the sensor ground alarm The sensor ground alarm can be used with the UT750 UT550 UT520 UT551 UT450 UT420 UT35Z and UT320 However it can not be used with position proportional type controllers UT750 10 and UT55 1L This function is not active in the following case e During manual operation mode e When operation stops e During ON OFF control mode e During auto tuning e During cascade control mode This function differs slightly as follows according to model Use it as specified for your model When the controller indicated PV and actual temperature of the furnace differ sensor loss can be evaluated from the change in output For example when the temperature inside the furnace is 110 C despite the fact that the controller indicates as 100 C In this particular case output is higher than that at a 100 C PV This can be detected by the sensor ground alarm In using this function the user must keep data on the normal output range i e how much output there is at a PV of 100 C 9 PV from sensor 100 C Furnace a Actual temperature 110 C 100 C The MV output is
16. The following parameters are used Change parameters as explained in the User s Manuals Initial Settings Programming and Parameter Maps Program Parameters TSP1 TSP2 TM RT the n SP1 n SPA n is either parameter No 1 or 2 UP750 UP35 UP550 ae B register No Description Setting range Default UP750 UP550 only Code Code TSP1 op Target setpoint of 111 near each segment to n GPA n SP1 to n SPA 0 0 to 100 0 of PV 0 0 of PV n 1 or 2 input range input range TSP2 Note1 Note1 Target SP 112 for 2nd loop TM RT tn i Ramp set segment 1 For ramp segments 114 to La time unregistered or FT i r TMA TM RT is displayed 0 0 to 100 0 of PV n o n TMA only when SEG T is input range span set to 1 per hour or minute 2 For soak segments unregistered unregistered or 0 00 to 99 59 Hour minute or Minute second Note1 The parameter TSP2 can be displayed only when the PT2 G parameter is set to ON Setup Parameter Target Setpoint related Parameter TMU UP750 UP35 Bpeee Description Setting range Default D register No Code Code TMU L nif Program time unit hh mm Hour minute hh mm 904 TMU mmiss Minute second IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 5 1 References Related to Segment Operation gt Ref 5 5 Segment time during ramp up oper
17. UT750 or by other alternative mean is registered with parameter MG1 using N LCD display the D registers numbered D0801 to D0810 The same applies to message Massage 1 2 and later Massage 2 e Specify the contact input terminal where a change in status from OFF to ica Massage 3 ON is made to show message 1 as Massage 4 the MG1 setting For example If you ry use terminals 19 and 20 as shown in the figure on the left register 5161 the I Relay number of DI1 plus DIt 5000 19 O 20 COM Fig 3 1 7 IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 3 1 References Related to Contact Input gt Ref 3 21 The following parameters are used Change parameters as explained in the User s Manuals Initial Settings and Parameter Map e Setup parameters Contact Input Registration Parameters MG1 MG2 MG3 MG4 an Perault D resistor Description Setting range I Relay number plus 5000 No Code Note1 MG1 Message display 0 E 1143 interruption 1 Note1 The setting range equals the not specified MG2 Message display range of I Relay numbers 0 1144 interruption 2 Note1 each number plus 5000 not specified A that correspond to the DI MG3 Message display numbers of the contact input 9 M 1145 interruption 3 Note1 terminals you want to use not specified MG4 Message display Note1 0 1146 interruption 4 Note1 not specified N
18. TNS ser Ar same as PVT AL3 SLOOP TMU AL4 i i SPH HYI HY2 IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 3 3 References Related to Alarms gt Ref 3 74 UTS50 UT520 Parameter map 7 Press the key 10 times to display the parameter ORB Operating display Set the ON OFF rate detection band EED value using the 4 keys then press SETS a the key to register it epe SEAE Fl Wea aa in TODE a LP2 m USR PY1 Pye gt STUP 8 Press the lt 3 key once to display the ll a e i parameter ORH s GA A su menu Y Set the ON OFF rate high limit value a Aae ee ae using the 4 J keys then press the LE eo j eo Jef aro ei key to register it a a eS at
19. Module Source voltage Output type P2ER1 20J AC100 to 240V Relay contact output P2ET1 20J AC100 to 240V Transistor contact output P2ER6 20J DC24V Relay contact output P2ET6 20J DC24V Transistor contact output The relationship between the contact input terminals of an I O expansion module and the Relay numbers is given in the table below To assign contact switched functions to the module s terminals follow the steps below 1 Select a contact switched function to assign to a module terminal from the table of setup parameters contact input registration parameters in 4 1 2 Select a terminal from those of the I O expansion module listed in the table below IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 3 1 References Related to Contact Input gt Ref 3 19 3 Show the setting display of the setup parameter selected in step 1 and register the Relay number with an increment of 5000 of the terminal selected in step 2 For example register 5177 with the R L1 setup parameter to assign the Remote Local status switching function to INPUT1 Table 3 1 9 Input terminals I relay No 5000 Code Refer to the I relay Map Note INPUT1 5177 RDI101 INPUT2 5178 RDI102 INPUT3 5179 RDI103 VO expansion INPUT4 5180 RDI104 module 1 INPUT5 5181 RDI105 INPUT6 5182 RDI106 INPUT7 5183 RDI107 INPUT8 5184 RDI108 INPUT1 5185 RDI201 INPUT2 5186
20. UT750 UT5 BIARD Description Setting range Default o ata Code Code RHY rHy Zone switching hysteresis 0 0 to 100 0 of 0 5 469 for loop 1 RHY PV input range span 669 for loop 2 Note2 Note1 UT350 or UT320 does not have a parameter for changing the value of Zone switching hysteresis The value is fixed to 0 5 of PV input range span Note2 The D registers for the loop 2 can be used with UT750 or UT5 only An example of the zone switching hysteresis is shown below Reference point 1 we rhy EOS 0 5 lt No 1PID i No 2PID g No 1PID f No 2PID Fig 4 1 2 Zone switching hysterisis IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 4 1 References Related to Target Setpoints gt Ref 4 13 About the Reference Deviation Function The process of changing PID settings according to the amount of deviation is called reference deviation If the actual amount of deviation exceeds the setpoint of the Reference Deviation parameter discussed here the controller automatically changes to the PID constants 8 PID parameter setting set for that zone In the case of the UT350 and UT32 the controller changes to the 4 PID setting For example if the deviation is large a target setpoint can be reached more rapidly by increasing the proportional gain i e narrowing the proportional band PID setpoint switching based on t
21. ERJC Note OT ao o A Oo CT A A N A amp A R B oa A oO A N PSL A BPS A o PRI 50 STP Note The codes PCMD and ERJC are used only with UP351 IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 8 1 Outline of Registers and l relays gt Ref 8 11 Table 8 1 3 4 4 UP350 D register Map 4 4 MSG L1 L2 CMLP CONF UPMD No 800 900 1000 1100 1200 51 DLN 52 ADR 53 RP T 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 8 1 Outline of Registers and relays gt Ref 8 12 UT750 UT55 UT520 D register Map Table 8 1 4 1 4 Ne 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 Note ADERROR 51 ERROR 1 PV 1 CSP 1 OUT 1 HOUT 1 COUT 1 MOD 1 PIDNO 1 CSPNO ALM ERROR 2 P
22. Part of the parameter map for the UP35H is shown below Refer to it when changing parameter values in order to access the desired parameter setting display A CAUTION If you change any contact input terminal assignment check that the new assignment agrees with the current wiring If necessary rewire the terminals Setup parameter map ea Si Note1 Pressing thelJkey on the OP PA display changes to PPA a the i operating parameter setting display ee Note2 If you have set a password FUNC is not displayed ya unless the correct password is entered o SPUR Note3 The displays Funt and ia _ can be switched with 4 Jor key Pud Note2 FJ FUnt Notes Tro PA 1 Call up the I O display Refer to the Note 1 to 3 above 2 Press the key to display the parameter DIS setting display moles re m 53 re oo m X Wy Q a LN L SH E52 SL HEE rdl 54 bSL Lol ot Pud l EI IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 3 1 References Related to Contact Input gt Ref 3 26 lt lt Ref 3 1 References Related to Contact Input gt gt Ref 3 1 6 Changing contact input functions for the UP550 With UP550 10 Max contact input terminals can be used Note The terminal numbers are 18 19 20 common terminal 28 30 c
23. The following parameters are used Change parameters as explained in the User s Manuals Initial Settings and Parameter Map Setup parameters Security related Parameters UT750 UT5 Description Setting range Default D register No Code Code A V dar A key lock OFF or ON OFF 1024 DAT data setting key lock A M Ara AM key lock OFF or ON OFF 1025 A M MODE nod Operating parameter OFF or ON OFF 1028 MOD main menu MODE lock LP1 L Pi Operating parameter OFF or ON OFF 1030 LP1 main menu LP 1 lock LP2 I Pp Operating parameter OFF or ON OFF 1031 LP2 main menu LP2 lock PID Pld Operating parameter OFF or ON OFF 1032 PID main menu PID lock USR or Operating parameter OFF or ON OFF 1033 USR main menu USR lock PYS1 PY Operating parameter OFF or ON OFF 1034 PY1 main menu PYS1 lock PYS2 PUJ Operating parameter OFF or ON OFF 1035 PY2 main menu PYS2 lock IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt Ref 7 7 lt Ref 7 1 References Related to Security gt 4 When the Model Is UP3501 The keylock function of the UP3500 using the LOCK setup parameter is as follows Any one of the function options in Table 7 1 4 can be selected by Table 7 1 4 Keylock Function Options and Their Settings LOCK Parameter Setting Function OFF e Turns the keylock function OFF This is the factory
24. Contact Contact Alarm Type closed in opened in case of alarm case of alarm De energization in case of deviation lower limit Deviation upper lower limits deviation upper lower limits De energization in case of PV upper limit alarm De energization in case of PV lower limit alarm Output value upper limit Output value lower limit Alarm Action Code Open and Closed refer to the Tonea coea state of a relay contact and On closed in and Off the state of a lamp case of alarm case of alarm Hysteresis q 6 l Open On i one A oe ee Deviation setpoint PV value 46 Target setpoint Hysteresis Hysteresis Closed On Open Closed On 7 E A A A gt Deviation setpoint PV value 47 gt _ gt Target setpoint Hysteresis Closed Hysteresis Open Off i Open Off a A Ay Deviation setpoint PV value 48 Target setpoint Hysteresis 9 Closed Off i Open On Alarm setpoint PV value 49 Hysteresis Sy 10 Open On i Closed Off Sata 50 Alarm setpoint PV value 30 Hysteresis Output value Alarm setpoint 70 Hysteresis 31 A Alarm setpoint Output value Alarm type codes 1 to 10 and 28 to 31 in the table above are assigned for the primary loop while alarm type codes 41 to 50 and 68 to 71 are assigned for the secondary loop IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 3 4 References Related to
25. RJC RET RTH AL1 RTL AL2 AL3 HY1 HY2 HY3 PO POc C MD AR ZON DIS LOCK PCMD Note ERJC Note OT CT CTc PSL BPS PRI STP Note The codes PCMD and ERJC are used only with UT351 and UT321 IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 8 1 Outline of Registers and relays gt Ref 8 22 Table 8 1 6 4 4 UT350 UT32 D register Map 4 4 MSG L1 L2 CMLP CONF UTM D No 51 800 900 1000 1100 1200 DLN 52 ADR 53 RP T 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 PRT Note 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 Note The code PRT is used only with UT351 with embedded Ethernet IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 8 1 Outline of Registers and l relays gt Ref 8 23 lt lt Ref 8 1 Outline of Registers and relays gt gt Ref 8 1 3 B register Outline and
26. UP750 oe Description Setting range Default ETEO Ueesi only Code Ptn S Shows the number of None 10 Note2 segments within a pattern Note1 Note1 The Ptn s P NO parameter is used only to display the number of segments within a program It need not be set Note2 The number of segments within a program B register No 10 can be read by writing 1 for the read flag of B register 3 RDTRG after writing the program pattern No in B register 1 PTNO To check the number of segments in a specific pattern carry out the operation shown below 1 Refer to the Parameter Map and Program Parameter Map in the user s Manual First display the operating parameter main menu PROG then press the key to display the program parameter setting display Submenu LOC will be displayed 2 And then press 4 keys to display the submenu EDIT UP750 UP550 Parameter Map EDIT E PROG program edit paa sub menu wae ese IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 5 3 Handy Features for Creating and Editing Programs gt Ref 5 51 3 Press the key two times to display the parameter Ptn S P NO Press 4Jkeys to specify a pattern No and press key to register it MENU PROG EDIT 2 use segment PTno TIP The message use segment
27. 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 1 1 References Related to PV Input gt Ref 1 3 E For UP35 UT450 UT420 UT350 and UT32 Here we explain how to display the parameter setting Parameter map UT350 UT320 UT351 UT321 display and to change the parameter values Before carrying out these operations be sure to refer to the User s Manuals Initial Settings and Parameter Map of ser the controller The parameter map is very helpful in finding the path to the setting display for a particular parameter 1 With the operating display shown press and hold down the key for 3 seconds or longer to call up oP PA Then press the key repeatedly Note until the PV filter parameter FL appears Pressing the key one more time displays the PV input bias parameter BS Note The number of times a key is pressed differs depending on the model of the controller See the parameter map of your controller 2 In each of these parameter setting displays adjust the parameter value using the 4 7 keys then press the key to register it IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 1 1 References Related to PV Input gt Ref 1 4 lt lt Ref 1 1 References Related to PV Input gt gt Ref 1 1 2 Correcting the PV 2 Using ten segment linearizer biasing or approximation Ten segment linearizer biasing and approximation are available wi
28. DO4 Cooling side output in 1609 D register number heating cooling control Loop control with PV switching UT mode 6 Contact output Output Type Function DO1 Relay PV event 1 output DO2 Relay PV event 2 output DO3 Relay Instrument alarm 1 output or cooling side output in heating cooling control Note1 DO4 Transistor Time event 1 output or cooling side output in heating cooling control Note1 DO5 Transistor Time event 2 output DO6 Transistor Time event 3 output DO7 Transistor Time event 4 output Note1 When heating cooing control using relay or transistor output in control output is selected cooling side output is assigned to DO3 or DO4 for the UP750 TIP If the output type other than a relay see the table above is selected for control output time event 5 output will be assigned to the relay terminal for output 1 for the UP550 and time event 6 output will be assigned to the relay terminal for output 2 for the UP550 2H only IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 3 2 References Related to Contact Output gt Ref 3 54 E D register and I register numbers assigned to contact outputs and extended contact outputs set at the factory The registered numbers of the alarm and other functions assigned to contact output registration parameters DO1 to DO7 are shown below Model Registered contact output parameters Function Registered
29. Refer to this information and change parameters only if necessary 1 2 3 4 5 Setting alarm trigger conditions Setting alarm hysteresis ON OFF range Using the alarm timer Control stable signal event Using the sensor ground alarm Using the heater burnout alarm UT350 UT320 UT351 and UT321 only IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 3 3 References Related to Alarms gt Ref 3 63 lt lt Ref 3 3 Reference Related to Alarms gt gt Ref 3 3 1 Setting Alarm Trigger Conditions Alarm trigger conditions can be set with the UT750 UT550 UT520 UT551 UT450 and UT420 There are 3 alarm trigger conditions alarm mode Note1 Alarm mode is selected with the AMD parameter as indicted in the table below e Always active lt Factory set default Not active when in Stop mode Not active when in Stop mode or Manual operation Note1 With the UT550 UT551 and UT520 alarm triggers can be selected from the following 3 conditions in addition to those above These conditions are used as dual loop control with a maximum 8 alarms All8 alarms always active All8 alarms not active when in Stop mode All8 alarms not active when in Stop mode or Manual operation The following parameters are used Change parameters as explained in the User s Manuals Initial Settings and Parameter Map e Setup parameters Alarm related Parameters AMD
30. The functionality of a contact input can be varied by changing the setting of the contact input registration parameter External contact inputs O G1 a Switch between the ON and OFF states of the DI1 to D14 CP Contact 5V 7 Transistor contact contact inputs to select from program pattern numbers 1 to 15 DI1 Select a number during a RESET state DI1 19 o 5V 19 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Foe E X 63 3 Dit ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON DI2 18K O 5y 18 DI2 OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON F X Dia JOFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON OFFIOFF OFFIOFF ON ON ON ON pjg 4g o 5V DIB 40 6 D14 OFF OFF OFFIOFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON a DI4 EN tos Start of program operation when d DIS O GD D DI5 changes from OFF to ON DIS 38 a 38 R DI6 Stop of program operation when 7 O 37 DI6 changes from OFF to ON DI6 3 mu DI7 Start of local mode operation when DI7 36 o 36 DI7 changes from OFF to ON COM Common COM 0 i 20 Contact rating 12 V DC 10 mA or more Fig 3 1 10 UP750 Contact Input Terminals The UP750 s DI numbers DI No and the corresponded terminal numbers are listed in the Table 3 1 12 The factory set function of each terminal is listed in the table Table 3 1 12 When the Single loop control mode UP mode 1 Terminal No DI No I relay no 5000 The factor
31. When you want c i Sub menu CSET ISP to use AL3 press the key twice more and call up the AL3 Setting display SET 3 Set the parameter value to 25 using the 4 Pes pe a pe y keys then press the key to register PEH2 OPR2 it PEH3 MOD1 PEH4 MOD2 25 must be set when you want to use the sensor ground alarm PEHS ARI PEH6 AR2 PEH7 ZON PEH8 R MD ALI RM AL2 ae AL3 TM AL4 RHY HY1 RDV HY2 HY3 HY4 AMD Note Set 65 for the secondary loop ALA IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt 4 After the above operation set the cycle time CT The default value of CT is 30seconds When the time is good path the setting of CT Display the setup parameter main menu UPMD and then display the submenu OUT Press the key 3 times to display the parameter CT Adjust the cycle time value using the 5 V keys and press the 4 key to register it 5 After the above operation pressing the key for at least 3 seconds to go back to the operating display 6 Then press the key for at least 3 seconds again to display the operating parameter main menu PROG Press 4 key once
32. AL1 alarm set 25 to these To use the alaram timer 955 loop 2 parameters when the controller the setteing value must AL2 Alg Alarm 2 type is other than UT350 UT320 be set to 25 or 23 916 loop 1 AL2 23 To use the sensor ground 956 loop 2 alarm set 23 to these AL3 ALG Alarm 3 type parameters when the controller ae eae AL3 is UT350 or UT320 loop 2 AL4 Al u Alarm 4 type 918 loop 1 L 958 loop 2 AL4 Note 1 Note1 UT3O0Cand UT4 do not have the parameter AL4 IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 3 3 References Related to Alarms gt Ref 3 72 e Setup parameters Output related Parameters CT1 CT2 Note1 UT750 UT5 T gt K Description Setting range Default co Code Code cT1 E L Control output 1 30sec 1240 CT cycle time 1 to 1000 sec CT2 no function Control output 2 30sec 1241 Note2 cycle time Note1 The parameter CT1 and CT2 can not be used with position proportional type controllers UT750 10 and UT5501 Note2 With UT750 CT2 can not be displayed in the cascade control mode or the Cascade with 2 universal input mode e Operating parameters Opertion related Parameters ORB ORH ORL UT750 UT5 UT400 ag D register UT3 Description Setting range Default No Code Code ORB l ON OFF rate 0 0 to 100 0 of 1 0 of 250 l
33. O AA Qe QAAE AlS SOO HO J Fig 5 2 25 Terminal arrangement Terminal 31 7 7 g iello Setting 5157 to the DO7 parameter that 354 DI 95E Check the I relay numbers for the pattern end signals are 157 to 159 in this table I Relay no 5000 Code Pattern end signal output period 5157 PTEND 1 sec 5158 PTEND3 3 sec 5159 PTENDS5 5 sec controls terminal 31 enables the pattern end signal to be output via transistor from terminal 31 IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 5 2 References Related to Program Setup gt Ref 5 41 lt lt Ref 5 2 References Related to Program Setup gt gt Operation in Local Mode with Constant Target Setpoint Ref 5 2 9 The UP750 and UP550 can be operated in the local mode In addition to this mode the following four modes are available in the UP750 and UP550 Each mode can be transferred with the vo RESET key RUN key key RESET key MODE key LOC 1 Zn RUN oe key LOC 1 Program operation mode re lt q RUN key N Hold operation mode MODE key HOLD 1
34. Output b Ten segment linearizer approximation gt Input a Fig 1 1 3 Ten segment Linearizer Approximation IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 1 1 References Related to PV Input gt Ref 1 6 The following parameters are used e Operating parameters Ten segment Linealizer Parameters UP750 UT5 en Description Setting range Default D register Code Code No l al if i Ten segment 66 7 to 105 0 of 0 0 of PV input range 726 1 A1 linearizer 1 input 1 PV input range al 2 A1 for 2nd loop Note 1 a ea b1 hi Ten segment 66 7 to 105 0 of 0 0 of PV input range 727 1 B1 linearizer 1 output 1 PV input range span Note 2 span Note 2 b1 2 B1 for 2nd loop Note 1 7532 a2 Ad Ten segment 66 7 to 105 0 of 0 0 of PV input range 728 1 A2 linearizer 1 input 2 PV input range 2 a2 2A2 for 2nd loop Note1 0000y b2 ih Pad Ten segment 66 7 to 105 0 of 0 0 of PV input range 729 1 B2 linearizer 1 output 2 PV input range span Note 2 span Note 2 b2 2 B2 for 2nd loop Note 1 754 a3 iA j Ten segment 66 7 to 105 0 of 0 0 of PV input range 730 1 A3 linearizer 1 input 3 PV input range 2 a3 2 A3 for2ndloop Note 1 TBR b3 lh j Ten segment 66 7 to 105 0 of 0 0 of PV input range 731 1 B3 linearizer 1 output 3 PV input range span Note 2 span Note 2 b3 2 B3 for 2nd loop Note 1 7
35. UT750 UT5 UTAO Description Setting range Default iia Code Code AMD Aad Alarm mode 0 Always active 0 923 loop 1 AMD 1 Not active when in Stop mode 2 Not active when in Stop mode 963 loop 2 or Manual operation secondary loop The followings Setpoint 3 to 5 can be set with only UT5 However those can not be set in Cascade control mode 3 All 8 alarms always active 4 All 8 alarms not active when in Stop mode 5 All 8 alarms not active when in Stop mode or Manual operation Note1 With the UT5UL displays the parameters AL1 to AL4 for loop 2 when the set value 3 4 or 5 is registered in AMD The 5th to 8th alarms can be set to these parameters AL1 to AL4 for loop 2 However those can not be set in Cascade control mode A parts of the UT750 parameter map is shown below Refer and use the map to find the path to the setting display for a particular parameter IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 3 3 References Related to Alarms gt Ref 3 64 UT750 Setup Parameters Map Password Operating Parameter setting display Referring to the Parameter map display the setup parameter main menu LOOP1 Then display the submenu ALM And press the 2 Jkey time and a
36. 4 or 5 causes the n A1 to n A4 parameters for loop 2 to appear on the display In this case the n A1 to n A4 parameters may be used as the 5th to 8th alarm parameters for loop 1 this is not true with cascade control however Note3 Not shown for on off control however the parameter is shown for the on off control mode of heating cooling control Note4 If the heating side proportional band is set to 0 0 in heating cooling control the heating side goes into on off control Likewise if the cooling side proportional band is set to 0 0 the cooling side goes into on off control Note5 SD stands for Shut Down It is configurable when the control output is 4 to 20 mA and the controller is in manual operation At shutdown the control output is set to 0 mA Note6 Not shown for heating cooling control Note7 Shown only for heating cooling control The parameter is shown in the LP2 operating parameter main menu only if the controller is performing heating cooling control and the controller mode UT mode is either cascade control or cascade control with 2 universal inputs Note8 Shown only for position proportional PID control or heating cooling control Note9 If the controller mode UT mode is cascade control or cascade control with 2 universal inputs the n PO parameter is shown only in the LP2 operating parameter main menu Table 4 1 1 PID related parameter D register numbers list 1st for loop
37. 506 570 RDI202 634 698 ALO22 762 443 507 571 RDI203 635 699 ALO23 763 l relay number for 444 508 572 RDI204 636 700 764 alarm 4 output 445 EEP E 509 573 RDI205 637 701 ALO24 765 446 510 574 RDI206 638 702 766 447 SYSTEM E 511 575 RDI207 639 703 767 448 512 576 RDI208 640 704 768 Table 3 2 5 Extended contact Contact output D register number for output terminal parameter parameters to the left OUTPUT1 R151 1113 OUTPUT2 R152 1114 OUTPUT3 R153 1115 Contact I O OUTPUT4 R154 1116 expansion OUTPUT5 R155 1117 module 1 OUTPUT6 R156 1118 OUTPUT7 R157 1119 OUTPUT8 R158 1120 OUTPUT1 R251 1121 OUTPUT2 R252 1122 OUTPUT3 R253 1123 Contact I O OUTPUT4 R254 1124 expansion OUTPUT5 R255 1125 module 2 OUTPUT6 R256 1126 OUTPUT7 R257 1127 OUTPUT8 R258 1128 IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 3 2 References Related to Contact Output gt Ref 3 59 The following parameters are used for extending the contact output functions To change the parameter values consult the Default Settings or Parameters section of the appropriate user s manual e Setup parameters Contact Output Registration Parameters R151 to R258 UT750 sags D register Description Setting Range Default Number Code R151 R151 output flag registration 0 with no functions 1113 L i Setting range D register or register number 5000 i For D register nu
38. Dad PID control mode 0 Standard PID control mode 0 927 C MD 1 Fixed point control mode The relationship between the control mode and operating condition of the UP35 shown in Table 2 1 3 below Refer to the information under Control Method and Description of Control Action to set the type of PID control UT35 land UT320 is as mode appropriate for the operating condition mode you will use using the setup parameter discussed earlier Table 2 1 3 Control Mode vs Operating Condition Relationship for UP35 UT35 land UT32 1 2 Type of PID Control Mode Control Method Description of Control Action Operating Condition Mode Standard PID control mode C MD 0 PV derivative type PID control Control output bump is allowed during change in SP value The PV derivative type PID control mode is adopted so that the controller can reach the new SP value without delay when the current SP value is changed In this control mode the controller immediately outputs the value of the proportional term P which is proportional to the deviation resulting from a change in the SP value The controller thus attempts to reach the new SP value as soon as possible ii PV D MV SP For UT3 When SP number is set to 1 2 3 or 4 For UP35 Hold mode or soak mode operation Factory se
39. IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 1 1 References Related to PV Input gt Ref 1 15 Table 1 1 1 PV sampling period Limitations of UT750 functions 50 ms the fastest Possible with UT750 00 single loop model with no optional specification when single loop control UT mode 1 is used and none of the following functions are used lt This is given as a rough guide Note e SUPER function Heating cooling control PV input computation e Deviation alarm e Sensor grounding alarm Self diagnostic alarm e FAIL output e SP rate of change limiter Output rate of change limiter 100 ms Possible with single loop models UT750 0L when cascade control UP mode 4 is not used Possible with position proportional models UT750 10 lt This is given as a rough guide Note 200 ms factory set default Possible with single loop models UT750 0L when cascade control is used Possible with single loop models UT750 0L and dual loop models UT750 50 when about less than 50 custom computation modules are used lt 50 is given as a rough guide Note 500 ms When 50 or more custom computation modules are used 50 is given as a rough guide Note Note e To check that the selected PV sampling period is appropriate use the setup parameter SMEC described later Set the PV sampling period as 200ms wh
40. Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 2 1 References Related to Control Output gt Ref 2 1 Ref 2 1 References Related to Control Output A IMPORTANT Applicable models of this section UP750 UP550 UP35 UT750 UT5 UT400 UT3 UP750 UP550 UP350 UT750 UT500 UT400 UT3 Note Some of the functions discussed below may be limited to models with a specific suffix and or option code Each section will expressly refer to this limitative condition where it applies This section contains reference information on the following advanced controller operations related to control output Refer to this information and set parameters or change their settings only if necessary 1 2 Switching between Direct and Reverse Actions Selecting PID Control Mode According to the Operating Condition a whether or not a change in the target setpoint involves control output um Using Control Output Limiter Using Anti reset Windup Over integration Prevention Function Using Super Overshoot Prevention Function Using Super2 Hunting Prevention Function Using Split signal Computation Output Function Setting Preset Output Values Placing Control Output in Tracking Mode for Cascade Primary loop Control or Loop Control for Backup Using Shutdown
41. OFF to ON Note2 ADV Advance of segment 0 1151 When Din changes from The setting range equals the not specified OFF to ON Note2 range of I Relay numbers each number plus 5000 A M1 Loop 1 AUTO MAN switching that correspond to the DI 0 1152 AUTO when contact input is ON numbers of the contact input not specified MAN when contact input is OFF terminals you want to use A M2 Loop 2 AUTO MAN switching Note1 0 1153 AUTO when contact input is ON p not specified MAN when contact input is OFF The relationship between the DI numbers and the L C LOCAL CASCADE switching Relay numbers are as 0 1154 Not used for single loop follows not specified control PTN O Bit 0 of program pattern DI i 5161 5161 1155 number Note3 D25162 DI DIS 5163 PTN 1 Bit 1 of program pattern DI4 5164 5162 1156 number Note3 DI5 5165 DI2 PTN 2 Bit 2 of program pattern i 2 A 5163 1157 number Note3 Dis 5168 DI8 PTN 3 Bit 3 of program pattern 5164 1158 number Note3 D14 PTN 4 Bit 4 of program pattern 5168 1159 number Note3 DI8 MG1 Interruptive message 0 1166 display 1 not specified MG2 Interruptive message 0 1167 display 2 not specified MG3 Interruptive message 0 1168 display 3 not specified MG4 Interruptive message 0 1169 display 4 not specified Note1 The I Relay numbers used here are 161 to 168 DI numbers for contact input terminals are specified by these I Relay nu
42. Setting range of AO1 AO2 or AO3 Output signal type 0 Default 1 2 3 4 to 20mA 0 to 20mA 20 to 4mA 20 to OmA The following parameters are used Change parameters as explained in the User s Manuals Initial Settings and Parameter Map Table 2 1 8 e Setup parameters Output related Parameters AO1 to AO3 and A1H to A3L UP750 UT5 fies Description Setting range Default D register No Code Code AO1 Aa i Analog output 1 type 0 1244 A01 0 4 to 20mA AO2 Aof Analog output 2 type 1 0 to 20mA 0 1245 AO2 2 20 to 4mA z2 A A03 la J Analog output 3 type 3 200 0m 0 1246 AO3 A1H A i Analog output 1 100 100 1268 A1H segmental point A1L an Analog output 1 0 0 1269 A1 L segmental point A2H AFH Analog output 2 100 5 0 to 105 0 100 1270 A2H tumaround point For UT551 100 0 to 200 0 A2L APL Analog output 2 0 0 1271 A2L segmental point A3H AJ Analog output 3 100 100 1272 A3H segmental point A3L gq Analog output 3 0 0 1273 A3L segmental point IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 2 1 References Related to Control Output gt Ref 2 16 lt lt Ref 2 1 References Related to Control output gt gt Ref 2 1 8 Setting Preset Output Values This function can be used with UP750 UP550 UP350 UT750 UT5 UT400 and UT3 However
43. The I relay ON OFF action is shown the Fig 8 1 1 below Relay action ON OFF cycle time 1sec TIM 1S 5sec TIM 5S 10sec TIM 10S 1min TIM 1M Fig 8 1 1 The l relay ON OFF Action IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 Blank Page lt Int gt lt Toc gt lt Ind gt Revision Information Manual Title GREEN Series Detailed Instruction Manual No IM 05J01B02 01E 1st Edition Mar 2000 Newly published 2nd Edition Mar 2000 Error corrections 3rd Edition Sep 2003 Error corrections Addition of applicable models UT351 UT321 UP351 and UM351 UM331 4th Edition Jul 2004 Change of the company name 5th Edition Mar 2005 Addition of function Written by Yokogawa Electric Corporation Published by Yokogawa Electric Corporation 2 9 32 Nakacho Musashino shi Tokyo 180 8750 JAPAN IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 Blank Page YOKOGAWA Yokogawa Electric Corporation YOKOGAWA ELECTRIC CORPORATION Network Solutions Business Division 2 9 32 Nakacho Musashino shi Tokyo 180 8750 JAPAN Phone 81 422 52 7179 Facsimile 81 422 52 6793 Sales Branch Offices Tokyo Nagoya Osaka Hiroshima Fukuoka YOKOGAWA CORPORATION OF AMERICA Headquaters 2 Dart Road Newnan GA 30265 1094 U S A Phone 1 770 253 7000 Facsimile 1 770 251 0928 Sales Branch Offices Texas Chicago Detroit San Jose YOKOGAWA EUROPE B V Headquaters Databankweg 20 3821 AL Am
44. UPR rate 0 0 1digit to 100 0 275 for loop 2 Note1 of PV input range span DNR dr r Setpoint ramp down OFF or OFF 246 for loop 1 DNR rate 0 0 1digit to 100 0 276 for loop 2 Note1 of PV input range span Note1 The D registers for the loop 2 can not be used with UT400 or UT3L0 Ramp rate Time Unit Setting Parameter e Setup parameters Target Setpoint related Parameter TMU UT750 UT5 UT400 PEE UT3 Description Setting range Default D register No Code Code TMU Enlil Ramp rate time HOUR or MIN Note1 HOUR 904 for loop 1 TMU unit setting HOUR Denotes per hour 944 for loop 2 Note2 MIN Denotes per minute Note1 With UT350 or UT320 the setting value is 0 or 1 0 denotes per hour and 1 denotes per minute Note2 The D registers for the loop 2 can not be used with UT400 or UT3 IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 Blank Page lt Toc gt lt Ref 5 1 References Related to Segment Operation gt Ref 5 1 Ref 5 1 References Related to Segment Operation A IMPORTANT Applicable models of this section UP750 UP550 UP35 UT750 UT5 UT400 UT3 UP750 UP550 UP350 None None None None Note Some of the funct
45. User s Ta Manual GREEN Series REEN User s Manual Detailed Instruction IM 05J01B02 01E YOKOGAWA IM 05J01B02 01E Yokogawa Electric Corporation Sth Edition Toc i GREEN Series User s Manual Detailed Instruction IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition CONTENTS Ref 1 1 References Related to PV Input ccsseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneees Ref 1 1 Ref 1 1 1 Correcting the PV 1 Using PV input filter and PV input bias Ref 1 1 Ref 1 1 2 Correcting the PV 2 Using ten segment linearizer biasing or APPFOXIMAUION aces iccedcccsaceececeeceenesseeeseueeeeesbouaeceetedecensnouaeereuaueeerstouce Ref 1 4 Ref 1 1 3 Square root extraction Of PV c sccccesseceeeseeeeeeseeseeseeeseesseeseeeneeeeeeees Ref 1 9 Ref 1 1 4 Changing the PV sampling period ccesseceeseeseeseenseesseneeeees Ref 1 11 Ref 1 1 5 Checking that the changed PV sampling period is appropriate Ref 1 14 Ref 1 1 6 Correcting the input value from a Sensor cc scceeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeees Ref 1 16 Ref 1 1 7 Using PV tracking function UT only ecccceeeseee cee eeeeeeeeeeeeeneenees Ref 1 18 Ref 1 1 8 PV input range adjustment When the UT UP mode No is 6 7 or 12 ONIY seso Ref 1 21 Ref 1 2 References Related to Remote Input ccccssssseeeeeeeeeeeseeeeees Ref 1 22 Ref 1 2 1 Setting remote input units range and scaling ssceeeeeeeeeee Ref 1 23 Ref 1 2 2
46. 3 4 1 shows the types of operating mode and the way a change is made from one mode to another For more information on each of these operating modes see Ref 5 2 References Related to Program Setup lt RESET key Reset mode y Local operation mode MODE key LOC 1 RESET RUN RUN garg key key key LOC 1 LSS SS SS Fig Alt RUN key Program operation mode Hold operation mode MODE key HOLD 1 Program operation 3 4 1 Switching between Operating Modes A CAUTION The output terminals for instrument alarms have been predetermined at the factory according to the UP mode Confirm the terminal numbers allocated to instrument alarms or event outputs If you have made any change to the instrument alarm settings you must also change the DO output terminal assignments and the wiring Note Note For example a single loop control type UP750 controller comes with the factory set DO contact output assignments shown in Table 3 4 1 The terminal number for instrument alarm output is 4 and its DO number is DO3 In other words only one contact output is allocated to instrument alarms when the controller is shipped from the factory To set more than one alarm function and output them through contact terminals 1 specify their DO output terminal numbers 2 select desired types of instrument alarms from among 2 AL2 to 4 AL4 and allocate them to these num
47. 385 No 449 No 513 No 577 No 641 No 705 VLVAT ERR VLV BOUT PV1ADC PV1BO RJC1IERR PV1 0Vver PV1 over RSPIADC RSPiBO C RSP1ADC C RSP1BO AT1ERR PV2ADC PV2BO 738 RJC2ERR 739 740 PV2 0ver Di6 PV2 over RSP2ADC RSP2BO C RSP2ADC C RSPBO AT2ERR CALB E UCALB E USERE UTMD RANGE SETUP PARA E MODE E Note The code in the square like a AD2ERR is used only with UT750 The code in the shaded square like a VLVAT ERR is used only with UT550 UT551 or UT520 The codes DI1 to DI8 662 to 664 675 to 679 reverse status are used only with UT551 e Other codes are common to UT750 UT550 UT551 and UT520 IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 8 1 Outline of Registers and relays gt Ref 8 33 lt lt Ref 8 1 Outline of Registers and relays gt gt Ref 8 1 5 l relay Timer setting The I relay has the timer function The I relay ON OFF cycle time can be set by the timer to 1 5 10seconds or 1minutes Use the following I relays for the timer cycle time setting if necessary ON OFF cycle time l relay code l relay No 1sec TIM 1S 657 5sec TIM 5S 658 10sec TIM 10S 659 1min TIM 1M 661 The timer function can be used when you use the LL200 PC based Custom Computation Building Tool The signal of l relay ON OFF status are able to output to external devices when the timer signal is registered to DO Contact output
48. 8 1 Outline of Registers and relays gt Ref 8 20 Table 8 1 6 2 4 UT350 UT32 D register Map 2 4 PROCESS PROGRAM MODE PAR OPERATION 1 OPERATION 2 USR PY No 0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 51 ORH 3 SP 52 ORL 53 54 OH 55 OL 56 UYS 3 P 57 DR 3 1 58 HB1 3 D 59 HB2 60 User 61 area 3 MR 62 50 100 63 64 3 Pc 65 3 1c 66 3 Dc 67 68 3 DB 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 4 SP 77 78 79 80 81 4P 82 4 83 4 D 84 85 86 4 MR 87 88 89 90 4 Pc Alc 91 4 Dc 92 93 4 DB 94 95 RDV 96 97 98 99 100 a is read only register is the User area IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 8 1 Outline of Registers and l relays gt Ref 8 21 Table 8 1 6 3 4 UT35 UT32 D register Map 3 4 MSG L1 L2 CMLP CONF UTMD Zz e 800 900 1000 1100 1200 C S1 IN C S2 UNI TMU C S3 C S4 RH RL SDP SH SL OO CO N OD oy BY ojl Pp BSL
49. C The manipulated output value is not the value when the PV input is 100 C but the value when the actual temperature is 110 C Product Manipulated output L AWWW 5 ssr Q Fig 3 4 4 A deterioration in the sensor is detected as described below The controller judges it to be a sensor deterioration and outputs an alarm signal if the moving average Note2 of the control output falls outside the upper limit ORH operating parameter and lower limit ORL operating parameter of the preset range despite the fact that control is stable and the PV input is within a given range of the target setpoint The sensor ground alarm function works as shown in Fig 3 4 4 The equation for calculating the moving average is given below Note3 This calculation begins when the PV value falls within the on off rate detection band ORB parameter Note2 This moving average is referred to as the on off rate OR parameter Note3 The on off rate is five cycles worth of the moving average of control output If this moving average falls outside the range from the ORL parameter setpoint to the ORH parameter setpoint the controller outputs an alarm signal OUTn OUTn 1 OUTn 2 OUTn 3 OUTn 4 Moving average on off rate OR parameter where OUTn is the current output value and the time interval of each of OUTn OUTn 1 OUTn 4 i
50. Controller GND terminal z gt i D 12 40 Two wire transmitter lt 500 ier 0 2 1Vdc Power supply Ore Fig 2 2 2 Example of Connection to Two wire e gt e Transmitter Controller White Green Red Black Shielded wire Use a terminal block if necessary FP100 TIA i Fig 2 2 1 Example of Connection with FP100 Cable IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 Blank Page lt Toc gt lt Ref 3 1 References Related to Contact Input gt Ref 3 1 References Related to Contact Input Ref 3 1 A IMPORTANT Applicable models of this section UP750 UP550 UP35 UT750 UT5 UT4000 UT3 UP750 UP550 UP350 UT750 UT550 UT450 UT350 UT520 UT420 UT320 Note The functions discussed in this section apply to all the models of UT and UP series However some of the functions are unavailable with certain models Such models if any will be clearly noted in each of the following items from 1 to 7 A CAUTION The contact input functions of a UT UP series controll
51. IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 5 2 References Related to Program Setup gt Ref 5 14 2 Example of a soak segment for segment No 3 of the secondary loop When ramp prioritized PV2 start is the selected start condition the secondary loop ramp is the start trigger The secondary loop contains points A2 to E2 PV at those points will vary according to a e The primary loop program will start at the same time as the secondary loop does For example if A2 is the se lected start point for the secondary loop program A1 will be that for the primary loop program a TI ry AI y Loop 1 program pattern e Di l El l i P gt Time SEG1 SEG2 SEG3 SEG4 Fig 5 2 3 Example of a soak segment for segment No 3 of the secondary loop gt Time E1 SEG1 SEG2 SEG4 Fig 5 2 4 Example of no soak segment in secondary loop Program start point is determined by the secondary loop PV as follows Try to understand the relationship of a e to program start points A2 E2 in the above figure PV at program The secondary loop s program The primary loop s program operation start operation start points operation start points a A2 Al b B2 B1 c C2 C1 d D2 D1 e E2 Start SP E1 Start SP IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 5 2 References Related to Program Setup gt Ref 5 15 3 Example of programs
52. JC INSERT JC DELETE MENU PROGE RN da After the segment is added Z er the junction code select inserted deleted JC 0 is displayed JC 0 e With the INSERT operation a segment with the exact same content as the selected segment is added immediately after the selected segment However the JC of the added segment will be 0 program continue e With the DELETE operation the selected segment is deleted IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 Blank Page lt Toc gt lt Ref 6 1 References Related to Displays gt Ref 6 1 Ref 6 1 References Related to Displays A IMPORTANT Applicable models of this section UP750 UP550 UP35 UT750 UT5 UT400 UT3 UP750 UP550 UP35 UT750 UT5 UT400 UT3 Note Some of the functions discussed below may be limited to models with a specific suffix and or option code Each section will expressly refer to this limitative condition where it applies This section contains reference information on the following aspects of controller displays Refer to this informa tion and change parameter settings only if necessary 1 Using SELECT displays 2 Changing contents of Deviation Trend display for UP750 UP550 and UT750 only 3 Changing Deviation Display Range of Deviation Monitor for UT750 UT550 UT551 and UT450 only IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Editio
53. On PV value Alarm setpoint Hysteresis lt PV lower limit Closed On j Open Off _ Alarm setpoint PV value Hysteresis Deviation Open Off Closed On upper limit x PV value Deviation setpoint Target setpoint Hysteresis lt gt Deviation on aia lower limit Deviati iat Sea eviation setpoint Py value Target setpoint Alarm Action Contact conac Alarm Type Open and Closed refer to the esiin opened in state of a relay contact and On case of alarm case of alarm and Off the state of a lamp OFF Ras Hysteresis De energization gt in case of Closed deviation Open On Off lower limit Deviation setpoint PV value alae alarm _ Target setpoint Hysteresis Hysteresis Closed On Open gt Closed On Deviation I Off upper lower i r limits Deviation setpoint PV value raea Target setpoint Hysteresis Closed Hysteresis Within On lt gt deviation Open Off E se Open Off upper lower rey limits Deviation setpoint PV value lt a Target setpoint Hysteresis lt gt De energization in case of PV A gt alarm Alarm setpoint PV value Alarm Type Code Contact Contact closed in opened in case of alarm case of alarm B PERS Hysteresis De energization gt IIL GaSe of Closed Open On deviation Off y upper limit a Deviation setpoint alarm PV value iy
54. The parameters used in this reference topic are as shown below To set change any of the parameters see the Initial Settings or Parameter Map user s manual of the model in question Operating parameters Operation related Parameters SC UP750 UT5 UP550 UT400 asta UT750 UP3 Description Setting Range D register No UT3 Code Code sc GE On off of Super function OFF or 1 20r3 OFF Note2 Loop 1 242 SC Note1 Loop 2 272 Note3 Note1 When selecting the Super function set the SC code to 1 If you set the SC code to either 2 or 3 the Super2 hunting preventing function works This means you cannot use both the Super and Super2 functions at the same time Note2 The Super function is turned off when the controller is shipped from the factory Note3 Loop 2 is supported only by models other than the UP350 UT400 and UT300 IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 2 1 References Related to Control Output gt Ref 2 11 lt lt Ref 2 1 References Related to Control Output gt gt Ref 2 1 6 Using Super2 Hunting Prevention Function The Super2 hunting prevention function is available with the UP750 UP550 UP350 UT750 UT500 UT400 and UT3 This function works when you set the Super code SC to either 2 or 3 It does not work if you set the code to OFF If the code is
55. UT551 or UT520 4 When the Model Is UP350 5 When the Model Is UP750 or UP550 IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 7 1 References Related to Security gt Ref 7 3 1 When the Model Is UT350 or UT320 The keylock function of the UT35L and UT32LJis as follows Any one of the function options in Table 7 1 1 can be selected by using the LOCK setup parameter Table 7 1 1 Keylock Function Options and Their Settings LOCK Parameter Setting Function OFF e Turns the keylock function OFF This is the factory set default 1 e Prohibits any parameter setting from being changed When 1 is selected no change is allowed to any of the operating and setup parameters only viewing the parameters is allowed however In this case it is only possible to change the LOCK parameter Selecting OFF turns the keylock function OFF 2 e Prohibits operating parameters from being viewed The operating parameter setting display is not shown so settings cannot be changed The setup parameter setting display can be viewed however by holding down the key for more than 3 seconds when an operating display is being shown If a password has been set a password verification display will appear If the correct password was entered the setup parameter setting display appears You can now change the setup parameter setting 3 Disables the am key You are not allowed to
56. display Refer to the Note 1 to 3 above ak 2 Press thef key to display the p a di parameter DIS setting display rH rib aT 51 SH T57 SE C53 rut 54 bSL Lol at Pg obo cy IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 3 1 References Related to Contact Input gt Ref 3 5 lt lt Ref 3 1 References Related to Contact Input gt gt Ref 3 1 2 Changing contact input functions for the UT450 UT420 With UT450 9 Max contact input terminals can be used Note The terminal numbers are 18 19 20 common terminal 28 30 common terminal 37 38 39 and 40 With UT420 6 Max contact input terminals can be used Note The terminal numbers are 18 19 20 common terminal 28 29 and 30 common terminal lt UT450 Terminal Arrangement gt O C OJOLOIOJIOILOISIOLOS OLJI Oo O DIS is a setup parameter l Changing DIS setpoint allows you to change the function of external contact input DCACAAOONO WMVO OO oO Note The numbers of contact Input terminals differ according to the controllers suffix code Check the numbers of input terminals DI1 to DI6 and R L of the controller that you have by the following table O shows available x shows not available i Contact input terminals Model and suffix codes DH DI2 DI3 Dl4
57. for output 2 for the UP550 20 only E D register and I register numbers assigned to contact outputs and extended contact outputs set at the factory The registered numbers of the alarm and other functions assigned to contact output registration parameters DO1 to DO7 are shown below Model Registered contact output parameters Function Registered number DO1 PV event 1 output 5705 l relay number DO2 PV event 2 output 5706 l relay number DO3 Instrument alarm 1 output 5689 l relay number Common to UP750 DO4 Time event 1 output 5129 I relay number ane road DO5 Time event 2 output 5130 I relay number DO6 Time event 3 output 5131 I relay number DO7 Time event 4 output 5132 l relay number DO3 Cooling side output in 1607 D register number heating cooling control UP750 only DO4 Cooling side output in 1609 D register number heating cooling control IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt Ref 3 55 lt Ref 3 2 References Related to Contact Output gt 6 Dual loop control UP mode 11 This function is for the UP750 only Contact output Output Type Function DO1 Relay PV event 1 output DO2 Relay PV event 2 output or cooling side output in heating cooling control in loop 2 Note DO3 Relay Instrument alarm 1 output or cooling side output in heating cooling control in loop 1 Note DO4 Tra
58. limi ee erent 47 imits Deviation setpoint PV value Target setpoint Hysteresis Closed Hysteresis Within deviation Open Off l Open Off upper lower i A i limits Deviation setpoint PV value qra PV value value m gt Deviation setpoint Target setpoint Target setpoint Hysteresis Deviation Ped E Open Off lower limit A a setpoint BY value Target setpoint De energization pysteresis in case of PV upper limit Clesed on i Open On alarm Alarm setpoint PV value De energization Ee D en raization Hysteresis in case of 9 a ape Closed Open On i deviation or a p in case of PV Open On i Closed Off upper limit D ti tooint lower limit a j eviation se poin alarm Le alarm a oo PV value value Alarm setpoint PV value Target setpoint 25 hee ae See Ref 3 79 Firs Sensor ground alarm See Ref 3 84 FAIL output See Ref 3 79 a Hysteresis 28 Hysteresis 30 Setpoint Output value upper limit upper limit j 68 ERG A 70 Output value Alarm setpoint i 31 Hysteresis 29 Setpoint Output value lower limit lower limit a 69 A A Alarm setpoint Setpoint Alarm setpoint Output value Alarm type codes 1 to 20 and 28 to 31 in the table above are assigned for the primary loop while alarm type codes 41 to 60 and 68 to 71 are assigned for the secondary loop In addition codes 1 to 10 and 41 to 50 denote alarms with no stand by act
59. lt Ref 1 1 References Related to PV Input gt Ref 1 2 E PV input biasing adds a constant bias value to the PV input value and the result is used for the controller display and control computation PV input value PV input bias PV value inside the controller In some cases the measured value is smaller than the actual value by a constant amount due to the physical circumstances at the sensor point For example the ambient temperature inside a furnace is often measured instead of the material s temperature In such cases add a constant value for biasing When the PV value is within the allowable accuracy range but there is a dispersion in PV readings between other equipment it is possible to use this function for fine adjustment The following parameters are used Operating parameters Operation related parameters BS and FL UP750 UT5 UP35 free ore ate Description Setting range Default D register No Code Code Code BS h D h 5 PV input bias 100 0 to 100 0 of 0 0 of input 243 BS BS input range span range span 273 Note1 FL Fi Fi PV input filter OFF or 1 to 120s OFF 244 FL FL No filtering 274 Note2 Note1 For dual loop control of UP750 and UT750 the D register number of loop 2 BS is 273 Note2 For dual loop control of UP750 and UT750 the D register number of loop 2 FL is 274 To set the parameter
60. output never reacts over sensitively against a change in the For UT series Remote mode or cascade mode the modeis Control output bump is primary loop output Rather it delivers stable control output operation defined by setting allowed during as MOD 1 change in SP value For UP series PV Program mode operation except for SP gt hold or soak mode X MV Note1 In the table above the UT series refers to the UT750 UT500 UT400 and UT3 Note2 In the table above the UP series refers to the UP750 UP550 and UP35 Note3 The local mode of the UP series refers to the operating mode in which the SP value is kept constant IM 05J01B02 01E Ref 2 5 The relationship between the control mode and operating condition of the UP750 UP550 UT750 UTSI 0 is as shown in Table 2 1 2 below 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 2 1 References Related to Control Output gt Ref 2 6 2 Control Mode Selection when the Model Is UP35 or UT32 UT35 To select the PID control mode use one of the setup parameters explained below To set change the parameter see the Initial Settings or Parameters user s manual of the model in question e Setup parameters Control Action related Parameters C MD UP35 UT3 ay Description Setting Range Default D register No Code
61. 1 Note1 If the UP UT mode has been set for using loop 2 or the secondary loop also set the corresponding parameters under a a I d E Ji the main menu PYS2 in the same way Lf move H e H tre usr EEES stup jH i A 2 Press the key 23 times to display the E E parameter 1 PMD Note2 And adjust the parameter value 0 or 1 using the 4 J keys then press the 3 key to register it rapean 9 a1 E Note2 1 PMD is the parameter for UP750 UP550 and UT750 HZ H 1 MD is the parameter for UT550 UT551 and UT520 ras Czas i b3 2 b3 aa Baa 3 Press the key once to display the param Hse Less eter main menu PYS1 and then ye eee press 27 key again to display the parameter EARE 1 a1 Note3 ur i l zer Mie as Note3 1 a1 is the parameter for UP750 UP550 and UT750 EN i zas 1 A1 is the parameter for UT550 UT551 and UT520 Tato ato p10 2 b10 ian 2att 4 Thereafter adjust the display value for each en EXC ya gt parameter in the order shown in the parameter 1 PMD table above using the 4 J keys then press the key to register them IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition
62. 1001 to 1100 Common setup parameters AIN RET TRND LOCK Setup parameters Display VO registration 1101 to 1200 Pp parameters C SEL DO DI C PYS UT UP mode I O type 1201 to 1300 parameters UPMD IN OUT R485 INIT 1301 to 1500 i Input block Yser abfined custom Block I O module output 1501 to 1700 computation area Note3 Output block Note1 D register numbers 1 through 49 are read only registers Note2 D register numbers 50 through 100 User area are registers for 16 bit device data those are used with the device like a graphic display Do not read or write the data from to the D registers in these area when you use the Device like a display Note3 The D registers in this area 1301 to 1700 are used with LL200 PC based Custom Computation Building Tool and only UP750 or UT750 can use them The data in these area use 0 through 30000 count 0 to 100 data or flags or absolute data IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 8 1 Outline of Registers and relays gt Ref 8 4 UP750 UP550 D register Map Table 8 1 2 1 4 UP750 UP550 D register Map 1 4 PROCESS PROGRAM MODE PAR OPERATION I No 101 No 151 No 201 No 251 No 301 No 351 No E w 451 ADERROR 101 LSP1 251 ORH 1 301 ERROR 1 102 LSP1 252 ORL 1 302 PV 1 103 PIDNO CSP 1 104 EV21A OUT 1 105 EV21B HOUT 1 106 EV22A COUT 1 107 EV22B MOD 1 108 EV23A R P L PIDNO 1 109 EV23B HOL D
63. 110 EV24A ADV ALM 111 EV24B A M 1 PVEV 112 EV25A A M 2 TMEV1 113 EV25B LSP CAS TM EV2 114 EV26A PTNO PTN 115 EV26B SEGNO 116 EV27A TIM E 117 EV27B MOUT 1 ERROR 2 118 EV28A MOUTc 1 PV 2 119 EV28B MOUT 2 CSP 2 120 MOUTc 2 OUT 2 121 HOLDSP 1 HOUT 2 122 HOLDSP 2 COUT 2 123 HOL DTM MOD 2 SST PIDNO 2 125 DEV 1 126 OR 1 128 129 130 132 133 134 PARAERR 135 ALOSTS 136 138 139 140 TIME PTNO 142 SEGNO 143 SEGUSE 144 REM RCY 145 ALL RCY 146 RST REN 148 PVEOSTS ae unused area z Note The code in the square like a RDISTS is used only with UP750 The number attached to the end of code means loop number 1 indicates that the code is for the loop 1 For example CSP 1 is the code for the loop 1 and CSP 2 is for the loop 2 The number attached to the top of code means PID group number 1 indicates that the code is for the PID group 1 For example 1 P is the code for the PID group 1 and 2 P is for the PID group 2 IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 8 1 Outline of Registers and relays gt Ref 8 5 Table 8 1 2 2 4 UP750 UP550 D register Map 2 4 MG 10 MG11 MG 12 MG13 MG14 MG15 MG 16 MG17 MG18 MG19 MG20 MG21 MG22 MG23 MG24 MG25 MG 26 MG27 MG28 MG29 MG30 MG3t MG32 MG33 MG34 MG35 MG36 MG37 MG38 MG39 MG 40 MG41 MG 42 MG43 MG 44 MG45 MG 46 MG 47
64. 1187 1188 1189 1190 1191 1192 1193 1194 1195 1196 1197 1198 1199 1200 The code in the square like a A BS2 is used only with UP750 unused area The code in the shaded square like a V RS is used only with UP550 1 indicates that the code is for the loop 1 The number attached to the end of code means loop number 1251 1252 DLN1 ADR1 RP T1 The number attached to the top of code means PID group number 1 000 indicates that the code is for the PID group 1 IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 8 1 Outline of Registers and l relays gt Ref 8 7 Table 8 1 2 4 4 UP750 UP550 D register Map 4 4 INPUT BLOCK OUTPUT BLOCK No 1301 No 1351 No 1401 No 1451 No 1501 No 1551 No 1601 No 1651 1301 1302 1303 1304 1305 1306 1307 1308 1309 1310 1311 1312 1313 1314 1315 1316 1317 1318 1319 1320 1321 1322 1323 1324 1325 1326 1327 1328 1329 1330 Note AIN1 AIN2 AIN3 PVIN 1 PVIN 2 RSPIN 1 RSPIN 2 GAIN 1 GAIN 2 TRG 1 TRG 2 TRF 1 TRF 2 1351 1352 1353 1354 1355 1356 1357 1358 1359 1360 1361 1362 1363 1364 1365 1366 1367 1368 1369 1370 1371 PROG RESET LOCAL HOLD ADV A M 1 A M 2 LSP CAS PTNO bO PTNO b1 PTNO b2 1372 PTNO b3 1373 PTNO b4 1374 PTNO b5 1375 PTNO b6 1376 PTNO b7 1377 PTNO b8 1378 DP1 1379 _DP2
65. 18 1420 TSP 1 19 1421 TSP 1 20 1422 TSP 1 21 1423 TSP 1 22 1424 TSP 1 23 142 TSP1 24 1426 TSP1 25 1427 TSP 1 26 1428 TSP1 27 1429 TSP1 28 1430 TSP1 29 1431 TSP1 30 142 TSP1 31 1433 TSP1 32 14 TSP1 33 1435 TSP 1 34 1436 TSP1 35 1437 TSP1 36 143 TSP1 37 1439 TSP1 38 1440 TSP1 39 1441 TSP1 40 1442 TSP 1 41 1443 TSP1 42 1444 TSP1 43 1445 TSP 1 44 1446 TSP1 45 1447 TSP1 46 1448 TSP1 47 1449 TSP1 48 1450 TSP1 49 lt Ref 8 1 Outline of Registers and relays gt 1451 TSP1 50 1462 TSP1 51 1453 TSP1 52 1454 TSP1 53 1455 TSP 1 54 1456 TSP1 55 1457 TSP1 56 1458 TSP1 57 1459 TSP1 58 1460 TSP1 59 1461 TSP1 60 1462 TSP1 61 1463 TSP1 62 1464 TSP1 63 146 TSP 1 64 1466 TSP1 65 1467 TSP1 66 1468 TSP1 67 1469 TSP1 68 1470 TSP1 69 1471 TSP1 70 1472 TSP1 71 1473 TSP1 72 1474 TSP1 73 147 TSP1 74 1476 TSP1 75 1477 TSP1 76 1478 TSP1 77 1479 TSP1 78 1480 TSP1 79 1481 TSP1 80 148 TSP1 81 1483 TSP1 82 1484 TSP1 83 148 TSP1 84 1486 TSP1 85 1487 TSP 1 86 1488 TSP1 87 1489 TSP1 88 1490 TSP 1 89 1491 TSP1 90 1492 TSP1 91 1498 TSP1 92 1494 TSP1 93 149 TSP 1 94 1496 TSP 1 95 1497 TSP1 96 1498 TSP1 97 1499 TSP 1 98 1500 TSP1 99 UP750 UP550 B register Map 2 2 TSP2 1501 1502 1508 1504 1505 1506 1507 1508 SSP2 TSP24 TSP22 TSP23 TSP24 TSP25 TSP26 TSP2 7 1509 TSP28 1510 TSP29 1511 TSP2 10 1512 TSP2 11 1513 TSP212 1514 TSP2 13 1515 TSP2 14 1516 TSP215 1517 TSP2 16 1518 TSP217 1519 TS
66. 2 Using the keylock function to prevent unauthorized key operation lt lt Ref 7 1 References Related to Security gt gt Ref 7 1 1 Setting a password to prevent unauthorized changes to setup parameters A password can be set with all controllers of the UT and UP Series By setting a password you can prevent inadvertent changes to setup parameters The password is verified when you switch from the operating parameter setting display to the setup parameter setting display A CAUTION e Always remember your password Once a password has been set you cannot access the setup parameter setting display unless you enter the correct password To cancel your password the controller must be serviced for a fee at a Yokogawa service center e Canceling a password reverts all parameters back to their factory set defaults For this reason it is strongly recommended to keep a written record of all controller parameter settings The following parameters are used Change parameters as explained in the User s Manuals Initial Settings and Parameter Map e Setup parameters Security related Parameters PWD UP750 UP35 UP550 UT5 UT750 UT400 Description Setting range Default D register No UT3 Code Code PWD Pud Password settig 0 Passward not set Note1 0 No register No PWD or 1 to 30000 However 1 to 9999 with UP350 UT350 or UT320 Note The setpoint 0 means a password has not
67. 257 A M1 321 TME1 2 AD2ERR 66 130 TME2 194 AD2ERR 258 322 TME2 3 AD3ERR 67 131 TME3 195 AD8ERR 259 323 TME3 4 68 132 196 260 324 5 AD1BO 69 133 TME4 197 AD1BO 261 325 TME4 6 AD2BO 70 134 TME5 198 AD2BO 262 326 TMES5 7 AD3BO 71 135 TME6 199 AD3BO 263 327 TME6 8 72 136 200 264 328 9 RJC1ERR 73 RESET 137 TME7 201 RJC1ERR 265 RESET 329 TME7 10 RJC2ERR 74 PROG 138 TME8 202 RJC2ERR 266 PROG 330 TME8 11 75 LOCAL 139 203 267 LOCAL 331 12 76 140 204 268 332 13 77 HOLD 141 205 269 HOLD 333 14 78 WAIT 142 206 270 WAIT 334 15 79 AT1 143 207 271 AT1 335 16 80 144 208 272 336 17 PV1ADC 81 A M2 145 TMEQ 209 PV1ADC 273 A M2 337 TME9 18 PV1BO 82 146 TME10 210 PV1BO 274 338 TME10 19 RJC1ERR 83 147 TME11 211 RJC1ERR 275 339 TME11 20 84 148 212 276 340 21 PVi over 85 149 TME12 213 PV1 over 277 341 TME12 22 PV1 over 86 150 TME13 214 PV1 over 278 342 TME13 23 87 151 TME14 215 279 343 TME14 24 88 152 216 280 344 25 89 CAS LSP 153 TME15 217 281 CAS LSP 345 TME15 26 90 154 TME16 218 282 346 TME16 27 91 155 WEND 219 283 347 28 92 156 220 284 348 29 93 157 PTEND 221 285 349 PTEND 30 94 158 PTEND3 222 286 350 31 ATIERR 95 AT2 159 PTEND5 223 AT1ERR 287 AT2 351 e 352 353 DI1 Er e J J er JL JEES i j SARIE il AAA elgigigigigigicivgi2 h BQ O S O
68. 3 and OUTn 4 is the cycle time PV ON OFF rate detection band ORB Target setpoint ON OFF rate detection 525s flocs steer tee ems sea h eR Sate Se eae band ORB ON OFF rate high limit ORF 0 he Sie ee ieee le eee eae Control output i i ON OFF rate OR ON OFF rate Control output moving average computation SS starts here i Computation completed here i ON OFF rate low limit ORL Since the ON OFF rate OR exceeded the ON OFF rate high limit ORH the sensor ground alarm was output Sensor ground alarm output Fig 3 3 6 As shown above set the ON OFF rate high limit ORH and the ON OFF rate low limit ORL to a slightly wider range than the output normal range And because ON OFF rate computation starts when PV is within the ON OFF rate detection band set the ON OFF detection band close to the target setpoint If set too wide the sensor ground alarm will trigger when output is unstable hence it will be output frequently The following parameters are used Change parameters as explained in the User s Manuals Initial Settings and Parameter Map e Setup parameters Alarm related Parameters AL1 AL2 AL3 AL4 Note1 UT750 UT5 T4 mae regi Ut o Description Setting range Default a Eain Code Code AL1 Al l Alarm 1 type 25 To use the sensor ground 1 PV high limit 915 loop 1
69. 4 8 Note2 These setpoints are for the secondary loop or loop 2 See Alarm Type Code in Table 3 4 8 for more information on the setting range Note3 Same as the setting range and factory set default of the parameter E21B Local Event 21 Setpoint IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 Blank Page lt Toc gt lt Ref 4 1 References Related to Target Setpoints gt Ref 4 1 Ref 4 1 References Related to Target Setpoints A IMPORTANT Applicable models of this section UP750 UP550 UP35 UT750 UT5 UT400 UT3 None None None UT750 UT5 UT400 UT3 Note Some of the functions below are not available on certain models For more information see those sections This section contains reference information on the following aspects of Target Setpoints Refer to this information and change parameters only if necessary 1 2 3 4 Using Multiple Target Setpoints 8 Max Selecting PID selection method Target SP selection or Zone PID selection Limiting Changes in Target Setpoints Setting ramp grades when switching between target setpoints IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 4 1 References Related to Target Setpoints gt Ref 4 2 lt lt Ref 4 1 References Related to Target Setpoints gt gt Ref 4 1 1 Using Multiple Targ
70. 7 2 Using contact I O expansion module with the UP750 n se Ref 3 34 7 3 Using Interrupt message functions with the UP750 eee Ref 3 36 7 4 Using Interrupt operating display functions with the UP750 Ref 3 39 Ref 3 2 References Related to Contact Output cssssseeeeeeeeeeeeeees Ref 3 40 Ref 3 2 1 Changing Contact Output Functions for the UT750 UT550 UT551 and UT520 insire aiaei anamsan aaaea aaea aai aa aeaa aa aaia ea aaan aaa Ref 3 41 1 Single loop control UT mode 1 ssseeseeseeeeeeeseeseesesresrssrnesrssrrssn Ref 3 44 2 Cascade primary loop control UT mode 2 eeeeeeeeeeeeeereeeeeeeeteeees Ref 3 45 3 Cascade secondary loop control UT mode 3 ececeeeeeeteeeeeeeeees Ref 3 45 4 Cascade control UT mode 4 eeceecceeee cece ceeeeeceeeeeaeeeeaeeteaeeeeeeeeaes Ref 3 46 5 Loop control for backup UT mode 5 ceececeteeeeeeeeeeeeteeteneeeeeeteees Ref 3 46 6 Loop control with PV switching UT mode 6 s es Ref 3 47 7 Loop control with PV auto selector UT mode 7 csceeeeeeereeereees Ref 3 47 8 Loop control with PV hold function UT mode 8 s Ref 3 48 9 Dual loop control UT Mode 11 0 eee eeceeeeeeeeneeeeeneeeeenaeeeeenaeeeeeaaes Ref 3 48 10 Temperature and humidity control UT mode 12 Ref 3 48 11 Cascade control with two universal inputs UT mode 13 e Ref 3 49 12 Loop control with PV switchi
71. AL1 to AL4 Note UP750 SERN Description Setting Range Default oo Code AL1 Instrument alarm 1 type Set to 25 when using the 1 PV upper limit Note 915 AL2 Instrument alarm 2 type ea Tor 2 PV lower limit Note 916 AL3 Instrument alarm 3 type Set to 65 when using the 1 PV upper limit Note 917 sensor ground alarm for AL4 Instrument alarm 4 type the secondary loop of the UP750 2 PV lower limit Note 918 Note Each instrument alarm type parameter defaults to either code 1 PV upper limit or code 2 PV lower limit To use the sensor ground alarm function be sure to change each of these parameters to 25 or 65 IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 3 4 References Related to Instrument Alarms and Events gt Ref 3 88 e Setup parameters Output related Parameters CT1 and CT2 Note1 UP750 SP90 Description Setting Range Default i Code CT1 Control output 1 30 sec 1240 cycle time 1 to 1000 sec CT2 Control output 2 30 sec 1241 Note2 cycle time Note1 The parameters in this table are not displayed for a position proportional control type UP550 1Licontroller Note2 Displayed for the UP750 only The CT2 parameter is not displayed however for a UP750 controller of the cascade control type or a cascade control type with two universal inputs Operating parameters Operation related Parameters ORB
72. B register Map Only UP750 or UT750 use the B registers When you use the function of communication the making of Program patterns are permitted with the B registers Refer to the manual of Communication function Optional for more details Each B register has a B register number The number of each B register can be confirmed by the B register Map See Table 8 1 8 When you want to know the classification of B registers see the Table 8 1 7 below Table 8 1 7 Register No Classification Description Start target setpoint wait function 1 to 100 Program pattern read write operation repeat function etc 101 to 140 Segment information read write operation Event function etc 1301 to 1600 99 segments TSP value Target setpoint etc 1602 to 1700 99 segments segment time TIME Segment time time setting or ratio setting Use SEG T parameter IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 8 1 Outline of Registers and relays gt Ref 8 24 UP750 UP550 B register Map Table 8 1 8 1 2 PTNO SEGNO RDTRG WRTRG RTN ERR ONoOoaRWD rem SEG rem EV 10 PTN SEG 11 SP1 12 SP2 13 STC 14 1 WZ1 15 16 1 WT M 17 2 WZ1 18 19 2 WTM 20 3 WZ1 21 22 3 WTM 23 4WZ1 24 25 4 WTM 26 5 WZ1 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 P NAME1 41 P NAME2 42 P NAME3 43 P NAME4 44 P NAME5 45 P NAME6 46 P NAM
73. DI4 preceding target setpoint DI4 39 00 5V 39 AUTO when DI5 ON DIS MAN when DI5 OFF DIS 38 ie 38 2 DI6 STOP when DI6 ON 7 RUN when DI6 OFF DI6 37 us m E bi Remote when DI7 ON DI7 36 o 36 Local when DI7 OFF COM XJ ar como Meo Contact rating 12 V DC 10 mA or more Fig 3 1 5 UT750 Contact Input Terminals The UT750 s DI numbers DI No and the corresponded terminal numbers are listed in the Table 3 1 7 The factory set function of each terminal is listed in the table Table 3 1 7 When the UT750 Single loop control mode UT mode 1 Terminal No DI No I relay no 5000 The factory set function 19 DI 5161 o 18 Fete ee DI2 OEEO 5162 Peen a Assigns the function of selecting the target setpoint number 40 DI3 5163 1 SP to 8 SP Note1 8393 DE 65164 e Ci lt z WH 5165 Assigns the function of switching between auto and manual modes Note2 a eee eee 616 Assigns the function of switching between STOP and RUN statuses Note3 86 5167 Assigns the function of switching between remote and local modes Note4 a ee Common terminal forDI to DI 0 Note1 The relationship between the ON OFF status of each DI contact input and the setpoint numbers is given in Table 3 1 8 Note2 In a dual loop control configuration the loop 1 auto manual mode switching function is assigned to DI5 when the controller is shipped from the factory Note3 In a dual loop control
74. DI5 DIG R L UT450 00 O O x x x x x UT450 011 O O O O O O O UT450 02 O O x x x x O UT450 03 O O O O O O x UT450 04 O Q x x x x O UT420 00 O O x x x x x UT420 07 O O O x x x O UT420 08 O O O x x x O Terminal Correspondence between parameter DIS and external contact input functions When DIS 0 When DIS 1 Factory shipped setting When DIS 2 When DIS 3 When DIS 4 OD Contact Di AUTO when DI1 ON AUTO when DI1 ON STOP when DI1 ON When switching target 1 SS lt O No 19 No function MAN when DI1 OFF MAN when DI1 OFF RUN when DI1 OFF 1 SPD SPbSPASA 2 DI2 No function STOP when DI2 ON 2 SP when DI2 ON 2 SP when DI2 ON Di1 OFF ON OFF ON pi2 1gk o No 18 u RUN when DI2 OFF 1 SP when DI2 OFF 1 SP when DI2 OFF DI2 OFFIOFF ON ON DI3 No functi When switching target SP 1 to 8 STOP when DI3 ON AUTO when DI3 ON STOP when DI3 ON DI3 40 o No 40 o function H SPB SPIS SPH SPE SPI6 SPI7 SPB SP RUN when DI3 OFF MAN when DI3 OFF RUN when DI3 OFF DI3 ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF i a No function Di4 OFFION ON OFFOFF ON ON OFF No function No function ATO V DI4 394 O No 39 DiS OFF OFFIOFF ON ON ON ON OFF we Ne No function DISOFFOFFOFFOFFOFFOFFOFFION No function No function No function DI5 38 No
75. DO1 3 Define the type of signal to be output from the terminal For example if time event 1 output is issued with a relay contact output using terminal number 6 register the I relay number 5000 for the time event 1 output to parameter DO1 The I relay number for time event 1 output is 129 as indicated on the I relay map For this register setpoint 5129 for parameter DO1 STATUS ON No ds No 65 No 1297 No 1937 No 2577 No 3217 1 ADIERR 65 A M1 129 TME1 193 AD1ERR 257 A M1 321 TME1 2 AD2ERR 66 130 A TME2 194 AD2ERR 258 322 TME2 3 AD3ERR 67 131 TME3 195 ADS3ERR 259 323 TME3 4 68 132 196 260 324 5 AD1BO C 197 AD1BO 261 325 TME4 6 AD2BO 262 326 TMES5 l relay number for AD3BO 327 TME time event 1 output 32 IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt Ref 3 51 lt Ref 3 2 References Related to Contact Output gt To change the contact output functions use the parameters listed below Refer to the Default Settings or Parameters section of the appropriate User s Manual to change the parameter values e Setup parameters Contact Output Registration Parameters DO1 to DO7 UP750 UP550 rae Setting Range and D register Description Default Settings No Code DO1 DO1 output flag registration 1106 relay DO2 DO2 output flag registration 1107 relay DOS ae output flag registration The setting rang
76. If all of the contact inputs are set to OFF DIG the controller uses the immediatel F gt O No 37 No function preceding target setpoint y No function No function No function DI6 37 COM 1 jt No 20 No function Common Common Common Common com 20 R L Remote when R L ON Remote when R L ON Remote when R L ON Remote when R L ON Remote when R L ON No 28 _ Local when R L OFF Local when R L OFF Local when R L OFF Local when R L OFF Local when R L OFF py og oN COM No 30 Common Common Common Common Common COM 30 T Fig 3 1 2 UT450 Contact Input Terminals lt UT420 Terminal Arrangement gt 2 Q OCOAOCOCOOCO0OO QVO Q OO O DIS is a setup parameter Changing DIS setpoint al Contact rating 12 V DC 10 mA or more lows you to change the function of external contact input Terminal Correspondence between parameter DIS and external contact input functions rminal When DIS 0 When DIS 1 Factory shipped setting When DIS 2 When DIS 3 When DIS 4 On Contact Dit No function AUTO when DIT ON AUTOwhenDI 0N STOP when DIt ON MPP SBP iy OL ONG No 19 MAN when DI1 OFF __ MANwhen DI1 OFF RUN when DI1 OFF 1 SPe SPB SPI4 SP DI2 No function STOP when DI2 ON 2 SP when DI2 ON 2 SP when DI2 ON DI1OFF ON OFF ON pie 18 Ew No 18 RUN
77. MG 48 MG49 NAME1 NAM E2 NAM E3 NAM E4 NAMES NAM E6 NAME7 848 NAME8 849 NAMEQ 850 NAME10 Y oO o 2 oO me o o 5 Z 5 A _ unused area 41 Note The code in the square is used only with UP750 The number attached to the end of code means loop number 1 indicates that the code is for the loop 1 The number attached to the top of code means PID group number 1 indicates that the code is for the PID group 1 For example 1 P is the code for the PID group 1 and 2 P is for the PID group 2 IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 8 1 Outline of Registers and relays gt Ref 8 6 Table 8 1 2 3 4 CONF UP750 UP550 D register Map 3 4 No 1001 No 1051 No 1101 No 1151 No 1201 No 1251 1001 1002 1003 1004 Note A BS1 1151 ADV 1201 A FL1 1152 A M 1 1202 A SR1 1153 A M 2 1203 A LC1 1154 LSP CAS 1204 1155 PTNO bO 1205 1156 PTNO b1 1206 1157 PTNO b2 1207 1158 PTNO b3 1208 1159 PTNO b4 1209 1160 PTNO b5 1210 unused area 1116 RDO154 1166 1117 RDO155 1167 1118 RDO156 1168 1119 RDO157 1169 1120 RDO158 1170 1121 RDO251 1171 1122 RDO252 1172 1222 1123 RDO253 1173 1223 1124 RDO254 1174 1224 1125 RDO255 1175 1225 1126 RDO256 1176 1226 1127 RDO257 1177 1227 1128 RDO258 1178 1179 1180 1181 1182 1183 1184 1185 1186
78. Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt lt Ref 1 1 Reference Related to PV Input gt gt Ref 1 1 3 lt Ref 1 1 References Related to PV Input gt Square root extraction of PV Ref 1 9 Square root extraction is available with UP750 UP550 UT750 UT550 UT551 and UT520 This calculation is used to convert for example a differential pressure signal from a throttling flow meter such as an orifice and nozzle into a flow rate signal A low signal cut off point can also be set Slope 1 Fig 100 0 0 0 A Input Low signal cut off point 0 0 5 0 1 1 4 Square root Extraction The following parameters are used e Setup parameters Analog Input Computation Parameters 100 0 The low signal cut off point is set using parameter A LC1 or other see table below UP750 UT5 Nees Description Setting range Default ial Code Code A SR1 cri Analog input 1 OFF or ON OFF 1003 SR1 spuare root ON Compute the square root computation A LC1 H i Analog input 1 0 0 to 5 0 of PV input range 1 0 1004 LC1 low signal cutoff A SR2 no function Analog input 2 OFF or ON OFF 1007 Note 1 spuare root ON Compute the square root computation A LC2 no function Analog input 2 0 0 to 5 0 of PV input range 1 0 1008 Note 1 low signal cutoff A SR3 or Analog input 3 OFF or ON OFF 1011 Note 2 SR3 spuare root ON Compute the square root computation A LC3 H E 7 An
79. Note1 Transistor Not assigned DO6 Note1 Transistor Not assigned DO7 Note1 Transistor FAIL output Note1 Used for the UT550 01 UT550 03 UT551 O1C and UT551 HD only Note2 If the control output selects a transistor output alarm 4 output is assigned to the relay terminal for output 1 and alarm 3 output is also output 2 UT550 2 5 Loop control for E UT750 assigned to the relay terminal for only backup UT mode 5 DO Output Type Function DO1 Relay Alarm 1 output DO2 Relay Alarm 2 output DO3 Relay Alarm 3 output or cooling side control in heating cooling control Note DO4 Transistor Alarm 4 output or cooling side control in heating cooling control Note DO5 Transistor Alarm 3 output DO6 Transistor Alarm 4 output DO7 Transistor FAIL output Note When heating cooing control using relay or transistor output in control output is selected cooling side output is assigned to DO3 or DO4 above E UT550 UT520 UT551 DO Output Type Function DO1 Relay Alarm 1 output DO2 Relay Alarm 2 output DO3 Relay FAIL output DO4 Note1 Transistor Alarm 4 output Note2 DO5 Note1 Transistor Alarm 3 output Note2 DO6 Note1 Transistor Not assigned DO7 Note1 Transistor Not assigned Note1 Used for the UT550 01 UT550 03 UT551 LC and UT551 HD only Note2 If the control output selects a tran
80. Note3 Relay O C Time event 12 output 5149 I relay number R255 Note3 Relay O C Time event 13 output 5150 I relay number R256 Note3 Relay O C Time event 14 output 5151 l relay number R257 Note3 Relay O C Time event 15 output 5153 I relay number R258 Note3 Relay O C Time event 16 output 5154 I relay number Note1 O C in the table below indicates the open collector output transistor output Note2 Extended contact output of contact I O expansion module 1 connected to the UP750 Note3 Extended contact output of contact I O expansion module 2 connected to the UP750 IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 3 2 References Related to Contact Output gt Ref 3 60 These functions can be used simply by connecting the I O expansion module to the UP750 via u bus communica tions In addition part or all of the I O expansion module terminal functions can also be changed To do this follow the steps below The I O expansion module contact output terminals and the corresponding contact output parameter setup parameter numbers are shown in Table 3 2 7 1 Select the desired I O expansion module contact output terminals 2 Check the contact output parameter corresponding to the selected contact terminal by referring to the table below 3 Display the contact output parameter setup display and then register the D register or I register numbers 5000 for setpoint output For exampl
81. ORH and ORL UP750 mone Description Setting Range Default oo Code ORB ON OFF rate detection 0 0 to 100 0 of 1 0 of PV 250 The primary loop band PV input range span input range span 280 The secondary loop ORH ON OFF rate high limit ORL 1 digit to 105 0 100 0 251 The primary loop 281 The secondary loop ORL ON OFF rate low limit 5 0 to ORH 1 digit 0 0 252 The primary loop 282 The secondary loop E Setting the Required Parameters To use the sensor ground alarm some parameters must be set at the same time These parameters are setup parameters Aln CTn CTcn and operating Parameters ORB ORH ORL Carry out the parameter setting operation shown below Here we explain how to display the parameter setting display and to change the parameter values Before carrying out these operations be sure to refer to the User s Manuals Initial Settings and Parameter Map of the controller The parameter map is very helpful in finding the path to the setting display for a particular parameter 1 Referring to the User s Manual above display Setup Parameter Map for UPSS0 UP750 the setup parameter main menu PARA Then display the submenu ALM Parameter Setup display ae 2 Press the key nine times to display the ep parameter AL1 With the UP750 or UP550 aH the sensor ground alarm can be set to any of ae AL1 AL2 AL3 or AL4
82. Program operation Fig 5 2 26 Switching Between Operation Modes The controller can be transferred to local mode with the key while the program is running Ay CAUTION The operation mode can be transferred with a key operation by external contacts or via communications When transferring through external contacts see Section Ref 3 1 earlier in this manual When transferring via communications see the separate GREEN Series Communications User s Manual In the local mode the controller runs at the target constant setpoint set with the program parameter LSP1 Note1 For this set LSP1 and the other parameters shown in the following table to the required values before running the controller in the local mode Note1 LSP2 can also be used when using dual loop control or temperature and humidity control with the UP750 IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 5 2 References Related to Program Setup gt Ref 5 42 The following parameters are used herein To change the parameter values consult the Program Setup or Parameters in the appropriate User s Manual Program parameters local setpoint parameters LSP1 LSP2 PID EnA and EnB UP750 mapas Description Setting range Default D register No Code LSP1 Target setpoint 1 in local mode 9 9 to 100 0 of PV input 0 0 of PV 101 LSP2 Target setpoint 2 in local mode ange within PV1 or PV2 input span 102 Note1
83. Registers and relays gt Ref 8 2 lt lt Ref 8 1 Outline of Registers and relays gt gt Ref 8 1 1 Outline of Registers and relays With all the GREEN Series controllers the function of all terminals are specified when the Controller is shipped from the factory Especially with UP750 UP550 UT750 UT550 UT551 and UT520 that can specify a controller mode the function of terminals are specified for each controller mode However the function of terminals can be changed if necessary To change them use the D registers or relays When you use the personal computer or the graphic display centralized watching of control status can be permit ted with the D registers When you use the function of communication the Program patterns making are permitted with the B registers Ref 8 1 1 to Ref 8 1 5 show the outline and Registers or I relays map list Refer to them if necessary IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 Ref 8 3 lt Toc gt lt Ref 8 1 Outline of Registers and relays gt lt lt Ref 8 1 Outline of Registers and relays gt gt Ref 8 1 2 D register Outline and D register Map The process data or setting parameters operating parameters or setup parameters are kept in the D registers With D registers the followings are permitted e Registration of SELECT displays Note1 e Building the User defining area Note2 e Reading writing data with the programmable logic con
84. Related to Program Setup gt Ref 5 11 The parameter used for setting the start code is as follows e Program Parameter Parameters for setting the Conditions of Program Operation Startup STC UP750 UP35 UP550 Description Setting range Default eu sav Code Code STC E GE r Start Code 0 Starting operation at 0 13 n STC Start condition start target setpoint 1 Ramp prioritized PV1 start 2 Time prioritized PV start 3 Ramp prioritized PV2 start Note1 1 Note2 Note1 Only for UP750 Dual loop control or Temperature and humidity control Note2 The wait and repeat operations described later on can be used provided STC is set to 1 UP350 can not be set 1 to the STC parameter E Setting the required parameters To set the start code carry out the operation shown below Here the setting procedure of UP750 UP550 is shown as an example 1 Refer to the Parameter Map and Program Parameter Map in the user s Manual First display the operating parameter main menu PROG then press the key to display the program parameter setting display Submenu LOC will be displayed 2 Press the 4 keys to display the UP750 UP550 Parameter Map submenu PRG And then press the key to show the PTN parameter setting display stom ks Operating Parameter PROG
85. SF ED And then press 4 keystodisplaythe WNb by ae ef program pattern number in which the segment id ee Alms pene g S meere E O i ot J i will be added or deleted and press key to a Gey pa reer a i ee register it l SSP2 TSP2 TSP2 TSP2 CLR Se paar fra TT Ee L PID PID PID NO H fea a a MENU PROG PRG 1 ewer ann Conn oii i LWz2 OFFn OFFn OFFn PTno input hwl fifin Fra Toma lean ad lwe EE Chee ei Pen ewm Ic IC PTN 1 e PNF 3 WTM IWA JO 4 WTM Y 5 WZ1 RCY 5 WZ2 RST 5 WTM REN 4 SEG will be displayed Set the segment number to be added or deleted by pressing 2 register it YJ keys and press key to MENU PROG PRG 2 SEGno input eee segment number to be added or deleted SEG 1 5 Press the key until displaying the UC setting display MENU PROG PRG 53 junction code select JC 0 IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 5 3 Handy Features for Creating and Editing Programs gt Ref 5 59 6 Press the 4 amp J keys until displaying INSERT if wanting to add segments or DELETE if wanting to delete segments Then press the key to execute the operation MENU PROG PRG 53 MENU PROG PRG 53 junction code select junction code select
86. Segment Setpoints in Hold Status Using the Repeat Functions Using the Advance Functions Signal Output at Program end Operation in Local Mode with Constant Target Setpoint lt lt Ref 5 2 References Related to Program Setup gt gt Ref 5 2 1 Selecting Program Start Condition The program start condition can be selected with the UP750 UP550 and UP350 It bases operation starting on the STC program parameter Note1 and the SSP1 start target setpoint Note2 STC can be selected from the 4 criteria Note3 below To begin with select the operation start condition with this STC program parameter e Starting operation at start target setpoint Factory set default e Ramp prioritized PV1 start Time prioritized PV start e Ramp prioritized PV2 start Only for UP750 Dual loop control or Temperature and humidity control Note1 The n STC nis either pattern No 1 or 2 is used with the UP350 Note2 SSP2 can also be used when the PT2 G setup parameter is ON with the UP750 With the UP350 the n SSP n is either pattern No 1 or 2 parameter is used Note3 With single loop controllers three operation start conditions are available The wait and repeat operations described later on can be used provided STC is set to 1 In this case the previous start condition does not change IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 5 2 References
87. Setpoint ss eeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeees Ref 4 1 Ref 4 1 1 Using Multiple Target Setpoints 8 Max cccsseeesseeeseseeeeeeeees Ref 4 2 Ref 4 1 2 Selecting PID selection method Target SP selection Zone PID or Selection by specified PID NUMDEL cssecseeesseeeeeteeeeeeeeeteenees Ref 4 10 Ref 4 1 3 Limiting Changes in Target Setpoint c cssecseeesseeeeeeeeteneeeees Ref 4 17 Ref 4 1 4 Setting ramp grades when switching between target setpoints Ref 4 18 Ref 5 1 References Related to Segment Operation cccccssssseeeees Ref 5 1 Ref 5 1 1 Selecting Segment time between Time and Ramp time Ref 5 1 Ref 5 1 2 Selecting PID control between Zone and Segment s ceseeee Ref 5 7 Ref 5 2 References Related to Program Setup cccssssssseeeeeeeeeseeeeees Ref 5 10 Ref 5 2 1 Selecting Program Start Condition csccssceteeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeteneeeens Ref 5 10 Ref 5 2 2 Using the Delayed Start Timer for Programmed Operation Ref 5 17 Ref 5 2 3 Selecting Segment end Condition cccsccsseseeseeeeenseeenteeeeteeeeees Ref 5 18 Ref 5 2 4 Using the Wait FUNCTION 2 ccccceceseeeeee cee eeneeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseneeneeneees Ref 5 24 Ref 5 2 5 Using the Hold Functions Changing Segment Setpoint in Hold Status Ref 5 30 Ref 5 2 6 Using the Repeat Functions sccceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeneseeeeeesee
88. Using square root extraction during remote input ccsseceeeeees Ref 1 27 Ref 1 2 3 Using remote setpoint filtering and ratio bias computing Ref 1 28 Ref 1 2 4 Tracking target setpoint when switching from remote to local control Ref 1 30 Ref 2 1 References Related to Control Output 0 cccssesseeeeeeeeeeseneeees Ref 2 1 Ref 2 1 1 Switching between Direct and Reverse Actions scceeeeeee Ref 2 2 Ref 2 1 2 Selecting PID Control Mode According to the Operating Condition Ref 2 4 Ref 2 1 3 Using Control Output Limiter cccceeceeeeeeeneeseeeeeeeseseeeeseeeeneeeeeeeeneas Ref 2 8 Ref 2 1 4 Using Anti reset Windup Over integration Prevention Function Ref 2 9 Ref 2 1 5 Using Super Overshoot Prevention Function csssee Ref 2 10 Ref 2 1 6 Using Super2 Hunting Prevention Function s cesseee Ref 2 11 Ref 2 1 7 Using Split signal Computation Output Function 0 e Ref 2 13 Ref 2 1 8 Setting Preset Output Values cc seceseeceeseeecenseeeeenseeeeenneeeeenees Ref 2 16 Ref 2 1 9 Placing Control Output in Tracking Mode for Cascade Primary loop Control or Loop Control for Backup Ref 2 18 Ref 2 1 10 Using Shutdown Function cccceeccceseeeceeseeeeeeseeesenseenseesseeeeenees Ref 2 19 Ref 2 2 References Related to Retransmission Output s e0 Ref 2 2
89. _ 1380 1381 1382 1383 1384 1385 1386 1387 1388 1389 1390 1391 1392 1393 1394 1395 1396 1397 1398 1399 1400 1401 MO1L 1402 MO1H 1403 MO2L 1404 MO2H 1405 MO3L 1406 MO3H 1407 MO4L 1408 MO4H 1409 MO5L MO 5H MO6L MO6H MO7L MO7H MO8L MO8H 1417 MO9L 1418 MOSH 1419 MO10L 1420 MO 10H 1421 MO11L 1422 MO11H 1423 MO 12L 1424 MO 12H 1425 MO13L 1426 MO 13H 1427 MO14L 1428 MO 14H 1429 MO15L 1430 MO 15H 1431 MO16L 1432 MO 16H 1433 MO17L 1434 MO17H 1435 MO 18L 1436 MO 18H 1437 MO19L 1488 MO 19H 1439 MO 20L 1440 MO 20H 1441 MO21L 1442 MO21H 1443 MO 22L 1444 MO 22H 1445 MO 23L 1446 MO 23H 1447 MO24L 1448 MO 24H 1449 MO25L 1450 MO 25H 1451 MO26L 1452 MO 26H 1453 MO 27L 1454 MO 27H 1455 MO 28L 1456 MO 28H 1457 MO29L 1458 MO 29H 1459 MO30L 1460 MO30H 1461 MO31L 1462 MO31H 1463 MO32L 1464 MO32H 1465 MO33L 1466 MO33H 1467 MO34L 1468 MO34H 1469 MO35L 1470 MO35H 1471 MO36L 1472 MO36H 1473 MO37L 1474 MO37H 1475 MO38L 1476 MO38H 1477 MO39L 1478 MO39H 1479 MO40L 1480 MO40H 1481 MO41L 1482 MO41H 1483 MO42L 1484 MO42H 1485 MO43L 1486 MO43H 1487 MO44L 1488 MO44H 1489 MO45L 1490 MO45H 1491 MO46L 1492 MO46H 1493 MO47L 1494 MO47H 1495 MO48L 1496 MO48H 1497 MO49L 1498 MO49H 1499 MO50L 1500 MO50H e The code in the square is used only with UP750 e The number attached to the end of code means loop number The number attached to the top of code means PID group numb
90. always possible Once switched the UPR target setpoint ramp up or DNR target setpoint ramp down function can be used to change the current setpoint See Ref 4 1 4 When the target setpoint is switched the controller performs control computation using the set of PID constants that correspond to the currently selected target setpoint 1 SP 2 SP 3 SP to 8SP SPA 3 SP No 3PID Decreases i according i to DNR i 2 SP No 2PID Increases j according bN to UPR i No 1PID oa 1 No1PID Increases i i i according f f to UPR xk i i gt Time Switched Switched Switched from 1 SP from 3 SP from 1 SP to 3 SP to 1 SP to 2 SP Fig 4 1 4 IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 4 1 References Related to Target Setpoints gt Ref 4 15 2 3 When Zone PID selects by target setpoint Method Is Selected For UT551 only The Zone PID selects by target setpoint method automatically switches between PID setpoints according to the target setpoint To use this function segment the area defined by the minimum and maximum values of a measurement range by reference points 1 to 6 into a maximum of seven zones For the reference point see 2 1 When Zone PID selects by PV Method Is Selected The example where the area is segmented into five zones is shown below When the target setpoint is changed fro
91. an hour or minute using parameter TMU Example of Setting the SP Ramp up Rate UPR Fig 4 1 7 shows an example of how to et the SP ramp up rate UPR SPs are set as 1 SP 500 C and 2 SP 640 C The controller first operates using 1 SP and later switches to 2 SP as the SP value increases at the specified rate In this example the temperature difference between 2 SP and 1 SP is 140 C which needs to be changed within two minutes To achieve this operation UPR is set at 70 C minute SP switching 1 SP 2 SP 2 SP 640 C g eee N 70 C min UPR 140 2 70 C min Temperature difference of 140 C 1 SP 500 C Heat up for f 2 minutes Fig 4 1 7 IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 4 1 References Related to Target Setpoints gt Ref 4 19 Temperature difference C 140 es Soe Time min Note go fay eo mL Note The time unit of the ramp rate can be set to either an hour or minute using parameter TMU time unit for ramp rate setting The following parameters are used Change parameters as explained in the User s Manuals Initial Settings and Parameter Map Ramp rate Setting Parameters e Operating parameters Operation related Parameters UPR DNR UT750 UT5 UT400 bees F UT3 Description Setting range Default D register No Code Code UPR Hee Setpoint ramp up OFF or OFF 245 for loop 1
92. and Events gt Ref 3 80 E The functionality of instrument alarms is as follows You can set a maximum of four instrument alarms for the primary and secondary loops The types of instrument alarm include a measured value PV alarm deviation alarm sensor ground alarm fault diagnosis output and FAIL output For more information on these types see Table 3 4 2 below Table 3 4 2 Al T Al T Alarm Action PU Alarm Action PARN Alarm Type Open and Closed refer to the Alarm Type Open and Closed refer to the Dy Contact Contact Oy Contact Contact state of a relay contact and On osed in opened in state of a relay contact and On ciosed in opened in and Off the state of a lamp case of alarm case of alarm and Off the state of a lamp case of alarm case of alarm Noalarm oT F O ia Hysteresis 7 De energization lt gt 6 ysteresis in case of i ar Closed 16 pea deviation Open On I Off PV upper limit Off Open t Closed On lower limit Deviation setpoint 47 46 J alarm PV value 56 PV value Alarm setpoint 51 Target setpoint Hysteresis Hysteresis mete PV lower limit Closed On m Open Off _ Alarm sAocint PV value Closed On gt Open Closed On nysteresis Deviation i Off i 17 Deviation Open Off y Closed On upper lower x upper limit A r ap a ap a aon KR BR AR F ow oo D fe wm
93. as a rough guide Note Note To check that the selected PV sampling period is appropriate use the setup parameter SMEC described later Set the PV sampling period as 200ms when the SUPER 2 function is used Set the PV sampling period as 500ms when the SUPER 2 function is used in Cascade control dual loop control or Temperature and Humidity control mode IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 1 1 References Related to PV Input gt Ref 1 12 2 UP550 Program controller PV sampling period Limitations of controller functions 100 ms the fastest Possible when cascade control UP mode 4 is not used and also none of the following functions are used lt This is given as a rough guide Note e SUPER function Heating cooling control PV input computation e Deviation alarm Sensor grounding alarm e Self diagnostic alarm FAIL output e SP rate of change limiter Output rate of change limiter 200 ms factory set default When any of the functions prohibited listed above with a 100 ms sampling period are used When Cascade control mode is used 500 ms Note Note To check that the selected PV sampling period is appropriate use the setup parameter SMEC described later e Set the PV sampling period as 200ms when the SUPER 2 function is used Set the PV sampling period as 500ms when the SUPER 2 function is used in Cascade control dual loop control o
94. code 2 PV lower limit For example set any of AL1 to AL4 to e 26 or 66 in order to use fault diagnosis output 27 or 67 in order to use FAIL output or 25 or 65 in order to use the sensor ground alarm The following parameters are used to set the instrument alarms value To change the settings of these parameters see the Initial Settings user s manual or the Parameters user s manual for your controller model Operating parameters Instrument Alarm Setting Parameters A1 to A4 UP750 ae Description Setting Range Default oo Code Al Instrument alarm 1 setpoint Note1 231 100 0 to 100 0 of PV input range A2 Instrument alarm 2 setpoint for PV setpoint alarms Note2 232 100 0 to 100 0 of PV input range span A3 Instrument alarm 3 setpoint for deviation alarms Note1 233 A4 Instrument alarm 4 setpoint 5 0 to 105 0 for output value alarms Note2 234 Note1 Both of instrument alarm types 1 and 3 are factory set to PV upper limit alarm Thus both of instrument alarm 1 A1 and alarm 3 A3 setpoints are set to 100 0 of the PV range Note2 Both of instrument alarm types 2 and 4 are factory set to PV lower limit alarm Thus both of instrument alarm 2 A2 and alarm 4 A4 setpoints are set to 0 0 of the PV range IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 3 4 References Related to Instrument Alarms and Events gt Ref 3 83 l
95. configuration the loop 2 auto manual mode switching function is assigned to DI6 when the controller is shipped from the factory Note4 In a dual loop control configuration the STOP RUN status switching function common to both loops is assigned to DI7 when the controller is shipped from the factory IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 3 1 References Related to Contact Input gt Ref 3 15 Table 3 1 8 DIN DI2 DI3 D14 1 SP ON OFF OFF OFF 2 SP OFF ON OFF OFF 3 SP ON ON OFF OFF 4 SP OFF OFF ON OFF 5 SP ON OFF ON OFF 6 SP OFF ON ON OFF 7 SP ON ON ON OFF 8 SP OFF OFF OFF ON The UT750 is designed so that functions assigned to its contact input terminals can be changed In addition functions can be assigned to the terminals of an optional I O expansion module Select the desired contact input terminal with which a function predefined for each setup parameter contact input registration parameter is executed To do this register the I Relay number corresponding to the terminal s DI number with the setup parameter whose you want to see Use the following parameter map to reassign terminal functions as necessary A CAUTION If you change any of the contact input terminal assignments check that the new assignment agrees with the current wiring If necessary rewire the terminals Setup Parameters Map Example of UT750
96. contact inputs Note4 The UT420 is not capable of switching among eight setpoints Switches between remote and local modes Note1 Assigns auto manual mode switching function to DI1 Note2 Assigns 2 SP 1 SP switching function to D12 Note5 e Assigns STOP RUN status switching function to DI2 Note3 e Switches between remote and local modes Note1 Assigns STOP RUN status switching function to DI1 Note3 e Assigns 2 SP 1 SP switching function to DI2 Note5 Assigns auto manual mode switching function to DI3 Note2 e Switches between remote and local modes Note1 Four choices of setpoint numbers for controller operation can be defined by programming the ON OFF states of DI1 and Dl2 contact inputs Note6 e Assigns STOP RUN status switching function to DI3 Note3 The UT450 is designed so that the auto manual mode switching function can be assigned to D14 Note2 The UT420 has no DI4 contact input so this function is not available Note1 The remote local mode switching function is always available irrespective of the DIS parameter setting Terminals 28 and 30 are always used for this purpose The remote mode is selected when the contact is ON whereas the local mode is selected when the Note2 Note3 contact is OFF With operation mode switching the auto mode is selected when the contact is ON and the manual mode is selected when the contact is OFF With STOP RUN status switc
97. contact output functions are not assigned at the factory before shipment IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt lt Ref 3 2 References Related to Contact Output gt gt lt Ref 3 2 References Related to Contact Output gt Ref 3 2 3 Using the I O Expansion Module with UT750 and UP750 Ref 3 57 Nine contact output terminals including a common terminal are provided on both UT750 and UP550 Their terminal numbers are 4 5 6 7 common 31 32 33 34 and 35 common If the number of the contact output terminals is not enough use contact I O expansion modules Note1 enabling you to use up to 23 point contact outputs Up to two I O expansion modules can be connected One of these incorporates eight contact inputs and outputs If you use two modules 16 point plus 7 point contact outputs excluding common terminals 7 and 35 are available Note1 Requires Yokogawa s optional add on module for the FA20 compact program controller u bus communications 15meters maximum CL ECO Eight poi chon SSSR eRe Ses Sees S EEE EE ss PoweRO O RUNO O T INPUT paag ji lt ogg ooog FA sourrut O 9000 T YOKOGAWA a a o Eight point A outputs uFA20 Expansion Module1 Fig 3 2 1 I O Expans
98. control Note UT550 UT551 and Alarm 3 output 5691 l relay number DOS Transistor Alarm 3 output UT520 Alarm 4 output 5693 l relay number DOG Transistor Aarma output Tracking 1611 D register number DO7 Transistor Tracking selection signal selection signal on in automatic manual mode or halt status Cooling output 1607 D register number 7 via DO3 Note When heating cooing control using relay or transistor output UT750 only in control output is selected cooling side output is assigned Cooling output 1609 D register number to DO3 or DO4 above via DO4 HM UT550 UT520 UT551 UT550 UT551 and FAIL output 1609 D register number UT520 only DO Output Type Function DO1 Relay Alarm 1 output DO2 Relay Alarm 2 output DO3 Relay Tracking selection signal on in automatic manual mode or halt status DO4 Note1 Transistor Alarm 4 output Note2 DO5 Note1 Transistor Alarm 3 output Note2 DO6 Note1 Transistor Not assigned DO7 Note1 Transistor FAIL output Note1 Used for the UT550 01 UT550 03 UT551 OC and UT551 D only Note2 If the control output selects a transistor output alarm 4 output is assigned to the relay terminal for output 1 and alarm 3 output is also assigned to the relay terminal for output 2 UT550 2 only IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 Ref 3 46
99. dual loop control with the UP750 Up to five n WZ1 n 1 to 5 wait zone parameters can be set Up to five n WTM n 1 to 5 wait time parameters can also be set IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 5 2 References Related to Program Setup gt Ref 5 25 The 5 n WZ1 and n WTM settings are grouped into a set in advance and an individual number is assigned to each set That number is as follows e Set the number between 11 and 15 if using the set to have the program wait at segment end Do not use an identical number for another setting Set the number between 21 and 25 if using the set to have the program wait in the middle of the segment Do not use an identical number for another setting Once assigned a number the sets can be set for individual segments in the program pattern using the JC junction code The table below shows which JC parameter settings correspond to which set of the n WZ1 wait zone parameter n 1 5 and n WTM wait time parameter n 1 5 As can be seen all sets have the same configuration JC 11 12 13 14 15 Sets for program wait at segment 1 WZ1 2 WZ1 3 WZ1 4 WZ1 5 WZ1 end 1 WTM 2 WTM 3 WTM 4 WTM 5 WTM JC 21 22 23 24 25 Sets for program wait in the 1 WZ1 2 WZ1 3 WZ1 4 WZ1 5 WZ1 middle of the segment 1 WTM 2 WTM 3 WTM 4 WTM 5 WTM The following parameters are
100. following expression Deviation ratio ee x 100 Setpoint of AR Proportional band n P e The setting range for the deviation ratio set in parameter AR is 50 0 to 200 0 However when the parameter is set at AUTO another setting option the controller automatically determines the point at which to restart the integral computation The following parameters are used Change parameters as explained in the User s Manuals Initial Settings and Parameter Map e Setup parameters Control Action related Parameters AR etc UP750 UT5 UP35 ee Bee ai Description Setting range Default D register No Code Code Code AR1 Ar Ar Anti reset AUTO AUTO 928 AR2 AR AR wind up or Note1 50 0 to 200 0 968 loop 2 Note1 Note1 AR2 are displayed only when the loop 2 is used by UT UP mode IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 2 1 References Related to Control Output gt Ref 2 10 lt lt Ref 2 1 References Related to Control Output gt gt Ref 2 1 5 Using Super Overshoot Prevention Function The Super overshoot prevention function is available with the UP750 UP550 UP350 UT750 UT5 UT400 and UT3 This function works when you set the Super code SC to 1 It does not work if you set the code to OFF If the code is set to OFF the controller operates in the regular PID control mode The code is s
101. for the UP550 2 only IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 3 2 References Related to Contact Output gt Ref 3 52 E D register and I register numbers assigned to contact outputs and extended contact outputs set at 2 the factory The registered numbers of the alarm and other functions assigned to contact output registration parameters DO1 to DO7 are shown below Model Registered contact output parameters Function Registered number Common to UP750 and UP550 UP750 only DO1 PV event 1 output 5705 l relay number DO2 PV event 2 output 5706 l relay number DO3 Instrument alarm 1 output 5689 l relay number DO4 Time event 1 output 5129 I relay number DO5 Time event 2 output 5130 I relay number DO6 Time event 3 output 5131 l relay number DO7 Time event 4 output 5132 l relay number DO3 Cooling side output in 1607 D register number heating cooling control DO4 Cooling side output in 1609 D register number heating cooling control Cascade primary loop control UP mode 2 Contact output Output Type Function DO1 Relay PV event 1 output DO2 Relay PV event 2 output DO3 Relay Instrument alarm 1 output DO4 Transistor Time event 1 output DO5 Transistor Time event 2 output DO6 Transistor Time event 3 output DO7 Transistor FAIL output TIP Time event 5 output is assigned to the
102. for the UP750 and UP550 are described here For the UP350 refer to Ref 5 28 later in this manual Use either one to meet your selected model 1 For the UP750 and UP550 With the UP750 and UP550 the wait function can be used in the following two ways Selection in both cases is made with the JC program parameter e Program waits at segment end Set JC to 11 15 e Program waits in the middle of the segment Set JC to 21 25 A CAUTION As indicated in the following parameter tables n WZ1 and n WTM are factory set to OFF Therefore unless these parameters are changed the wait function will remain OFF even if JC is set to 11 15 or 21 25 However it is necessary to determine the following two wait conditions before selecting JC 1 Wait zone Note1 ON OFF and if turning wait zone ON the deviation range measurement range direc tion of that wait zone 2 Wait time Note2 ON OFF and if turning wait time ON the duration of that wait time Note1 Wait zone is the deviation range that determines at what extent the PV must track the target setpoint See Fig 5 2 14 on page Ref 5 Note2 Wait time is amount of time that the PV waits before entering the wait zone See Fig 5 2 14 on page Ref 5 26 These conditions are set using the n WZ1 wait zone parameter Note below and the n WTM wait time param eter Note The n WZ2 can also be used when using
103. from changing any of the LP1 parameter settings LP2 operating The LP2 operating parameter main menu see Fig 7 1 1 is not shown parameter lock This prohibits you from changing any of the LP2 parameter settings Note1 n PID operating The n PID n 1 to 8 operating parameter submenu see Fig 7 1 1 is not shown parameter lock This prohibits you from changing of any of the PID parameter settings by key operation USR operating The USR operating parameter main menu see Fig 7 1 1 is not shown parameter lock This prohibits you from changing any of the USR parameter settings PYS1 operating The PYS1 operating parameter main menu see Fig 7 1 1 is not shown parameter lock This prohibits you from changing any of the PYS1 parameter settings Note2 PYS2 operating The PYS2 operating parameter submenu see Fig 7 1 1 is not shown parameter lock This prohibits you from changing of any of the PYS2 parameter settings Note3 Note1 When using a UT mode requiring no secondary loop such as single loop control the controller shows a parameter with which you can decide whether to show or hide the LP2 or PYS2 parameter You need not set the parameter in this case however Note2 With UT500 the parameter PY1 is used Note3 With UT500 the parameter RY2 is used IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 7 1 References Related to Security
104. functions assigned to their contact input terminals can be changed using the DIS setup parameter If necessary reassign functions by referring to the table in the Fig 3 1 8 IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 3 1 References Related to Contact Input gt Ref 3 25 The following parameters are used Change parameters as explained in the User s Manuals Initial Settings and Parameter Map e Setup parameters I O related Paramerters DIS UP35 Description Setting range Default D register No Display dS DI function OFF Turns contact input off OFF 0 932 DIS selection 1 DI1 Starts on stops off program 1 operation e DI2 Starts on stops off program 2 operation 2 DI1 Hides on shows off the LOCK setup parameter e Dl2 Unused 3 DI1 Starts on stops off program 1 operation e DI2 Enables on disables off the hold mode of program 1 operation Note1 The program 1 or 2 starts program operation when the contact is ON and stop reset program operation when the contact is OFF Note2 The Keylock LOCK setup parameter setting display is hidden when the DI1 contact is ON and is shown when the contact is OFF This function of hiding the keylock parameter using external input is an extra safeguard against erroneous operations Note3 The Hold mode is selected when the contact is ON and the Hold status is removed when the contact is OFF
105. heating cooling control Note3 heating cooling control 0 0 to 105 0 n OL lt n OH n OL n ol Output low limit Heating side SD shut down Note5 0 0 Refer to the n OL output low limit or 5 0 to 105 0 100 0 Table 4 1 1 in heating cooling control Note3 Cooling side limiter in in heating cooling heating cooling control control 0 0 to 105 0 n OL lt n OH n MR none Manual reset Heating side 5 0 to 105 0 50 0 Refer to the n MR manual reset enabled when integral time Table 4 1 1 in heating cooling control Note3 n l is OFF n H n H ON OFF control hysteresis 0 0 to 100 0 of 0 5 of PV Refer to the n H PV input range span input range span Table 4 1 1 e Heating side ON OFF control hysteresis in heating cooling e Position proportional PID 0 5 control control or heating cooling control 0 0 to 100 0 n DR n dr Direct reverse e With UT750 REVERS Refer to the n DR action switching Note6 REVERS reverse action reverse action Table 4 1 1 DIRECT direct action e With UT5O00 RVS RVS reverse action reverse action DIR direct action lt Continue gt IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 4 1 References Related to Target Setpoints gt Ref 4 5 UT750 UT5 Des
106. is displayed only or loop 1 However the function of this parameter is used at loop 1 and loop 2 in common With UT400 00 loop 1 only IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 1 2 References Related to Remote Input gt Ref 1 29 E Ratio bias computing Ratio bias computing performs ratio computation and bias addition for remote setpoints This enables load distri bution by zone air heat ratio control 2 flow ratio control etc This function acts on setpoints of substations used in coordinated operation Computation SP Remote setpoint input x Ratio Remote input bias The following parameters are used Change parameters as explained in the User s Manuals Initial Settings and Parameter Map e Operating parameters Operation related Parameters RT RBS UT750 UT5 vite Description Setting range Default oo Code Code RT rk Ratio setting 0 001 to 9 999 1 000 loop 1 247 RT loop 2 277 RBS r h 5 Remote input bias 100 0 t0100 0 of PV 0 0 of PV loop 1 248 RBS input range span input range span loop 2 278 IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 1 2 References Related to Remote Input gt Ref 1 30 lt lt Ref 1 2 Reference Related to Remote Input gt gt Ref 1 2 4 Tracking target setpoint when switching from remote to local control Setpoint can be tracked with UT750 UT5 an
107. map for the UP750 is given below Refer to this to display the desired parameter display L UP 750 Program Parameter Map From the operating parameter map main menu PROG see Note below E E E A E AEE aege SET T FPTN 1 to 300 UP750 1 to 30 UP550 i r 1 to 99 UP750 UP550 irie DISP ENT __ PTNa00 y__ cel g a UP750 roi Trsno HS PTN30 iJ RNO AR F ENO PD y H 4 H i Peso E2iA SSPi TSPi TSPI TSP i COPY E21B SSP2 TSP2 TSP2 TSP2 i i Ler E22A STC TIME TIME TIME o Eo E228 ves IMRT IMRT TM RT f Messes EBSA KO PID PID PID Ezali i So eet a re e Hoyi E24A EVn EVn Evn iwz I E248 t ONn ONn ONn 1 E25A Paes OFFn OFFn OFFn a LC ne ease i i HNM if Yn TYn Wa bameas E26A 2 PEA PEn Pen ji pint cass 2w2el P p t___ ro E27A 2WIM JC JC JC ea Bwzi E23A 3 W22 Y Y Y fap BWM ot wz 4 WZ2 WTM 4 5WZ1 RCY 5 WZ2 RST Ewin REN Note Display the program parameter subm
108. not the output at PV 100 C but the output at the actual 110 C Product MV output Yy AWW ssn Q Fig 3 3 5 Sensor loss detection works as follows Sensor loss is detected and an alarm is output when the moving average of the control output ON OFF rate drifts outside the set high limit operating parameter ORH and low limit operating parameter ORL This is done even if control is stable and PV stays within a constant range of the target setpoint The sensor ground alarm trigger is shown in Fig 3 3 2 The moving average is computed as follows Computation starts after PV is within the ON OFF rate detection band Note This moving average is the ON OFF rate OR With the UT350 and UT320 the ON OFF rate OR value can be displayed for your checking When needed check it on the OR parameter display Display capabilities are not provided on other models The displayed ON OFF rate is the moving average taken from 5 control output cycles When this moving average value drifts outside of the set ORL ORH range the sensor ground alarm is output Note This moving average is the ON OFF rate OR OUTn OUTn 1 OUTn 2 OUTn 3 OUTn 4 Moving average 5 ON OFF rate OR OUTn is the current output IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 3 3 References Related to Alarms gt Ref 3 71 The time width between each OUTn and OUTn 1 OUTn 1 and OUTn 2 OUTn
109. number DO1 PV event 1 output 5705 l relay number DO2 PV event 2 output 5706 l relay number DO3 Instrument alarm 1 output 5689 l relay number Common to UP750 and UP550 DO4 Time event 1 output 5129 l relay number DO5 Time event 2 output 5130 l relay number DO6 Time event 3 output 5131 l relay number DO7 Time event 4 output 5132 l relay number DO3 Cooling side output in 1607 D register number heating cooling control UP750 only i A DO4 Cooling side output in 1609 D register number heating cooling control 5 Loop control with PV auto selector UP mode 7 Contact output Output Type Function DO1 Relay PV event 1 output DO2 Relay PV event 2 output DO3 Relay Instrument alarm 1 output or cooling side output in heating cooling control Note1 DO4 Transistor Time event 1 output or cooling side output in heating cooling control Note1 DO5 Transistor Time event 2 output DO6 Transistor Time event 3 output DO7 Transistor Time event 4 output Note1 When heating cooing control using relay or transistor output in control output is selected cooling side output is assigned to DO3 or TIP DO4 for the UP750 If the output type other than a relay see the table above is selected for control output time event 5 output will be assigned to the relay terminal for output 1 for the UP550 and time event 6 output will be assigned to the relay terminal
110. of time events for each of program patterns 1 and 2 The UP35L s time segment turns on a given contact output when the preset time segment on time expires after the start of the first segment of a program pattern Likewise the time segment turns off the contact output when the preset time segment off time expires For program 1 you can set the on time and off time of a time event using the 1 EON and 1 EOF parameters shown in the following table Parameters used to set the UP35L s time events are summarized below To change the settings of these parameters see the Initial Settings user s manual or the Parameters user s manual for your controller model Program parameters Parameters for Setting Event Actions n EON and nEOF UP35 oe D Register No Description Setting Range Default Notet Code n Ean Time event OFF or 0 00 to 99 59 OFF unused 135 1 EON n EON Note on time hour minute or minute second Note2 165 2 EON i EnF Time event OFF or 0 00 to 99 59 OFF unused 136 1 EOF n EOF Note1 off time hour minute or minute second Note2 166 2 EOF Note1 n takes a value of either 1 or 2 Use this value to discriminate the parameter s application between program patterns 1 and 2 Note2 To set the time unit hour minute or minute second use the setup parameter TMU The time unit is e hour minute if TMU is 0 factory set defa
111. off no retransmission output is used 1 PV1 Measured value 1 TIP SP1 Target setpoint 1 TIP OUT1 Control output 1 TIP However the following conditions apply if the parameter is set to 3 In position proportional control a valve opening 0 to 100 is output In heating cooling control the output value before allocation to the heating and cooling sides is output 0 to 50 Cooling side output 0 to 50 Heating side output 4 Loop power supply Note 1 Note1 For more information on the loop power supply see 3 Using the Loop Power Supply Function TIP The retransmission range can be represented with the PV input range scaled with RTH Max value and RTL Min value IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 2 2 References Related to Retransmission Output gt Ref 2 23 lt lt Ref 2 2 References Related to Retransmission Output gt gt Ref 2 2 2 Retransmitting Program Pattern 2 for UP750 UP550 only A CAUTION The UP750 and UP550 can retransmit program pattern 2 as explained below though this is not possible with the following controller modes UP modes of these controllers e UP750 Cascade control dual loop control temperature and humidity control cascade control with univer sal input e UP550 Cascade control The UP750 and UP550 can retransmit program pattern 2 that is set for running on loop 2 For this reason they can also serve as program generators Both
112. output 1 scale R ET2 Retransmission Retransmission output 2 is available when the type of control output 2 type output is not current or voltage pulse The output is provided via terminals 16 and 17 OFF Disable 1 PV1 2 SP1 3 OUT1 4 LPS loop power supply 15 V 6 SP2 7 OUT2 7 are not available for single loop control 2 Confirm the D register numbers of these parameters The D register numbers of the parameters used in this example are RET1 1013 RTH1 1014 D register map RTL1 1015 a CMLP CONF No 1001to No 1051to No 1101to No 115i to 1001 A BS1 BS1 1051 1101 C S1 1151 1002 A FL1 FL1 1052 1102 CS2 1152 1003A SR1 SR1 1053 1103 C S3 1153 1004 A LC1 LC1 1054 1104 CS4 1154 1005 A BS2 1055 1105 C S5 1155 1006 A FL2 1056 1106 DO1 1156 1007 A SR2 1057 1107 DO2 1157 1008 A LC2 1058 1108 DO3 1158 1009 A BS3 BS3 1059 1109 DO4 1159 1010 A FL3 FL3 1060 1110 DO5 1160 1011A SR3 SR3 1061 1111 DO6 1161 1012 A LC3 LC3 1062 1112 DO7 1162 1013 RET1 R1T1 1063 1113 RDO151 1163 1 014 RTH1 TH1 1064 1114 RDO152 1164 1015 RTL1 TL1 1065 1115 RDO153 1165 1016 RET2 R12 1066 1116 RDO154 1166 1017 RTH2 TH2 1067 1117 RDO155 1167 a 1118 RDO156 1168 1 1119 RDO157 1169 200158 1170 IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 Ref 6 4 lt Toc gt lt Ref 6 1 R
113. parameter PT2 G in other the UP mode is on follow the TIP below Fig 5 2 19 shows where the target segment setpoint can be changed while in the hold status If the program control is in the hold status the time event and segment time are extended following the time over which the program remains held A i i i i i SEGI o SEG2 SEG3 SEG4 SEG5 Program pattern i i i Changed the after changing the setpoint target setpoint Program pattern i before changing 1 the setpoint i Time event Hold interval timer stops Time delayed by timer stops TSP Target setpoint Fig 5 2 19 Changing target setpoint in hold status TIP When running 2 patterns simultaneously with the UP750 as long as both the held segments in the primary loop pattern and the secondary loop pattern are soak segments both target setpoints can be changed If only one is a soak segment then only the target setpoint for that segment can be changed That of the another pattern cannot IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 5 2 References Related to Program Setup gt Ref 5 32 E To increase the segment ramp time A CAUTION Changes can be made to parameter settings for soak segments only constant setpoint that are on hold However when the UP750 is in the dual loop control mode or in the temperature and humidity control mode or when the setup parameter PT2 G in other t
114. phase heater Temperature input CT1 5 2 3 d CTL 6 P Current sensor 8 U LIS S js A Two phase heater Fig 3 3 7 2 When a three phase heater is used select both heater disconnection alarms i e 1 and 2 to set up the alarm function alarm code 24 and 25 Using a three phase heater lt Temperature input t CT1 CT2 5 ox 3 5 CTL 6 P E Current sensor o c alg R WAN A Three phase heater Fig 3 3 8 IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 3 3 References Related to Alarms gt Ref 3 76 Heater Burnout Current Setpoint 1 2 HB1 HB2 Heater Burnout Measured Current 1 2 HC1 HC2 The heater burnout alarm function measures the current of the heater and issues a heater burnout alarm if the current goes outside the burnout detecting points set by parameters HB1 and HB2 A CAUTION The heater disconnection alarm function operates in on off control relay output or time proportional PID control relay output or voltage pulse output but not in continuous PID control In heating cooling control the function operates for the heating side only not for the cooling side Heater disconnection detection is not performed durin
115. program pattern 1 is stopped with a key operation by external contacts or via communications SEG1 SEG2 SEG3 SEG4 SEGS SEG1 SEG2 SEG3 SEG4 SEGS Program 1 pattern Program 1 pattern gt Time Start repetition Fig 5 2 13 Program pattern with program 1 repetition specified The following parameters are used herein To change parameter values consult the Program Setup or Parameter Map in the appropriate User s Manual Program parameter 1 JC or 2 JC UP35 Description Setting range Default aca Code me Junction code 1 0 End of resetting 0 159 1 JC or 1 End of hold or Junction code 2 2 Pattern 1 startup 189 3r Notes below 3 Pattern 2 startup CUL 2 JC Note Junction code 1 is for program pattern 1 1 Junction code 2 PL is for program pattern 2 IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 5 2 References Related to Program Setup gt Ref 5 24 lt lt Ref 5 2 References Related to Program Setup gt gt Ref 5 2 4 Using the Wait Function The wait function temporarily pauses the program if PV cannot track the setpoint Pausing the program stops the change in target setpoint This gives PV a chance to track target setpoint See Fig 5 2 14 The program is automatically resumed the moment that PV attains the target setpoint The wait functions for the UP750 and UP550 differ from those for the UP350 First the wait functions
116. setpoint PV value Target setpoint D izati Hysteresis energization sali De energization in case of ase Closed Open O deviation om E o n meaa oy Open On i Closed Off E upper limit 1 Deviation setpoint alarm PVvalue iy alarm Target setpoint Hysteresis Alarm setpoint PV value IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 3 4 References Related to Instrument Alarms and Events gt Ref 3 94 Parameters used here are summarized below To change the settings of these parameters see the Initial Settings user s manual or the Parameters user s manual for your controller model e Program parameters n AL1 n A1 n AL2 and n A2 Note UP35 Description Setting Range oo Code n AL1 PV event 1 type OFF or 1 to 10 OFF unregistered 131 for pattern 1 Note 161 for pattern 2 n Al PV event 1 setpoint 100 0 to 100 0 of lt lt 100 0 for upper limit 132 for pattern 1 Note PV input range for 0 0 for lower limit 162 for pattern 2 PV setpoint alarms 100 0 to 100 0 of lt lt lt 0 0 of PV input PV input range span for deviation alarms n AL2 PV event 2 type OFF or 1 to 10 OFF unregistered 133 for pattern 1 Note 163 for pattern 2 n A2 PV event 2 setpoint 100 0 to 100 0 of lt lt 100 0 for upper limit 134 for pattern 1 Note PV input range for 0 0 for lower limit 164 for pattern 2 PV setpoint alarms The other
117. settings are the same as those of n A1 parameter Note nis either the value 1 or 2 Use this value to discriminate the parameter s application between pattern 1 and pattern 2 IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 3 4 References Related to Instrument Alarms and Events gt Ref 3 95 E Hysteresis of PV Events You can set hysteresis for a PV event 1 Setting Hysteresis for UP550 UP750 Since you can set a maximum of eight PV events EVn 1 to 8 for the UP550 UP750 you can set as many values of hysteresis for these PV events Use the setup parameters PEH1 to ZPEH8 shown in the table below to set hysteresis The functionality of PV event hysteresis is the same as that of instrument alarm hysteresis For more information on the PV event hysteresis see Ref 3 4 3 Setting Hysteresis On off Bandwidth for Instrument Alarms Parameters used here are summarized below To change the settings of these parameters see the Initial Settings user s manual or the Parameters user s manual for your controller model e Setup parameters Alarm related Parameters PEH1 to PEH8 UP750 UP550 fds Factory set or D Register Description Setting Range Initial Value Number Code PEH1 PV event 1 hysteresis 0 5 of PV input 907 range span PEH2 PV event 2 hysteresis 0 5 of PV input 908 range span PEH3 PV event 3 hysteresis 0 5 of PV input 90
118. state Out Blink On Out Timer setting Remaining time Timer setting Timer time can be displayed changeable unchangeable unchangeable changeable and or set in the Operating display A Control start Operating Display Time up Reset Fig 3 3 3 Upward Detection IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 3 3 References Related to Alarms gt Ref 3 68 2 The ON OFF operation in downward detection is shown below in Fig 3 3 4 Alarm HY SP ON Alarm output OFF Alarm lamp state Operating Display Control start PV a Set time period i a a a 1 On Out Timer setting Timer time can be displayed changeable and or set in the Operating display Out Blink Timer setting Remaining time changeable unchangeable unchangeable A Time up Reset Fig 3 3 4 Downward Detection The following parameters are used Change parameters as explained in the User s Manuals Initial Settings and Parameter Map e Setup parameters Alarm related Parameters AL1 UT750 UT5 male Description Setting range Default co Code Code AL1 AL f Alarm 1 type To use the alarm timer 1 PV high limit 915 loop 1 AL1 Alarm timer set 21 through 24 To use the alarm 955 loop 2 can be set 21 Upward detection timer the setting Note
119. status of alarm event and so on are kept as a flag 0 or 1 to the l relays They can be read using an external device when their respective I relay numbers are assigned to the controller s DO terminals With UP750 UP550 UT750 UT550 UT551 or UT520 the function of contact input terminals can be changed by using the I relays See Ref 3 1 References Related to Contact Input The data kept in I relays are classified as followings l relay numbers 1 through 192 Status 193 through 384 ON Status and 385 through 576 OFF Status contain the same information e The area of l relays 1 through 192 always contains ON OFF information and it normally read for status information e ON status I relays 193 through 384 are turned ON for one control cycle only when the status changed from OFF to ON e OFF status I relays 385 through 576 are turned ON for one control cycle only when the status changed from ON to OFF A CAUTION The controller internal data should be destroyed and do not read or write operation to the l relays in the unused area Any cells left blank for l relays 1 through 720 in the l relay map are the unused area The codes of l relays are same as those of D registers but for the l relays shown in Table 8 1 9 below Table 8 1 9 l relay No Code Description 0577 to 0580 CSPNO 0 to 3 SP number When UT750 or UT500 0593 to 0596 PIDNO1 1 to 3 Loop 1 PID number 0609 to 0
120. to tracking mode i gt Manual output gt Control output Fig 2 1 8 Output Tracking Function IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 2 1 References Related to Control Output gt Ref 2 19 lt lt Ref 2 1 References Related to Control Output gt gt Ref 2 1 10 Using Shutdown Function Using the shutdown function is possible with the UP750 UP550 UT750 UT550 UT551 and UT520 The shutdown function is designed to fully close a control valve forcibly zeroes the output by sending a signal level beyond the limit of the dead band of the positioner of the valve This function is enabled by setting the output limiter s lower limit n OL n 1 to 8 parameter to the option SD when the controller is set to a 4 to 20 mA current output signal and in manual mode e When in automatic mode operation The output limiter s lower limit is set at 5 0 and is not lowered to 0 0 mA e When in manual mode operation The control output delivers a shutdown signal approximately 0 0 mA when decreased to the setpoint SD with the key the SD symbol is displayed as the output value Control output 4 20 0mA gt Output reading 100 0 4 0mA 3 2MA 0 0mA Fig 2 1 9 Relationship between Output and Shutdown Levels in Continuous PID Control Mode IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00
121. used herein To change the parameter values consult the Program Setup or Parameter Map of the appropriate User s Manual e Program parameters JC n WZ1 n WZ2 and n WTM Five sets of wait zone parameters n WZ1 and wait time parameters a n WTM can be set Specify which set is used with a JC number JC 15 etc UP750 UP550 a B register No Description Setting range Default UP750 UP550 only Code JC Setting Junction Code 11 to 15 Program wait at segment end 0 140 21 to 25 Program wait in the middle of Note1 the segment n WZ1 Program pattern wait zone OFF or 0 0 to 100 0 of PV input OFF 1 WZ1 14 in the 1st loop range span 2 WZ1 17 n 1 to 5 3 WZ1 20 4 WZ1 23 5 WZ1 26 n WZ2 Program pattern wait zone OFF or 0 0 to 100 0 of PV input OFF 1 WZ2 15 in the 2nd loop range span 2 WZ2 18 n 1 to 5 Note2 3 WZ2 21 4 WZ2 24 5 WZ2 27 n WTM Wait time n 1 to 5 OFF or 00 01 to 99 59 OFF 1 WTM 16 Hour minute or Minute second 2 WTM 19 Note3 3 WTM 22 4 WTM 25 5 WTM 28 Note1 JC is set to 0 at the factory before shipment Select the desired value as required For the JC value other than the wait function consult Ref 5 2 3 page Ref 5 18 of this manual Note2 n WZ2 parameter is for dual loop control or the temperature and humidity control in the UP750 Note3 Use a TMU setup parameter to set the time unit The following provides a brief explanation regard
122. when DI2 OFF _ 1 SP when Di2 OFF 1 SP when DI2 OFF DI2 OFFIOFF ON ON ies No function Common Common Common Common cCom 20 DI3 STOP when DI3 ON AUTO when DI3 ON STOP when DI3 ON No 24 No function No function RUN when DI OFF MAN when DI3 OFF RUN when DI3 OFF DI3 29 0 o R L Remote when R L ON Remote when R L ON Remote when R L ON Remote when R L ON Remote when R L ON RIL 28 o No 28 Local when R L OFF Local when R L OFF Local when RL OFF Local when R L OFF Local when R L OFF NEAD Common Common Common Common Common COM 2 Fig 3 1 3 UT420 Contact Input Terminals IM 05J01B02 01E Contact rating 12 V DC 10 mA or more 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 3 1 References Related to Contact Input gt Ref 3 6 The UT450 s DI numbers DI No and the corresponded terminal numbers are listed in the Table 3 1 1 The factory set function of each terminal is listed in the table The Table 3 1 3 shows the UT420 s The factory set function of each terminal is listed in the table Table 3 1 1 When the UT450 Terminal No DI No The factory set function 19 DI1 Assigns the function of switching between auto and manual modes 18 DI2 Assigns the function of switching between STOP and RUN statuses 40 DB 39 DI4 Assigns the function of selecting the target setpoint number 8B DB 1 SP to 8 SP Note1 37 DI6 20 Common terminal 2B RI l _ woe terre ee ee ee
123. with only ramp up segments When Ramp prioritized PV1 start is the selected start condition the primary loop ramp is the start trigger The primary loop contains points B1 to E1 PV at those points will vary according to a e When the PV is at a program operation can not be started The secondary loop program will start at the same time as the primary loop does For example if B1 is the se lected start point for the primary loop program B2 will be that for the secondary loop program Loop 1 program pattern a Loop 2 program pattern E1 p2 e gt Ea E2 ft i gt Time SEGI SEG2 Fig 5 2 5 Example of all segments in primary loop are ramp Program start point is determined by the primary loop PV as follows Try to understand the relationship of a e to program start points A1 E1 in the above figure PV at program The primary loop s program The secondary loop s program operation start operation start points operation start points a Program operation can not be Program operation can not be started A1 started A2 b B1 B2 c C1 C2 d D1 D2 e E1 Start SP E2 Start SP IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 5 2 References Related to Program Setup gt Ref 5 16 E Time prioritized PV start STC 2 With Time prioritized PV starts operation start is triggered by segment time 1 which sets the time from the PV at program start to t
124. 0 Ref 2 2 1 Changing the type of retransmission output signal 00 Ref 2 21 Ref 2 2 2 Retransmitting Program Pattern 2 for UP750 UP550 only Ref 2 23 Ref 2 2 3 Using the Loop Power Supply Function cssccsseeeeseeseeeeseeeeeseees Ref 2 24 IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 Ref 3 1 References Related to Contact INput cccccsssseeeeeeeeeesseeeeeeees Ref 3 1 Ref 3 1 1 Changing contact input functions for the UT35h UT32h Ref 3 2 Ref 3 1 2 Changing contact input functions for the UT450 UT420 1000 Ref 3 5 Ref 3 1 3 Changing contact input functions for the UT550 UT551 UT520 Ref 3 9 Ref 3 1 4 Changing contact input functions for the UT750 cs ceesee Ref 3 14 4 1 Changing contact input terminal assignments of the UT750 Ref 3 14 4 2 Using contact I O expansion module with the UT750 ssassn Ref 3 18 4 3 Using Interrupt message functions with the UT750 cseeeee Ref 3 20 4 4 Using Interrupt operating display functions with the UT750 Ref 3 22 Ref 3 1 5 Changing contact input functions for the UP35h csee Ref 3 24 Ref 3 1 6 Changing contact input functions for the UP550 sseeeeee Ref 3 26 Ref 3 1 7 Changing contact input functions for the UP750 cesee Ref 3 29 7 1 Changing contact input functions for the UP750 n se Ref 3 29
125. 0 UT5 nies Description Setting range Default D register Code Code No 1 a8 na Ten segment 66 7 to 105 0 of 0 0 of PV input range 740 1 A8 linearizer 1 input 8 PV input range 2 a8 2A8 for 2ndloop Note1 765 1 b8 tha Ten segment 66 7 to 105 0 of 0 0 of PV input range 741 1 B8 inearizer 1 output 8 PV input range span Note 2 span Note 2 2 68 2B8 for 2ndloop Note1 0 66 1 a9 mma Ten segment 66 7 to 105 0 of 0 0 of PV input range 742 1 A9 inearizer 1 input 9 PV input range 2 a9 2A9 for 2ndloop Note b9 ih q Ten segment 66 7 to 105 0 of 0 0 of PV input range 743 1 B9 inearizer 1 output 9 PV input range span Note 2 span Note 2 2 69 2B9 for 2ndloop Note1 gg 1 a10 iad Ten segment 66 7 to 105 0 of 0 0 of PV input range 744 1 AA inearizer 1 input 10 PV input range 2 al0 2AA for 2ndloop Note1 GG 1 b10 fh Ten segment 66 7 to 105 0 of 0 0 of PV input range 745 we 1 BA linearizer 1 output 10 PV input range span Note 2 span Note 2 2 610 2BA for2ndloop Note GQ 1 a11 Ht Ten segment 66 7 to 105 0 of 0 0 of PV input range 746 1 AB linearizer 1 input 11 PV input range 2 a11 2 AB for 2nd loop Note 1 771 1 b11 hh Ten segment 66 7 to 105 0 of 0 0 of PV input range 747 BB linearizer 1 output 11 PV input range span Note 2 span Note 2 1 BB 2 b11 2 BB for 2nd loop Note 1 772 1 PMD la d Ten segment 0 Ten segment linearizer biasing 0 Ten segment 748 1 MD linearizer 1
126. 00 0 of the PV input range span for both positive and negative deviations The TSC1 setup parameter is used for this purpose use TSC2 for loop 2 3 As noted above you can also set the trend time of a Deviation Trend display The trend time can range from 1 to 600 seconds At this point note that the trend data is represented by a maximum of 120 plots running along the time axis Consequently the controller can show trend data worth a specified time length ranging from a minimum of two minutes 120 sec to a maximum of 20 hours 72000 sec Specify the time length using the TIM setup parameter A TIP If trend data exceeds 120 plots all earlier on screen plots disappear from the display Trend data is not saved in memory therefore there is no way of redisplaying the data once it disappears The following parameters are used Change parameters as explained in the User s Manuals Initial Settings and Parameter Map e Setup parameters Deviation Monitor Parameters TSC1 TSC2 TIM UP750 UP550 ae i D register UT750 Description Setting range Default No Code TSC1 Deviation trend scale 5 0 of PV 1021 for loop 1 0 1 to 100 0 of input range span TSC2 Deviation trend scale PV input range span 5 0 of PV 1022 for loop 2 input range span TIM Deviation trend scan time 1 to 600 sec 5sec 1023 Note1 TSC2 can be displayed only when the controllers are in the following UT or UP mode
127. 01 to 1023 With UP550 UP750 OFF or 101 to 1023 IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 6 1 References Related to Displays gt Ref 6 5 lt lt Ref 6 1 References Related to Displays gt gt Ref 6 1 2 Changing Contents of Deviation Trend Display for UP750 UP550 and UT750 only A Deviation Trend display appears on the UP750 UP550 and UT750 This section explains how to rescale the deviation trend axis deviation bandwidth and or change the sampling interval A CAUTION e The Deviation Trend display is factory set to the following setpoints Trend scale of Loop 1 Deviation Trend display 5 of the PV input range span Trend scale of Loop 2 Deviation Trend display 5 of the PV input range span Trend time of Deviation Trend display 5 sec Do not change these setpoints inadvertently Otherwise the trend graph may become difficult to read be cause of the limited view area or the trend data may be updated too quickly or slowly For this reason change the setpoints only if necessary according to the procedure given below The deviation trend display uses a chart to show the current deviation trend and can be shown in any controller operation mode UT UP mode It shows 1 A single loop deviation DV 2 A primary loop deviation 3 Asecondary loop deviation The following Fig 6 1 1 Indicates an example of the deviation trend display DV2 trend scan 20sec Fig 6 1 1 Example of Deviation T
128. 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 3 1 References Related to Contact Input gt Ref 3 17 Note6 Parameters SP 0 to SP 3 correspond to bits 0 to 3 with which a selection is made from eight choices of target setpoints see the table below When the controller is shipped from the factory contact input DI1 terminal number 19 is set to SP 0 Likewise DI2 is set to SP 1 DI3 to SP 2 and DI4 to SP 3 as shown below Note7 See 4 4 Using Interrupt operating display functions with the UT750 for more details about DP1 and DP2 parameters Note8 See 4 3 Using Interrupt message functions with the UT750 for more details about MG1 to MG4 parameters SP 0 bit 0 SP 1 bit 1 SP 2 bit 2 SP 3 bit 3 Target setpoints lt DI1 gt lt DI2 gt lt DI3 gt lt DI4 gt 1 SP ON OFF OFF OFF 2 SP OFF ON OFF OFF 3 SP ON ON OFF OFF 4 SP OFF OFF ON OFF 5 SP ON OFF ON OFF 6 SP OFF ON ON OFF 7 SP ON ON ON OFF 8 SP OFF OFF OFF ON IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 3 1 References Related to Contact Input gt Ref 3 18 4 2 Using contact I O expansion module with the UT750 The UT750 comes with eight contact input terminals including one common terminal terminals 18 19 20 common terminal 36 37 38 39 and 40 If these do not suffice your needs using I O expansion modules increase the number of available contact inputs to a ma
129. 04 1205 1206 SDP1 DP1 1207 1208 SL 1209 BSL1 BO1 1210 RJC1 RJC 1211 1212 UNI2 1262 1213 DP2 1283 1214 RH2 1264 1215 RL2 1265 V MOD V M D 1216 SDP2 1266 INIT INI 1217 SH2 1267 V AT 1218 sL2 1268 A1H 1219 BSL2 1269 A1L 1220 RJC2 1270 A2H 1221 IN3 1271 A2L 1222 UNIS UN3 1272 A3H 1123 RDO253_ 1173 PYB2 P2B 1223 DP3 1273 A3L 1124 RDO254 1174 1125 _RDO255 1175 1126 RDO256 1176 1127 RDO257 1177 1128 RDO258 1178 1129 A M 1 1179 1224 RH3 1274 DPC 125 RL3 1275 1226 SDP3 DP3 1227 SHB 1228 SL3 1229 BSL3 BO3 1130 A M 2 1180 1230 P UNI1 P U1 1131 R L1 1181 1132 R L 2 1182 1133 S R 1134 CAS 1135 AUTO AUT 1136 MAN 1137 SPbO 1138 SPb1 1139 SPb2 1140 SPb3 1232 P RH1 P H1 1233 P RL1 P L1 1234 P UNI2 P U2 1235 P DP2 PD2 1236 P RH2 P H2 1237 P RL2 P L2 1238 OTI 1239 OT2 1240 CTI 1241 1231 P DP1 PD1 PSL1 PSL BPSt PRI1 PRI STP1 STP unused area ae Note The code in the square like a A BS2 is used only with UT750 The code in the shaded square like a PCM 1 is used only with UT551 The code in parentheses is for UT550 UT520 and UT551 The number attached to the end of code means loop number O00 1 indicates that the code is for the loop 1 The number attached to the top of code means PID group number 1 Note 1 The code PRT is used only with UT551 with embed
130. 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 1 1 References Related to PV Input gt Ref 1 19 PV tracking enabled PV tracking disabled A SP ramp rate A UPR or DNR SP SP PV 1 PV MAN AUTO MAN AUTO A gt A gt Time Time mode change mode change Fig 1 1 7 PV tracking function The following parameters are used e Setup parameters Target Setpoint related Parameters PVT UP750 UT5 UP550 UT400 POT D register UT750 Description Setting range Default No Code Code PVT PHE PV tracking selection OFF or ON OFF 903 for loop 1 PVT 943 for loop 2 Note1 Note 1 This parameter is used for loop 2 when the UP UT mode is set for using loop 2 or secondary loop E Setting the Required Parameters To use the PV tracking function to turn ON OFF the PV tracking function carry out the operation shown below Since the operation differs between UT750 UT550 UT551 UT520 and UT450 UT420 instructions will be given separately in 1 and 2 Follow either of them according to your controller s model IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 1 1 References Related to PV Input gt Ref 1 20 1 UT750 UT550 UT551 UT520 To set the parameters carry out the following steps Here we explain how to display the parameter setting display and to change the parameter values Before carrying out these operations be sure to refer to the User s Manuals I
131. 1 UT750 UT5 UT400 a F D register UT3 Description Setting range Default No Code Code HY1 HY i Alarm 1 hysteresis 0 0 to 100 0 of 0 5 of 919 loop 1 HY1 PV input range span PV input range span 959 loop 2 HY2 H 43 Alarm 2 hysteresis 0 0 to 100 0 of 0 5 of 920 loop 1 HY2 PV input range span PV input range span 960 loop 2 HY3 HY j Alarm 3 hysteresis 0 0 to 100 0 of 0 5 of 921 loop 1 HY3 PV input range span PV input range span 961 loop 2 HY4 HHH Alarm 4 hysteresis 0 0 to 100 0 of 0 5 of 922 loop 1 HY4 Note1 PV input range span PV input range span 962 loop 2 Note1 UT3OC nd UT420 has no Alarm 4 hysteresis Note2 UT3Land UT4 has no Loop 2 secondary loop A parts of the UT750 parameter map is shown below Refer and use the map to find the path to the setting display for a particular parameter UT750 Setup Parameters Map Password OK Operating Parameter setting display e esis aN e a Referring to the Parameter map E ml display the setup parameter oo dee main menu LOOP1 Ee 2 p Then display the submenu ALM Bms att oR And pres
132. 1 The alarm does not work however in the following cases e The controller is in manual operation mode The controller is at a stop RESET mode e The controller is in on off control mode e The controller is performing auto tuning When the controller is used in heating cooling control mode relevant calculations are made with regard to inter nally computed values obtained before the control output is split into the heating and cooling side portions Note1 If either UP550 or UP750 controller is used in cascade control mode or a UP550 1Lcontroller is used in position proportional control mode the sensor ground alarm function is disabled Note that the UP35Lhas no sensor ground alarm function If the PV reading of the controller differs from the actual furnace temperature you can judge the degree of deterio ration in the sensor by observing a change in the output For example assume the controller indicates 100 C while the actual furnace temperature is 110 C At this point the output value is larger than the one when the PV input is 100 C This condition is what the sensor ground alarm function is designed to detect To be able to use this function you must have data on the range of steady state output values for example the output value when the PV input is 100 C Q Heating furnace 7 PV input s temperature value obtained through the sensor 100 C Actual temperature 110 C 100
133. 1 2nd for loop 2 UT750 UT550 and UT551 only n 1 n 2 n 3 n 4 n 5 n 6 n 7 n 8 ist 2nd ist 2nd 1st 2nd ist 2nd ist 2nd ist 2nd ist 2nd 1st 2nd n SP 301 501 326 526 351 551 376 576 401 601 426 626 451 651 476 676 n A1 302 502 327 527 477 677 n A2 303 503 328 528 478 678 n A3 304 504 329 529 479 679 n A4 305 505 330 530 480 680 n P 306 506 331 531 481 681 n l 307 507 332 532 482 682 n D 308 508 333 533 483 683 n OH 309 509 334 534 484 684 n OL 310 510 335 535 485 685 n MR 311 511 336 536 486 686 n H 312 512 337 537 487 687 n DR 313 513 338 538 488 688 n Pc 314 514 339 539 489 689 n lc 315 515 340 540 365 565 390 590 415 615 440 640 465 665 490 690 n De 316 516 341 541 366 566 391 591 416 616 441 641 466 666 491 691 n Hc 317 517 342 542 367 567 392 592 417 617 442 642 467 667 492 692 n DB 318 518 343 543 368 568 393 593 418 618 443 643 468 668 493 693 n PO 320 520 345 545 370 570 395 595 420 620 445 645 470 670 495 695 n Oc 321 521 346 546 371 571 396 596 421 621 446 646 471 671 496 696 IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 4 1 References Related to Target Setpoints gt Ref 4 6 2 When the Model Is UT450 or UT420 The UT450 and UT420 are designed so that you can u
134. 1 1641 MO21L 1691 MO46L 1442 MO 21H 1492 MO46H 1542 1592 1642 MO21H 1692 MO46H 1443 MO 22L 1493 MO47L 1543 RDO151 1593 1643 MO 22L 1693 MO47L 1444 MO 22H 1494 MO47HI1544IRDO152 1594 1644 MO 22H 1694 MO47H 1445 MO 23L 1495 MO48L 1545IRDO153 1595 1645 MO23L 1695 MO48L 1446 MO 23H 1496 MO48HI1546IRDO154 1596 1646 MO 23H 1696 MO48H 1447 MO 24L 1497 MO49L 1547 RDO155 1597 1647 MO 24L 1697 MO49L 1448 MO 24H 1498 MO49HI 1548IRDO156 1598 1648 MO 24H 1698 MO49H 1449 MO 25L 1499 MO50L 1549IRDO157 1599 1649 MO 25L 1699 MO50L 1450 MO 25H 1500 MO50H 1550 RDO 158 1600 1650 MO 25H 1700 MO50H Note The code in the square is used only with UT750 e The number attached to the end of code means loop number 1 indicates that the code is for the loop 1 The number attached to the top of code means PID group number 1 indicates that the code is for the PID group 1 IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 8 1 Outline of Registers and relays gt Ref 8 16 UT450 UT420 D register Map Table 8 1 5 1 3 UT450 UT420 D register Map 1 3 PROCESS PROGRAM MODE PAR OPERATION 1 No 101 No 151 No ae No 251 No 301 No 351 w IT No 451 ADERROR 51 DISTS PARAERR ALOSTS TIM1 TIM2 251 258 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 268 269 IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 8 1 Outline of Registe
135. 1 to 1 611 are the parameters for UP750 UP550 and UT750 e 1 A1 to 1 AB and 1 B1 to 1 BB are the parameters for UT550 UT551 and UT520 If the UP UT mode is set for using loop 2 or the secondary loop 2 a1 to 2 a11 and 2 61 to 2 611 and 2 A1 to 2 AB and 2 B1 to 2 BB can also be used A Output b Corrected value the sum of actual input and bias values S a Actual input Ten segment linearizer nbl bias gt n a2 n a4 Input a Fig 1 1 2 Ten segment Linearizer Biasing E Ten segment Linearizer Approximation This function is used when the input signal and the required measurement signal have a non linear relationship For example when trying to obtain the volume from a sphere tank level As shown in the figure below the output values b can be optionally set to 11 points of the optionally set input values a The input values used to configure the ten segment linearizer are set with parameters 1 a1 to 1 a11 Note The corrective values b axis of ten segment linearizer approximation for each of the input values a are set with parameters 1 61 to 1 611 Note Note e 1 a1 to 1 a11 and 1 b1 to 1 611 are the parameters for UP750 UP550 and UT750 e 1 A1 to 1 AB and 1 B1 to 1 BB are the parameters for UT550 UT551 and UT520 If the UP UT mode is set for using loop 2 or the secondary loop 2 a1 to 2 a11 and 2 61 to 2 611 and 2 A1 to 2 AB and 2 B1 to 2 BB can also be used A
136. 1126 OUTPUT7 R257 1127 OUTPUT8 R258 1128 IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 3 2 References Related to Contact Output gt Ref 3 61 The following parameters are used for extending the contact output functions To change the parameter values consult the Default Settings or Parameters section of the appropriate user s manual e Setup parameters Contact Output Registration Parameters R151 to R258 UP750 sags D register Description Setting Range Default Number Code R151 R151 output flag registration 0 with no functions 1113 L i Setting range D register or register number 5000 i For D register numbers for parameters R152 to R257 see Table 3 2 5 L R258 R258 output flag registration 0 with no functions 1128 IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 For UP controllers see Ref 3 4 References on Events lt Toc gt lt Ref 3 3 References Related to Alarms gt Ref 3 62 Ref 3 3 References Related to Alarms A IMPORTANT Applicable models of this section UP750 UP550 UP35 UT750 UT5 UT4000 UT3 None None None UT750 UT5 UT400 UT3 Note Some of the functions below are not available on certain models For more information see those sections This section contains reference information on the following aspects of alarms
137. 2 BOB Unassigned ssts S Transistor Bt BOT FAIL output ssts Ss Transistor a Common terminal for DO4 to DOF ssss lt sS Table 3 2 3 Contact Output Terminals of UT520 for Single loop Control and Their Factory set Functions Terminal No DO No Factory set Function Output Type 6 DO1 Alarm 1 output Relay 5 Do Alarm 2 output sts SsS Relay ee DO Alarm 3 output Relay i ae Common terminal for DO1 to DO3 0 The UT750 UT550 UT551 and UT520 are designed so that you can change the pre assigned functions of their contact output terminals For the UT750 UT550 and UT551 this can be done using the DO1 to DO7 setup parameters Each DO terminal number is associated with the code of each setup parameter For example the DO1 parameter is used to define the function of the DO1 terminal The contact output functions of the UT520 are defined using the DO1 to DO3 setup parameters The procedure of function assignment is as follows 1 Decide what signal to output from which of the contact output terminals see the table above 2 Identify the DO number that corresponds to the selected terminal number For example the corresponding DO number is DO1 if you output signals using terminal 6 3 Define the type of signal to be output from the terminal For example if you want to set alarm output 4 as a relay contact output using terminal 6 register the l Relay number of alarm o
138. 237 for loop 2 or scale Note1 The n in the table is 1 or 2 The number 1 or 2 indicates the number of loop Note2 The number 0 to 4 of setting range means that 0 no decimal point 1 one digit below decimal point 2 two digits below decimal point 3 three digits below decimal point 4 four digits below decimal point Note3 Under normal operation keep the value of these parameters between the maximum and minimum values of the PV range e When UP750 UP550 or UT750 P RL1 lt P RH1 where P H1 P RL1 30000 e When UT550 UT551 or UT520 P L1 lt P H1 where P H1 P RL1 30000 IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 1 2 References Related to Remote Input gt Ref 1 22 Ref 1 2 _ References Related to Remote Input A IMPORTANT Applicable models of this section UP750 UP550 UP35 UT750 UT5 UT400 UT3 None None None UT750 01 UT550 01 UT450 01 None UT550 02 UT450 02 UT550 04 UT450 04 UT551 O0B UT420 07 UT551 OD UT420 08 UT520 07 UT520 08 Note Some of the functions below are not available on certain models For more information see those sections This section contains reference information on the following aspects of remote input Refer to this information and change parameters only if necessary 1 Setting rem
139. 25 Analog output 1 0 segmental point A3L point A1L 4 0 0 25 50 Output value before split computation Fig 2 1 6 The following explains an example of letting Analog OUTPUT 1 terminals 16 and 17 and Analog OUTPUT 3 terminals 14 and 15 present the V mode characteristics of split computations 1 Set the Control Output Type OT1 parameter to 2 This sets the control output to current output 2 Set the Retransmission Output RT1 parameter to 3 This sets the retransmission output to control output retransmission 3 Set the Analog Output 1 100 Segmental Point A1H parameter to 100 4 Set the Analog Output 1 0 Segmental Point A1L parameter to 25 5 Set the Analog Output 3 100 Segmental Point A3H parameter to 0 6 Set the Analog Output 3 0 Segmental Point A3L parameter to 75 The figure above shows an example where both analog outputs 1 and 3 are set to the current signal of 4 to 20 mA DC The type of output signal can be determined separately for each of the analog outputs listed above using the following three parameters Analog output 1 Analog output 1 type AO1 Analog output 2 Analog output 2 type AO2 Analog output 3 Analog output 3 type AO3 IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 2 1 References Related to Control Output gt Ref 2 14 2 Example of the parallel mode out
140. 3 57 Ref 3 3 References Related to Alarms csscceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees Ref 3 62 Ref 3 3 1 Setting Alarm Trigger Conditions cc sccceseeceeseeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeees Ref 3 63 Ref 3 3 2 Setting Alarm hysteresis ON OFF range cssssccssscessseeenseeeenees Ref 3 65 Ref 3 3 3 Using the alarm timer Control stable signal event 0sc1 Ref 3 67 Ref 3 3 4 Using the Sensor ground alarm ccseeeceeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeneeneees Ref 3 70 Ref 3 3 5 Using the heater burnout alarm UT35u and UT32u only Ref 3 75 Ref 3 4 References Related to Instrument Alarms and Events Ref 3 77 Ref 3 4 1 Using Instrument Alarms cceeceeeeesee cess eneeeeeee eee en senses nnmnnn nnmnnn Ref 3 78 Ref 3 4 2 Setting the Operating Conditions of Instrument Alarms 00 Ref 3 83 Ref 3 4 3 Setting Hysteresis On off Bandwidth of an Instrument Alarm Ref 3 84 Ref 3 4 4 Using the Sensor Ground Alarim cccsseeeeeseeeeeeseeseeeneeeeesneeeeeeees Ref 3 86 Ref 3 4 5 Using PV Events s eececeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeenseneeeeeeseensnaeneaeeseeeenseneenenenees Ref 3 90 Ref 3 4 6 Using Time Events 2 ccse eeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeneeeeeeseeensenaneeseseeeeneeneees Ref 3 97 Ref 3 4 7 Using Local Events 0 secccceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeseeesnsenaeeeeeeeeneneeneeees Ref 3 101 Ref 4 1 References Related to Target
141. 3 RP lt 4 RP lt 5 RP lt 6 RP IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 5 1 References Related to Segment Operation gt Ref 5 9 Table 5 1 1 PID related parameter D register numbers list 1st for loop 1 2nd for loop 2 UP750 only n 1 n 2 n 3 n 4 n 5 n 6 n 7 n 8 1st 2nd ist 2nd 1st 2nd ist 2nd ist 2nd ist 2nd ist 2nd ist 2nd n P 306 506 331 531 356 556 381 581 406 606 431 631 456 656 481 681 n l 307 507 332 532 357 557 382 582 407 607 432 632 457 657 482 682 n D 308 508 333 533 358 558 383 583 408 608 433 633 458 658 483 683 n OH 309 509 334 534 359 559 384 584 409 609 434 634 459 659 484 684 n OL 310 510 335 535 360 560 385 585 410 610 435 635 460 660 485 685 n MR 311 511 336 536 361 561 386 586 411 611 436 636 461 661 486 686 n H 312 512 337 537 362 562 387 587 412 612 437 637 462 662 487 687 n DR 313 513 338 538 363 563 388 588 413 613 438 638 463 663 488 688 n Pe 314 514 339 539 364 564 389 589 414 614 439 639 464 664 489 689 n lc 315 515 340 540 365 565 390 590 415 615 440 640 465 665 490 690 n De 316 516 341 541 366 566 391 591 416 616 441 641 466 666 491 691 n Ho 317 517 342 542 367 567 392 592 417 617 442 642 467 667 492 692 n DB 318 518 343 543 368 568 393 593 418 618 443 643 468 668 4
142. 50 UP750 or UP550 SELECT displays are shown when the key is pressed more than 1 second on the operating displays You can switch between the SELECT displays as with the standard operating displays by pressing the key With the key you can switch from one SELECT display to another in the order of SELECT displays from 1 to 5 Note4 Pressing the key after showing a SELECT display returns to a Measured Value PV display Note1 If your model is UP750 UP5O00 UT750 or UT500 you cannot select any parameter on the Setup Parameter main menu UTMD Note2 If your model is UP350 UT400 or UT3UU use the four setup parameters C S1 to C S4 Note3 If your model is UP350 UT400 or UT3UU the setup parameter is RET Note4 If your model is UP350 UT400 or UT3UU the order is SELECT displays 1 to 4 A CAUTION No SELECT display is shown unless you configure the C S1 or any other associate setup parameters All of the relevant setup parameters are factory set to OFF therefore no SELECT display is shown Any of the C S1 and associate setup parameters should be specified using a number shown on the D Register Map If the parameter is not found on the map or if you specify a parameter whose display does not exist you cannot show any SELECT display If you change the setting of a parameter shown on a SELECT display the setting of the parameter s ori
143. 50 are described here For the UP350 refer to Ref 5 22 later in this manual Use either one to meet your selected model 1 For the UP750 and UP550 Segment end condition can be set for each segment End condition can be set so that the program advances automatically to the next segment The following parameters are used herein To change the parameter values consult the Program Setup or Parameter Map in the appropriate user manuals provided separately Program Parameter Junction Code Parameter JC UP750 peed Description Setting range AAE e a PSS only Code i JC Junction code set 0 Switching for 0 140 Continuation 1 Hold on switching 2 Local mode end 11 to 15 Wait during switching 21 to 25 Wait within a segment L interval INSERT Allows a segment to be added DELETE Allows a specified segment to be deleted Note1 Note2 Note1 For the wait features see Ref 5 2 4 later in this manual Note2 For the INSERT and DELETE functions see also Ref 5 3 later in this manual IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 5 2 References Related to Program Setup gt Ref 5 19 E Program continue JC 0 Factory set default If program continue JC 0 is selected as the segment end condition the program advances to the next segment and operation continues when the current segment ends If it is set for the last segment in the program the program s
144. 56 a4 AY Ten segment 66 7 to 105 0 of 0 0 of PV input range 732 1 A4 linearizer 1 input 4 PV input range a4 2 A4 for 2nd loop Note 1 BT b4 ILH Ten segment 66 7 to 105 0 of 0 0 of PV input range 733 1 B4 linearizer 1 output 4 PV input range span Note 2 span Note 2 b4 2 B4 for 2nd loop Note 1 758 a5 if D Ten segment 66 7 to 105 0 of 0 0 of PV input range 734 1 A5 linearizer 1 input 5 PV input range 2 a5 2 A5 for 2nd loop Note 1 e b5 lh D Ten segment 66 7 to 105 0 of 0 0 of PV input range 735 1 B5 linearizer 1 output 5 PV input range span Note 2 span Note 2 b5 2 B5 for 2nd loop Note 1 760 a6 AG Ten segment 66 7 to 105 0 of 0 0 of PV input range 736 1 A6 linearizer 1 input 6 PV input range 2 a6 2A6 for 2nd loop Note 1 T b6 ILG Ten segment 66 7 to 105 0 of 0 0 of PV input range 737 1 B6 linearizer 1 output 6 PV input range span Note 2 span Note 2 b6 2 B6 for 2nd loop Note 1 762 a7 inn Ten segment 66 7 to 105 0 of 0 0 of PV input range 738 1 A7 linearizer 1 input 7 PV input range a7 2ZA1 for 2ndloop Note 1 76 b7 44 Ten segment 66 7 to 105 0 of 0 0 of PV input range 739 1 B7 linearizer 1 output 7 PV input range span Note 2 span Note 2 2 b7 2 B7 for 2nd loop Note 1 764 IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 1 1 References Related to PV Input gt Ref 1 7 UP75
145. 6 DI7 Dis com 20 I 20 uTss0 00 uT551 0A O O x x x x x x Common UTS50 41 UT5510B OC O O0 O0 O0 0 0 0 Remote when DI8 lt ON Ne i UT550 02 UT551 0C0 O O x x x x x O Local when DI8 OFF DI8 28 ko So 28 UT550 03 UT551 OD O a O O O Oo O x COM 4 UT550 04 ofofx x x x x fo Common COM 2 T 30 U52000 9 9 as a ee es 2 Contact rating 12 V DC 10 mA or more UT520 07 Q Q O x x x x oO UT520 08 O O O x x x x oO Fig 3 1 4 UT5 Contact Input Terminals The UT550 UT551 s DI numbers DI No and the corresponded terminal numbers are listed in the Table 3 1 4 The factory set function of each terminal is listed in the table The Table 3 1 6 shows the UT520 s _ The factory set function of each terminal is listed in the table Table 3 1 4 When the UT550 UT551 Single loop control mode UT mode 1 Terminal No DI No lI relay no 5000 The factory set function 19 DI1 5161 Assigns the function of switching between auto and manual modes 18 DI2 5162 Assigns the function of switching between STOP and RUN statuses 40 DI3 5163 39 DI4 5164 Se Se Ss Se ere eels ee ee Assigns the function of selecting the target setpoint number 38 Bi 5165 1 SP to 8 SP Note1 37 DI6 5166 36 DI7 5167 no function 20 Common terminal for DI1 to DI7 28 DI8 5168 an ee Assigns the function of switching between remote and local modes 30 Comm
146. 612 PIDNO2 0 to 3 Loop 2 PID number 0657 to 0661 TIM 1S to TIM 1M Timer setting 1 sec through 1 min 0672 to 0674 PON to LP2 Power ON front panel lamp state for PV2 and LP2 0681 to 0687 DEV1 to DEV1 Loop 1 and Loop 2 deviation 0689 to 0693 ALO11 to ALO14 Instrument alarm output state When UP750 or UP550 IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 8 1 Outline of Registers and l relays gt Ref 8 27 When the UP750 UP550 Table 8 1 10 UP750 UP550 I relay classification communication function IM 05J01B02 01E l relay Classification Description 1 to 16 Input error same as D0001 17 to 32 PV1 error same as D0002 33 to 48 PV2 error same as D0018 49 to 64 Calibration parameter error same as D0035 65 to 80 Loop1 mode same as D0008 81 to 96 Status Loop2 mode same as D0024 97 to 112 Alarm status same as D0011 113 to 128 PV event 1 to 8 same as D0012 129 to 160 Time event 1 to 16 same as D0013 and D0014 161 to 176 External contact input status same as D0033 177 to 192 Expanded external contact input status same as D0034 193 to 208 Input error 209 to 224 PV1 error 225 to 240 PV2 error 241 to 256 Calibration parameter e
147. 68 When the I O expansion module is used the numbers 177 to 192 are also the applicable I Relay numbers For more information on I Relay numbers see Ref 8 1 4 The relationship between the factory set DI numbers and input terminal assignments may differ depending on the UT mode of your controller Always refer to the terminal wiring diagrams in the Installation user s manual to verify the factory set terminal assignments of each UT mode IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 3 1 References Related to Contact Input gt Ref 3 23 UT750 Setup Parameters i Register the contact input terminals DI 7 number which are used to show the operating displays you created with parameters DP1 and DP2 Specify the DI numbers as the I Relay numbers each of which is incremented by 5000 IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 3 1 References Related to Contact Input gt Ref 3 24 When the UP series controllers lt lt Ref 3 1 References Related to Contact Input gt gt Ref 3 1 5 Changing contact input functions for the UP350 UP350 comes with three contact input term
148. 69 1419 MO10L 1469 MO35L 1519 1569 1619 MO10L 1669 MO35L 1370 1420 MO 10H 1470 MO35H 1520 1570 1620 MO 10H 1670 MO35H 1371 1421 MO 11L 1471 MO36L 1521 1571 1621 MO11L 1671 MO36L 1372 1422 MO 11H 1472 MO36H 1522 1572 1622 MO11H 1672 MO36H 1373 1423 MO 12L 1473 MO37L 1523 1573 1623 MO 12L 1673 MO37L 1374 1424 MO 12H 1474 MO37H 1524 1574 1624 MO 12H 1674 MO37H 1375 1425 MO 13L 1475 MO38L 1525 1575 1625 MO 13L 1675 MO38L 1376 1426 MO 13H 1476 MO38H 1526 1576 1626 MO 13H 1676 MO38H 1377 1427 MO 14L 1477 MO39L 1527 1577 1627 MO 14L 1677 MO39L 1378 1428 MO 14H 1478 MO39H 1528 1578 1628 MO 14H 1678 MO39H 1379 1429 MO 15L 1479 MO40L 1529 1579 1629 MO 15L 1679 MO40L 1380 1430 MO 15H 1480 MO40H 1530 1580 1630 MO 15H 1680 MO40H 1331 PVIN 1 1381 1431 MO 16L 1481 MO41L 1531 OUT1A 1581 1631 MO16L 1681 MO41L 1332 PVIN 2 1382 1432 MO 16H 1482 MO41H11532 OUT2A 1582 1632 MO 16H 1682 MO41H 1433 MO 17L 1483 MO42L11533 OUT3A 1583 1633 MO 17L 1683 MO42L 1334 RSPIN 1434 MO 17H 1484 MO42H 1534 OUT1R 1584 1634 MO 17H 1684 MO42H 1335 GAIN 1 1435 MO 18L 1485 MO43L11535 OUT2R 1585 1635 MO 18L 1685 MO43L 1336 GAIN 2 1586 1636 MO 18H 1686 MO43H 1337 TRG 1 1437 MO 19L 1487 MO44L 1537 1587 1637 MO 19L 1687 MO44L 1338 TRG 2 1438 MO 19H 1488 MO44H 1538 1588 1638 MO 19H 1688 MO44H TRF 1 1439 MO 20L 1489 MO45L 1539 1589 1639 MO 20L 1689 MO45L TRF 2 1440 MO 20H 1490 MO45H 1540 1590 1640 MO 20H 1690 MO45H 1441 MO21L 1491 MO46L 1541 159
149. 7 Note2 Note1 control mode 1 Fixed point control mode Note1 For the UT750 the MOD setup parameter applies to both the loop 1 and loop 2 PID control modes More specifically the MOD setup parameter belonging to the LOOP2 setup parameter main menu is used for the loop 2 PID control mode of the UT750 In addition the setup parameter has the same name MOD as the one that belongs to the LOOP1 menu though their D register numbers differ as shown in the table above The MOD setup parameter for loop 2 is only shown when the UT mode is cascade control dual loop control temperature humidity control or cascade control with two universal inputs Note2 The MOD2 setup parameter for the loop 2 PID control mode of the UP750 or UP550 is only shown when the UP mode is cascade control dual loop control temperature humidity control or cascade control with two universal inputs E Setup Parameters for UT5 and UT4L0 e Setup parameters Control Action related Parameters MOD UT5 ee Description Setting Range Default D register No Code nod PID control mode 0 Standard PID control mode 0 927 MOD 1 Fixed point control mode Note For the UT5OO and UT400 there is no parameter for loop 2 IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt UT4 lt Ref 2 1 References Related to Control Output gt and Refer to the informati
150. 8 Action when the operation mode is change from Auto to Manual Operating parameters M MD and MPO UT551 Description Setting range Default D register No Code and Manual preset 0 Automatic operation 0 See Table2 1 10 M MD outout selection output at switching bumpless 1 Manual preset outout value MPO nPo Manual preset 5 0 to 105 0 0 0 See Table2 1 10 MPO outout value MPO However output is limited to the output high limit OH and low limit OL manual operation In heating cooling control internal computation result before splitted into heating side and cooling side signals Table 2 1 10 D register No list for the parameters of manual preset output value ist 2nd M MD 980 982 MPO 981 983 IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 2 1 References Related to Control Output gt Ref 2 18 2 When the model is UP35L UT35 or UT32 In the following situations the controller outputs the preset output value e An input burnout has occurred during the AUTO mode operation e An abnormality in an analog digital conversion circuit has occurred during the AUTO mode operation e With UP350 the status changed from the operating mode to the reset mode The following parameters are used Change parameters as explained in the User s Manuals Initial Settings and Parameter Map e Setup parameters Control
151. 9 range span PEH4 PV event 4 hysteresis 0 5 of PV input 910 0 0 to 100 0 of range span PEH5 PV event 5 hysteresis PV input range span 0 5 of PV input 911 range span PEH6 PV event 6 hysteresis 0 5 of PV input 912 range span PEH7 PV event 7 hysteresis 0 5 of PV input 913 range span PEH8 PV event 8 hysteresis 0 5 of PV input 914 range span IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 3 4 References Related to Instrument Alarms and Events gt 2 Setting Hysteresis for UP35 Ref 3 96 The UP35 has two setup parameters HY1 and HY2 With these parameters you can separately set hysteresis for PV event 1 and PV event 2 The PV event hysteresis is commonly used for both programs 1 and 2 however as shown below PV Event Hysteresis Corresponding PV Event 1 AL1 nn 2AL1 1 AL2 me 2 AL2 The functionality of PV event hysteresis is the same as that of instrument alarm hysteresis discussed earlier For more information on the PV event hysteresis see Ref 3 4 3 Setting Hysteresis On off Bandwidth for Instru ment Alarms Parameters used here are summarized below To change the settings of these parameters see the Initial Settings user s manual or the Parameters user s manual for your controller model e Setup parameters HY1 and HY2 UP35 ng Factory set or D Register Description Setting Range Initial Value Number Code HUI P
152. 93 693 gt n RP 319 519 344 544 369 569 394 594 419 619 444 644 n PO 320 520 345 545 370 570 395 595 420 620 445 645 470 670 495 695 n Oc 321 521 346 546 371 571 396 596 421 621 446 646 471 671 496 696 See this column for each D register number of n RP parameters For example the D register number of 1 RP is 319 Note UP35 _ has only 1 RP and 2 RP D register number of 1 RP is 319 and it of 2 RP is 344 E When segment PID control is selected Segment PID control automatically switches PID settings to those set for each segment of the program pattern in programmed operations It is best used when wanting to control the same PV zone to different PID constants during ramp up and ramp down The following example shows how PID settings change in segment PID control A If the program is currently at segment No 5 control is based on the PID constants set for PID No 1 PV SEGI SEG2 SEG3 SEG4 SEG5 SEG6 SEG7 ee i ae ee No 2PID No 1PID No 3PID Fig 5 1 6 Segment PID control example PID No is set with the PID program parameter when setting up the program pattern for each segment For example if PID is set to 2 for a segment its control will be based on PID No 2 that is set with another operating parameter The following
153. BO TME10 RJC1ERR TME11 PV1 0ver TME12 PV1 over TME13 TME14 TME15 TM E16 WEND PTEND PTEND3 AT1ERR PTEND5 PV2ADC Di PV2BO DI2 RJC2ERR DI3 DI4 PV2 oVver DI5 PV2 over DI6 AT2ERR CALB E UCALB E USERE RDI101 RDI102 RDI103 UPMD RANGE SETUP 567 _RDI107 631 695 568 PARA E 569 RDI201 633 PTNO 8 697 MODE E 570 634 FILE E 571 635 572 636 573 637 574 638 SYSTEM E 575 639 576 640 Note The code in the square like a AD2ERR is used only with UP750 The code in the shaded square like a VLVAT ERR is used only with UP550 IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 8 1 Outline of Registers and relays gt Ref 8 30 When the UT750 UT550 UT551 or UT520 Table 8 1 12 UT750 UT5 l relay classification the communication function IM 05J01B02 01E l relay Classification Description 1to 16 Input error same as D0001 17 to 32 PV1 error same as D0002 33 to 48 PV2 error same as D0018 49 to 64 Calibration parameter error Same as D0035 65 to 80 Loop1 mode same as D0008 81 to 96 sie Loop2 mode same as D0024 97 to 112 Alarm status same as D0011 113 to 160 Use not permitted 161 to 176 External contact input status same as D0033 177 to 192 Expanded external
154. Cascade control dual loop control temperature and humidity control or cascade control with 2 universal inputs Note2 TIM deviation trend scan time is used commonly between TSC1 and TSC2 IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 6 1 References Related to Displays gt Ref 6 7 lt lt Ref 6 1 References Related to Displays gt gt Ref 6 1 3 Changing Deviation Display Range of Deviation Monitor for UT750 UT550 UT551 and UT450 only The deviation monitor is only available with the UT750 UT550 UT551 and UT450 In other words the monitor is supported only by controller models whose panel size is 96 mm and therefore is not available with the UT350 This section explains how to change the deviation display range deviation bandwidth of the deviation monitor A CAUTION e The deviation display range of the deviation monitor is factory set to 1 of the PV input range span Only if necessary change the setpoint as instructed below in accordance with your object of control SP DVB 4 High limit lamp yellow lights when deviation goes over this level AEAEE EAT ean acter Meat Nise SP Normal lamp green lights as long as deviation remains within range es SP DVB lt Low limit lamp yellow lights when deviation goes under this level Fig 6 1 3 Deviation Range The following parameters are used Change parameters as exp
155. E7 47 P NAME8 48 P NAME9 49 P NAME10 50 o Note The code in the square like a 1 WZ2 is used only with UP750 UP750 UP550 B register Map 1 2 PTNWR SEGWR No 101 No 151 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 PTNO A 111 PTNO B 112 PTE TRG 113 PTC TRG 114 PTN ERR 115 66 116 67 117 68 118 69 119 70 120 71 121 72 122 73 123 74 124 75 125 76 126 77 127 78 128 79 129 80 130 81 PTN USE1 131 82 _PTN USE2 132 83 133 84 134 85 135 86 136 87 137 88 138 89 139 90 140 91 141 92 142 93 143 94 144 95 145 96 146 97 147 98 148 99 149 100 150 RDTRG WRTRG PTN ERR rem SEG rem EV PTN SEG TSP1 TSP2 TIME TA RT PIDNO EV1 ON1 or TY1 OFF1 or PE1 EV2 ON2 or TY2 OFF2 or PE2 EV3 ONS or TY3 OFF3 or PE3 EV4 ON4 or TY4 OFF4 or PE4 EV5 ON5 or TY5 OFF5 or PE5 EV6 ON6 or TY6 OFF6 or PEG EV7 ON7 or TY7 OFF7 or PE7 EV8 ON8 or TY8 OFF8 or PE8 JC e Other codes are common to UP750 and UP550 IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt Table 8 1 8 2 2 Note The number attached to the code just prior to the period means loop number 001 is the code for the loop 1 and TSP2 example TSP1 SP1 TSP1 1 TSP1 2 TSP1 3 TSP1 4 TSP1 5 TSP1 6 TSP1 7 TSP1 8 1410 TSP1 9 1411 TSP 1 10 1412 TSP 1 11 1413 TSP 1 12 1414 TSP1 13 1415 TSP 1 14 1416 TSP 1 15 1417 TSP 1 16 1418 TSP1 17 1419 TSP1
156. EDIT 5 copy sorce PTno TIP The message copy source Ptno is displayed in LCD display as shown below P NO This time the parameter code COPY is displayed lt on PV display LED The source program pattern number 5 The message copy destination Ptno Will be displayed Set the destination program pattern number using 4 YJ keys and press the key to register it MENU PROG EDIT 6 copy destination PTno The destination program pattern number P NO 2 EDIT program edit The submenu EDIT will be displayed automatically after copying the program pattern sub menu TIP Copying may need a long time when the source program has many segments or events When the remaining unused segments or events are few copying may need a long time too IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 5 3 Handy Features for Creating and Editing Programs gt Ref 5 55 lt lt Ref 5 3 Handy Features for Creating and Editing Programs gt gt Ref 5 3 5 Deleting Program Patterns A CAUTION It is impossible to delete the program pattern when the controller is in the program operating mode Stop reset the program operation when you want to delete the program pattern The deleting program patterns function can be used with UP750 and UP550 Unnecessary program patterns can be deleted If wanting to create a new pattern but there are not enough segments le
157. ERA is displayed P NO 0 on PV display LED 4 Press 4 XJ keys to specify a pattern No to be deleted and press key to register it The submenu EDIT will be displayed automatically after deleting the program pattern MENU PROG EDIT 7 clear PTno An The program pattern number to be deleted P NO 3 EDIT program edit The submenu EDIT will be displayed automatically after deleting the program pattern sub menu IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 5 3 Handy Features for Creating and Editing Programs gt Ref 5 57 lt lt Ref 5 3 Handy Features for Creating and Editing Programs gt gt Ref 5 3 6 Adding Inserting Deleting segments in Program Patterns A CAUTION It is impossible to add or delete the segments in program pattern when the controller is in the program operating mode Stop reset the program operation when you want to add or delete the segments in pro gram pattern This function can be used with UP750 and UP550 New segments can be added to existing program patterns And unnecessary segments can be deleted If a new pattern you are creating is similar to an existing pattern an efficient thing to do is to copy the pattern and add or delete segments as necessary Segment additions insertion and deletions are done with the JC junction code The parameter used to add or delete the segment i
158. Function IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 2 1 References Related to Control Output gt lt lt Ref 2 1 References Related to Control Output gt gt Ref 2 1 1 Switching between Direct and Reverse Actions Ref 2 2 Switching between direct and reverse actions is possible with all models in the UP and UT series of controllers UP750 UP550 UP35 UT750 UTS UT4 0 and UT3L1 The terms direct action and reverse action define the directions in which the control output changes to increase or decrease its value according to whether the deviation of a measured value PV from the target setpoint SP is positive or negative The controller increases or decreases its control output value in the predetermined mode either direct action or reverse action in conjunction with the deviation of the current PV value from the SP value Note that there are no direct reverse action options for heating cooling control You can switch between direct and reverse actions even when the controller is in operation To switch use the parameter appropriate for your controller model as noted below e n DR operating parameter for the UP750 UP550 UT750 UT5 e DR operating parameter for the UP35 O and UT3 and UT400 In the reverse action mode factory set default the control output value decreases if the PV value i
159. Function related Parameters PO and POc Note2 UP35 UT3 a F Description Setting range Default D register No Code Da Preset output 5 0 to 105 0 0 0 924 Par Cooling side preset out 0 0 to 105 0 0 0 925 POc Note2 Note1 Heating side preset output in heating cooling control mode The setting range in heating cooling control mode is 0 0 to 105 0 of control output Note2 The parameter can be displayed in heating cooling control mode UP35U does not have the parameter lt lt Ref 2 1 References Related to Control Output gt gt Ref 2 1 9 Placing Control Output in Tracking Mode for Cascade Primary loop Control or Loop Control for Backup Placing the control output in tracking mode is possible with the UP750 UP550 UT750 UT550 UT551 and UT520 As noted in the heading above this feature works only when the controller is used for cascade primary loop control or loop control for backup though the UP750 and UP550 do not support loop control for backup Output tracking is a function with which switching is carried out between an external tracking input signal and the control output signal of the controller by means of a contact input or communication The output tracking function works only when the controller is in either of the two control modes discussed above Fig 2 1 8 briefly illustrates how this function works Tracking input PV input Input for switching
160. G1 setting For example If you A use terminals 19 and 20 as shown in the figure on the left register 5161 the I Relay number of DI1 plus Di 5000 19 O COM 20 Fig 3 1 12 IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 3 1 References Related to Contact Input gt Ref 3 38 The following parameters are used Change parameters as explained in the User s Manuals Initial Settings and Parameter Map e Setup parameters Contact Input Registration Parameters MG1 MG2 MG3 MG4 aces Perault D resistor Description Setting range I Relay number plus 5000 No Code Note1 MG1 Message display 0 7 1166 interruption 1 Note1 The setting range equals the not specified MG2 Message display range of I Relay numbers 0 1167 interruption 2 Note1 each number plus 5000 not specified A that correspond to the DI MG3 Message display numbers of the contact input D 1168 interruption 3 Note1 terminals you want to use not specified MG4 Message display Note1 0 1169 interruption 4 Note1 not specified Note1 The I Relay numbers used here are 161 to 168 When the I O expansion module is used the numbers 177 to 192 are also the applicable I Relay numbers For more information on I Relay numbers see Ref 8 1 4 The relationship between the factory set DI numbers and input terminal assignments may differ depending on the UP mode
161. HOD i AT a5 7 SP 8 SP i i 9 Press the key once to display the vop Hes a raz ane parameter ORL Esen mn ae raa er Set the ON OFF rate low limit value using Seveestee Ear Far ee o i the 4 keys then press the CIJ key tree row Zon eon Ste to register it ORB RI ie rim fama ooi Boas 1 H 7 H 8 H k 1 DR 7 DR 8 DR 1 Pc 7Pe 8 Pc 1 o 7de 8 lc 1 De 7 Dce 8 Dc 1 He 7 He 8 Hc 1 DB 7 DB 8 DB 1 RP RHY RDV 1 PO TPO 8 PO 7 0c 8 0c Pressing the key for at least 3 seconds to go back to the operating display IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 3 3 References Related to Alarms gt Ref 3 75 lt lt Ref 3 3 Reference Related to Alarms gt gt Ref 3 3 5 Using the heater burnout alarm UT350 and UT320 only The heater burnout alarm can be used with the UT350 and UT320 The parameters for the heater burnout alarm are AL1 AL2 and AL3 When a two phase heater is used select heater burnout alarm 1 alarm code 24 See Fig 3 3 7 below When a three phase heater is used select both heater burnout alarms i e 1 and 2 to set up the alarm function See Fig 3 3 8 below TIP The heater current sensor used is the CTL 6 S H sensor of U R D Ltd This sensor must be purchased by the user themselves 1 When a two phase heater is used select heater burnout alarm 1 alarm code 24 Using a two
162. In heating cooling control 0 0 to 999 9 Note3 Table 4 1 3 Integral time Heating side OFF or 1 to 6000 sec 240 seconds Refer to the n l integral time Table 4 1 3 in heating cooling control Note2 n d Derivative time Heating side OFF or 1 to 6000 sec 60 seconds Refer to the n D derivative time Table 4 1 3 in heating cooling control Note2 a r Manual reset Heating side 5 0 to 105 0 50 0 Refer to the n MR manual reset enabled when integral Table 4 1 3 in heating cooling control Note2 time n l is OFF n Pe Coolong side proportional band 0 0 to 999 9 Note3 5 0 Refer to the n Pc Note4 Table 4 1 3 adc Cooling side Integral time OFF or 1 to 6000 sec 240 seconds Refer to the n Ic Note4 Table 4 1 3 n de Cooling side Derivative time OFF or 1 to 6000 sec 60 seconds Refer to the n Dc Note4 Table 4 1 3 n dh Dead band Note5 In heating cooling control 3 0 Refer to the n DB 100 0 to 50 0 Table 4 1 3 nr P Zone PID reference point 1 0 0 to 100 0 of 100 0 value of Refer to the n RP PV input range PV input range Table 4 1 3 Note that 1 RP lt 2 RP radu Reference deviation OFF or 0 0 to 100 0 of OFF Refer to the RDV PV input range span Table 4 1 3 Note1 The prefix n in the table above represents the number of each of the parameters such as target setpoints and their associate PID constants listed in the table Since a maximum of four target
163. Instrument Alarms and Events gt Ref 3 103 Parameters used to set local events are summarized below To change the settings of these parameters see the Initial Settings user s manual or the Parameters user s manual for your controller model Program parameters Local Setpoint Parameters E21A to E28A and E21B to E28B UP750 raed Description Setting Range Default aaa Code E21A Local event 21 type OFF 1 to 10 or 28 to 31 Note1 OFF unused 104 41 to 50 or 68 to 71 Note2 E21B Local event 21 100 0 to 100 0 of lt lt 100 0 for upper limit 105 setpoint PV input range for PV Setpoint alarms 0 0 for lower limit 100 0 to 100 0 of lt lt 0 0 of PV input PV input range span for range span deviation alarms 5 0 to 105 0 for lt lt 100 0 for upper limit output value alarms 0 0 for lower limit This range of symbols covers the parameters E22A to E27A and E22B to E27B These parameters are allocated to the D registers numbered 106 to 117 l The setting range and factory set default of the parameter E2xA are the same as the parameter E21A L Likewise the setting range and factory set default of the parameter E2xB are the same as the parameter E21B E28A Local event 28 type OFF 1 to 10 or 28 to 31 Note1 OFF unused 118 41 to 50 or 68 to 71 Note2 E28B Local event 28 Note3 Note3 119 setpoint Note1 For more information on the setting range see Alarm Type Code in Table 3
164. L E Shows the number of None 9 or 109 Note2 remaining unused events Note1 Note1 The ALL E E NO parameter is used only to display the number of all unused events It need not be set Note2 The number of all unused events B register No 9 or 109 can be read by writing 1 for the read flag of B register 3 RDTRG after writing the No of any used program pattern and a segment No in B register 1 PTNO and 2 SEGNO IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 5 3 Handy Features for Creating and Editing Programs gt To check the number of all unused events carry out the operation shown below Ref 5 52 1 Refer to the Parameter Map and Program Parameter Map in the user s Manual First display the operating parameter main menu PROG then press the key to display the program parameter setting display Submenu LOC will be displayed 2 And then press 4 EDIT program edit sub menu J keys to display the submenu EDIT UP750 UP550 Parameter Map Operating Parameter PROG EDIT ALL E E NO 3 Press the key three times to display the parameter ALL E E NO unused event no E NO MENU PROG EDIT 4 The number of we all unused events 4000 Le LAI
165. MO34H 1669 MO35L 1670 MO35H 1671 MO36L 1672 MO36H 1673 MO37L 1674 MO37H 1675 MO38L 1676 MO38H 1677 MO39L 1678 MO39H 1679 MO40L 1680 MO40H 1681 MO41L 1682 MO41H 1683 MO42L 1684 MO42H 1685 MO43L 1686 MO43H 1687 MO44L 1688 MO44H 1689 MO45L 1690 MO45H 1691 MO46L 1692 MO46H 1693 MO47L 1694 MO47H 1695 MO48L 1696 MO48H 1697 MO49L 1698 MO49H 1699 MO50L 1700 MO50H 1 indicates that the code is for the loop 1 indicates that the code is for the PID group 1 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 8 1 Outline of Registers and relays gt Ref 8 8 UP350 D register Map Table 8 1 3 1 4 UP350 D register Map 1 4 PROCESS PROGRAM MODE PAR OPERATION 1 OPERATION 2 USR PY No 0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 2 3 4 5 OUT 6 1 P 7 1 1 8 R P1 P2 1 D 9 HOLD 10 ADV 11 1 MR 12 PVE 18 14 15 6 7 18 19 1 RP 20 21 HOLDSP 22 23 HOLDTM 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 1AL1 2 P 32 1 A1 2 l 33 1AL2 2 D 34 1 A2 35 1 EON 36 1 EOF 2MR 37 1 SSP PCCH Note 38 1 STC PCCL Note 39 1 SP1 40 1 TM1 41 1 SP2 AT 42 1 TM2 SC 43 1 SP3 BS 44 1 TM3 FL 2 RP 45 1 SP4 46 1 7M4 47 1 SP5 48 1 TM5 49 1 SP6 50 1 TM6 CO is read only register Note The codes PCCH and PCCL are used on
166. O7 are shown below Model Function Registered number Common to UT750 UT550 UT551 and UT520 Alarm 1 output 5689 I relay number Alarm 2 output Alarm 3 output 5690 I relay number Alarm 4 output 5693 l relay number UT750 only Cooling output via DO3 5691 I relay number 1607 D register number Cooling output via DO4 1609 D register number UT550 UT551 and UT520 only FAIL output 1609 D register number IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 3 2 References Related to Contact Output gt 8 Loop control with PV hold function UT mode 8 E For the UT550 UT520 UT551 only DO Output Type Function DO1 Relay Alarm 1 output DO2 Relay Alarm 2 output DO3 Relay Alarm 3 output Note2 DO4 Note1 Transistor Alarm 4 output Note2 DO5 Note1 Transistor Not assigned DO6 Note1 Transistor Not assigned DO7 Note1 Transistor FAIL output Note1 Used for the UT550 01 UT550 03 UT551 O1C and UT551 If the control output selects a transistor output alarm 4 Note2 D only output is assigned to the relay terminal for output 1 and alarm 3 output is also assigned to the relay terminal for output 2 UT550 2 only 9 Dual loop control UT mode 11 E For the UT750 only D register and I relay number
167. OFF status of the DI1 DI2 DI3 and DI4 contact inputs can be programmed as shown in the Table 3 1 11 to define 15 choices of program pattern numbers IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 3 1 References Related to Contact Input gt Ref 3 27 Table 3 1 11 Program pattern No and the ON OFF status of the DI1 to DI15 Program pattern No DI bit 0 DI2 bit 1 DI3 bit 2 D14 bit 3 1 ON OFF OFF OFF 2 OFF ON OFF OFF 3 ON ON OFF OFF 4 OFF OFF ON OFF 5 ON OFF ON OFF 6 OFF ON ON OFF 7 ON ON ON OFF 8 OFF OFF OFF ON 9 ON OFF OFF ON 10 OFF ON OFF ON 11 ON ON OFF ON 12 OFF OFF ON ON 13 ON OFF ON ON 14 OFF ON ON ON 15 ON ON ON ON The UP550 is designed so that functions assigned to their contact input terminals can be changed Select the desired contact input terminal with which a function predefined for each setup parameter contact input registration parameter is executed To do this register the I Relay number corresponding to the terminal s DI number with the setup parameter whose function you want to use See the following parameter flowchart If necessary reassign functions by referring to the DIS setup parameter table on the following page Ay CAUTION If you change any of the contact input terminal assignments check that the new assignment agree with the current wiring If necessary rewire the terminals OK Deen j an LOO
168. ON OFF 5 SP ON OFF ON OFF 6 SP OFF ON ON OFF 7 SP ON ON ON OFF 8 SP OFF OFF OFF ON Target setpoints Pn 0 bit 0 Pn 1 bit 1 Pn 2 bit 2 Pn 3 bit 3 1 PID ON OFF OFF OFF 2 PID OFF ON OFF OFF 3 PID ON ON OFF OFF 4 PID OFF OFF ON OFF 5 PID ON OFF ON OFF 6 PID OFF ON ON OFF 7 PID ON ON ON OFF 8 PID OFF OFF OFF ON A CAUTION For Remote Local switching or Auto Manual switching do not use the status swiching and the rising edge switching at the same time IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 3 1 References Related to Contact Input gt Ref 3 13 The Example of Auto Manual Switching by External Contact Input Rising Edge Switching The following example shows the switching from automatic operation to manual operation by external contact input rising edge switching Rising edge switching to automatic operation Set 5161 DI1 to the contact input registration parameter AUT Rising edge switching to manual operation Set 5162 DI2 to the contact input registration parameter MAN The actions of the controller and key operation in this case are shown below lt Rising edge switching gt ON DI1 AUT OFF lt Rising edge switching gt ON DI2 MAN OFF controller Key operation Can be changed Fig 3 1 5 The example of Auto Manual switching by external contact input IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 3 1 References R
169. P period settig or 500 1181 UT mode Note 2 Note 1 Only UT750 UT550 UT551 and UT520 can select 50ms Note 2 The D register No of UP750 UP550 UP mode is 1281 and the No of UT750 UT5 is 1181 IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 1 1 References Related to PV Input gt Ref 1 13 E Setting the Required Parameters To set the parameters carry out the following steps Here we explain how to display the parameter setting display and to change the parameter values Before carrying out these operations be sure to refer to the User s Manuals Initial Settings and Parameter Map of the controller The parameter map is very helpful in finding the path to the setting display for a particular parameter 1 Referring to the User s Manual above UT750 display the setup parameter main menu a UTMD Rape Then display the submenu MD 2 Press the key 2 times to display the T Any parameter SMP LOOP1 m LOOP2 H CMLP H CONF N p gt TEST j INIT eae ad i E 7 SET DISP P aa 3 In the parameter setting displays adjust ade a NC the paramet
170. P1 j gt LOOP2 gt CMLP gt a UPMD For example when you want to use the DI2 terminal number 18 for the function of starting program operation call up the parameter PROG setting display and set the value to 5162 The 5162 means I relay number of DI2 plus 5000 e Refer to the Table 3 1 10 IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 3 1 References Related to Contact Input gt Ref 3 28 The following parameters are used Change parameters as explained in the User s Manuals Initial Settings and Parameter Map Setup parameters Contact Input Registration Parameters PROG RST LOC HOLD etc UP550 Detauit D register Description Setting range I relay number plus 5000 No 9 Code Note1 PROG Start of program operation 5165 1147 When Din changes from DI5 OFF to ON Note2 RST Stop of program operation 5166 1148 When Din changes from DI6 OFF to ON Note2 LOC Start of local mode operation 5167 1149 When Din changes from DI7 OFF to ON Note2 HOLD Start of hold mode operation 0 1150 When Din changes from not specified
171. P2 18 1520 TSP2 19 1521 TSP220 1522 TSP221 1523 TSP222 1524 TSP223 1525 TSP2 24 1526 TSP2 25 1527 TSP2 26 1528 TSP2 27 1529 TSP2 28 1530 TSP2 29 1531 TSP2 30 152 TSP231 1533 TSP2 32 15 TSP233 1535 TSP2 34 1536 TSP2 35 1537 TSP2 36 1538 TSP2 37 1539 TSP2 38 1540 TSP239 1541 TSP2 40 1542 TSP241 1543 TSP242 1544 TSP243 1545 TSP244 1546 TSP245 1547 TSP246 1548 TSP247 1549 TSP248 1550 TSP249 1551 TSP250 1582 TSP251 1553 TSP252 1554 TSP253 1555 TSP254 1556 TSP255 1557 TSP256 1558 TSP257 1559 TSP258 1560 TSP259 1561 TSP260 1562 TSP261 1563 TSP262 1564 TSP263 1565 TSP2 64 1566 TSP265 1567 TSP266 1568 TSP267 1569 TSP268 1570 TSP269 1571 TSP2 70 1572 TSP271 1573 TSP2 72 1574 TSP2 73 157 TSP2 74 1576 TSP2 75 1577 TSP2 76 1578 TSP2 77 1579 TSP2 78 1580 TSP2 79 1581 TSP280 158 TSP281 1583 TSP282 158 TSP283 158 TSP284 1586 TSP285 1587 TSP286 1588 TSP287 1589 TSP288 1590 TSP289 1591 TSP290 1592 TSP291 1598 TSP292 15 TSP293 159 TSP2 94 1596 TSP2 95 1597 TSP2 96 1598 TSP2 97 1599 TSP2 98 1600 TSP299 is for the loop 2 TIME No 1301 No 1351 No 1401 No 1451 No 1501 No 1551 No 1601 No 1700 1601 160 1608 1604 1605 1606 1607 1608 TIME 1 TIME 2 TIME 3 TIME 4 TIME 5 TIME 6 TIME 7 1609 TIME 8 1610 TIME 9 1611 TIME 10 1612 TIME 11 1613 TIME 12 1614 TIME 13 1615 TIME 14 1616 TIME 15 1617 TIME 16 1618 TIME 17 1619
172. Ptno is displayed in LCD display as shown in the figure PNO 1 This time the parameter code Ptn S is displayed on PV display LED The program pattern number 4 The following S No display will be displayed The number of segments within the pattern can be checked with this display MENU PROG EDIT 3 use segment The number of segments within the pattern S NO oe lt lt Ref 5 3 Handy Features for Creating and Editing Programs gt gt Ref 5 3 3 Checking the number of all unused events The number of all unused events can be checked with UP750 and UP550 The total number of events allowed with the UP750 is 4 000 That for the UP550 is 400 The more program patterns Note1 are created the less unused events are left This function can be used to check how many events are left before creating a new program pattern Note1 The maximum of 16 time events and 8 PV events can be used in the segment under operation A single segment can contain maximum of 8 events However the total number of event signal outputs is 7 for both PV events and time events combined With the optional I O expansion module an additional 16 outputs can be added The parameter used to check the number of all unused events is as follows Program Parameter Parameters for Editing Programs ALL E UP750 UP550 Per B register No Description Setting range Default UP750 UP550 only Code AL
173. RDI202 INPUT3 5187 RDI203 VO expansion INPUT4 5188 RDI204 module 2 INPUT5 5189 RDI205 INPUT6 5190 RDI206 INPUT7 5191 RDI207 INPUT8 5192 RDI208 Note See Ref 8 1 4 l relay Outline and I relay Map IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 3 1 References Related to Contact Input gt Ref 3 20 4 3 Using Interrupt message functions with the UT750 The UT750 is designed so that you can display one of up to four user registered messages on a setting display using signals from contact input terminals Messages must be no longer than 20 single byte alphanumeric charac ters This feature is convenient as it automatically displays a message specific to an event that occurs during operation A CAUTION The optional communication function or the optional LL100 Parameters Setting Tool is required to register these messages each comprising no more than 20 alphanumeric characters The text strings of messages must be registered with the UT750 s D registers numbered 801 to 840 in advance Up to four messages can be registered Register each message with its specifically numbered D register as shown below For more information on how to register messages see the user s manual of the communication function or the LL100 Parameters Setting Tool MG1 D0801 to D0810 MG2 D0811 to D0820 Register numbers for registering message 1 MG3 D0821 to D0830 Register numbers for registering mes
174. Retransmission output 2 type selection is not supported with the UP35h UT4h0 and UT5hh The terminals used for retransmission differ depending on which of the RET1 or RET2 parameters you select therefore you should also be careful with terminal wiring Furthermore exercise care not to use these terminals for control output at the same time IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 2 2 References Related to Retransmission Output gt Ref 2 25 2 About the Loop Power Supply Function The loop power supply function supplies DC power to instruments such as a two wire transmitter The loop power supply block is isolated from the controller s internal circuitry In addition the block is equipped with a current limiting circuit Therefore accidental short circuits that may occur in the field do not adversely affect the rest of the controller s internal circuitry Note that the loop power supply function cannot be used for digital communication where the supply voltage is superposed on the signal line As explained earlier there are two types of loop power supply the standard and optional power supplies Use either of them according to your application needs Specifications of Loop Power Supply Standard supply 14 5 to 18 0V DC 21 mA DC Optional supply 21 6 to 28 0V DC 30 mA DC max Examples of loop power supply connection are given below Input terminal 1 to 5 V
175. SEG T parameter changes the content of the segment time in the program pattern as follows See Page Ref 5 3 or Page Ref 5 4 e When SEG T 0 segment time is displayed as TIME e When SEG T 1 segment ramp time is displayed as TM RT E Setting the Required Parameters Carry out the operation shown below UP750 UP550 parameter setting way is shown in the following example Here we explain how to display the parameter setting display and to change the parameter values Before carrying out these operations be sure to refer to the User s Manuals Initial Settings and Parameter Map of the controller The parameter map is very helpful in finding the path to the setting display for a particular parameter 1 Referring to the User s Manual above display the setup parameter main menu PARA Then display the submenu SP 2 Press the a using the key three times to display the parameter SEG T Adjust the parameter value to 0 or 1 aj zZ keys then press the key to Register it For example when you want to select Programming by setting segment ramps adjust the parameter value to 1 and register it by pressing the key UP750 UP550 Parameters Map Password i SEG T 7
176. SH3 GHJ rGH Max value of Maximum value 1227 Q remote input scale of remote SH3 RSH p 19999 to 30000 DEE p g However SL1 lt SH SL3 oid rob Min value of SH1 SL1 30000 Minimum value 1228 SL3 RSL remote input scale of remote input range Note 1 UT450 UT420 do not have these parameters For UT450 UT420 use DPC RSH and RSL parameters for the settings For UT551 revers range can be set IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 1 2 References Related to Remote Input gt Ref 1 24 Setting Example 1 For UT750 and UT5 The example below shows signal type units range and scaling setpoints used for remote input with the UT750 UT550 UT551 and UT520 For example with analog input 3 IN3 41 the remote input range is 1 000 to 5 000 for standard signals 1 to 5 V Here for an input range of 2 to 4 V set as follows Maximum value of analog input 3 range RH3 4 000 gt Ref 3 500 means 3 5 V Minimum value of analog input 3 range RL3 2 000 4V 5V 1V 2V Input range of analog input 3 i U 0 EU 100 E Remote input range 2 000 RL3 4 000 RH3 lt Fig 1 2 1 In the above example remote input range was set to 2 to 4 V To change the input voltage signal to the physical unit of the actual controlled condition hereinafter scaling see the Setting Scaling Procedure Setting Sc
177. SHS is set to 50 00 IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 1 2 References Related to Remote Input gt Ref 1 25 Setting Example 2 For UT4L0 The example below shows signal type units range and scaling setpoints used for remote input with the UT400 For example with remote input type RSP 41 the remote input range is 1 000 to 5 000 for standard signals 1 to 5V Note Unlike the UT750 and UT500 the UT400 does not have RH3 and RL3 parameters therefore input signal range cannot be changed To change the input voltage signal 1 to 5 V in this case to the physical unit of the actual controlled condition hereinafter scaling see the Setting Scaling Procedure Setting Scaling Procedure 2 For UT4C00 The following procedure shows how to change setpoints from the factory set defaults 1V 2V 4V 5V k Input range of analog input 3 EU 0 IN 41 lt EU o0 lt Stepi T ia Minimum value of PV Maximum value of PV lt Step 2 input range or PV input input range or PV input scale i e 270 0 R SL scale i e 1370 0 R SH Remote input range 10 0 RSL khaa aing I H 50 0 R SH Step3 Fig 1 2 3 Step1 This example shows a remote input range of 1 000 to 5 000 for standard signals 1 to 5 V for a remote input type RSP 41 Step2 With
178. T450 UT420 Parameter map Operating display SET 3 sec or more Al e ofPA gt _ SEuP Setup parameter menu N 1 Call up the I O display Pi 2 Press the key to display a the parameter DIS SH setting display ee DIS IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 3 1 References Related to Contact Input gt Ref 3 8 The following parameters are used Change parameters as explained in the User s Manuals Initial Settings and Parameter Map e Setup parameters I O related Parameters DIS Refer to table in Fig 3 1 2 when you want to confirm the terminal numbers those are used for contact input UT450 pang Description Setting range Default co Display dl 5 DI function Remote local mode switching function only 1 932 DIS selection This function is only assigned to terminals 28 and 30 Note1 Switches between remote and local modes Note1 Assigns auto manual mode switching function to DI1 Note2 e Assigns STOP RUN status switching function to DI2 Note3 The UT450 is designed so that eight choices of setpoint numbers for controller operation can be defined by programming the ON OFF states of DI3 to DI6
179. TIME 18 1620 TIME 19 1621 TIME 20 1622 TIME 21 1623 TIME 22 1624 TIME 23 1625 TIME 24 1626 TIME 25 1627 TIME 26 1628 TIME 27 1629 TIME 28 1630 TIME 29 1631 TIME 30 162 TIME 31 1633 TIME 32 16 TIME 33 163 TIME 34 1636 TIME 35 1637 TIME 36 1638 TIME 37 1639 TIME 38 1640 TIME 39 1641 TIME 40 1642 TIME 41 1643 TIME 42 1644 TIME 43 1645 TIME 44 1646 TIME 45 1647 TIME 46 1648 TIME 47 1649 TIME 48 1650 TIME 49 indicates that the code is for the loop 1 For IM 05J01B02 01E 1651 TIME 50 1682 TIME 51 1653 TIME 52 1654 TIME 53 1655 TIME 54 1656 TIME 55 1657 TIME 56 1658 TIME 57 1659 TIME 58 1660 TIME 59 1661 TIME 60 16 2 TIME 61 1663 TIME 62 1664 TIME 63 1665 TIME 64 1666 TIME 65 1667 TIME 66 1668 TIME 67 1669 TIME 68 1670 TIME 69 1671 TIME 70 1672 TIME 71 1673 TIME 72 1674 TIME 73 167 TIME 74 1676 TIME 75 1677 TIME 76 1678 TIME 77 1679 TIME 78 1680 TIME 79 1681 TIME 80 168 TIME 81 1683 TIME 82 1684 TIME 83 168 TIME 84 1686 TIME 85 1687 TIME 86 1688 TIME 87 1689 TIME 88 1690 TIME 89 1691 TIME 90 1692 TIME 91 1698 TIME 92 16 TIME 93 16 TIME 94 1696 TIME 95 1697 TIME 96 1698 TIME 97 1699 TIME 98 1700 TIME 99 Ref 8 25 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 8 1 Outline of Registers and relays gt Ref 8 26 lt lt Ref 8 1 Outline of Registers and relays gt gt Ref 8 1 4 l relay Outline and I relay Map The status of controller s operation mode the
180. Target setpoint Hysteresis Setpoint upper limit Setpoint Alarm setpoint Hysteresis Setpoint lower limit I A Alarm setpoint Setpoint fas ce Hysteresis De energization y b in case of PV A gt alarm Alarm setpoint PV value Hysteresis Output value upper limit Output value Alarm setpoint Hysteresis Output value lower limit I A Alarm setpoint Output value Alarm type codes 1 to 10 and 28 to 31 in the table above are assigned for the primary loop while alarm type codes 41 to 50 and 68 to 71 are assigned for the secondary loop IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 3 4 References Related to Instrument Alarms and Events gt Ref 3 92 Parameters used here are summarized below To change the settings of these parameters see the Initial Settings user s manual or the Parameters user s manual for your controller model e Program parameters Parameters for Setting the Event Action EVn TYn and PEn UP750 UP550 say B Register No Description Setting Range Default Note1 Code EVn Event number 0 or 21 to 28 Note3 0 unregistered Note2 TYn PV event type OFF 1 to 10 OFF unregistered 116 to 139 Note2 or 28 to 31 Note4 41 to 50 or 68 to 71 Noted PEn PV event setpoint 100 0 to 100 0 of lt lt 100 0 for upper limit Note2 PV input range for PV Setpoint alarms 0 0 for lower limit e 100 0 to 100 0 of lt lt l
181. UT400 only to AL1 Time unit hours and minutes value must be set has no 7 22 Downward detection to 21 through 24 loop 2 Time unit hours and minutes E 23 Upward detection Time unit minutes and seconds 24 Downward detection Time unit minutes and seconds Operating parameters Setpoint Alarm and PID related Parameter n A1 UT750 UT5 UTAO Description Setting range Default oo Code Code n Al a Al Timer time OFF or 00 00 to 99 59 OFF See the n A1 Alarm 1 setting value h m hours minutes Table 3 3 1 m s minutes seconds L TIP With UT5O the alarm timer can be used in the 5th alarm alarm1 of secondary loop when the 8 alarms are used However there are no displays of timer time and lamps that indicate the status of the alarm timer Table 3 3 1 1st for loop 1 2nd for loop 2 UT4_0 has no loop 2 n 1 n 2 n 3 n 4 n 5 n 6 n 7 n 8 ist 2nd ist 2nd ist 2nd ist 2nd ist 2nd ist 2nd ist 2nd ist 2nd n A1 302 502 327 527 352 552 377 577 402 602 427 627 452 652 477 677 n A2 303 503 328 528 353 553 378 578 403 603 428 628 453 653 478 678 n A3 304 504 329 529 354 554 379 579 404 604 429 629 454 654 479 679 n A4 305 505 330 530 355 555 380 580 405 605 430 630 455 655 480 680 IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt To
182. V 2 CSP 2 OUT 2 HOUT 2 COUT 2 MOD 2 PIDNO 2 DEV 1 OR 1 DEV 2 OR 2 SMEC SMC DISTS PARAERR ALOSTS TIM 1 TIM 2 UT750 UT55 O UT520 D register Map 1 4 PROCESS tp unused area Pas 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 A M 1 S R C A M SPNO SRN MOUT 1 MOUTc 1 The code in the square like a RDISTS is used only with UT750 e The code in the shaded square like a P NO is used only with UT551 The code in parentheses is for UT550 UT520 and UT551 The number attached to the end of code means loop number is the code for the loop 1 and CSP 2 is for the loop 2 The number attached to the top of code means PID group number 1 example 1 SP is the code for the PID group 1 and 2 SP is for the PID group 2 IM 05J01B02 01E 251 ORH 1 301 252 ORL 1 302 1 indicates that the code is for the loop 1 For example CSP 1 indicates that the code is for the PID group 1 For 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 8 1 Outline of Registers and l relays gt Ref 8 13 Table 8 1 4 2 4 UT750 UT550 UT520 D register Map 2 4 901 RMS 1 951 902 SPT 1 952 903 PVT 1 953 904 TM U 1 954 Y 130 o oO ne a 3 Z 5 A gt unused area sat 850 NAM E10 900 lt Note The code in the square is used only w
183. V event 1 hysteresis 0 5 of PV input 919 HY1 0 0 to 100 0 of rang span HYJ PV event 2 hysteresis PV input range span 0 5 of PV input 920 HY2 range span a TIP for UP550 UP750 only Transition between events during target setpoint tracking at the end of program operation When switching the UP550 or UP750 to local mode operation constant target setpoint at the end of program operation you can select either the ON or OFF option for target setpoint tracking At this point a transition also takes place between PV events and local events For more information on the transition see When Local End JC 2 Is Selected in Ref 5 2 3 Selecting segment end condition IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 3 4 References Related to Instrument Alarms and Events gt Ref 3 97 lt lt Ref 3 4 References Related to Instrument Alarms and Evenits gt gt Ref 3 4 6 Using Time Events Using time events is possible with the UP35L UP550 or UP750 The function specifications differ however between the UP550 UP750 and the UP35L This section first dis cusses 1 time events when the controller is Model UP550 or UP750 and then 2 time events when the controller is Model UP35 1 When the Controller ls Model UP550 or UP750 AY CAUTION The output terminals for Time events have been predetermined at the factory according to the UP mode Confirm th
184. aaa t eae map ji RESTA i ti aba i aba ea a i si ias 25 tile Tle 8c LPi Shines 1 Tbs S 205 1De 7 De 8 Dce ias 2 26 THe 7 H B H tbe 2b6 1 DB 7 DB 8 DB a7 2a7 TRP RHY RDV t 47 207 1 PO 7 PO 8 PO t ias 2 28 1 0 7 0 8 0c i ibs 2b8 t tag 2a9 e_n 49 2b9 tato 2 a10 t 4 b10 2 10 t ian 2an ibn T2 PMD 2 PMD Fig 7 1 2 The following parameters are used Change parameters as explained in the User s Manuals Initial Settings and Parameter Map e Setup parameters Security related Parameters UP750 UFRO Description Setting range Default D register No Code A V 4 key lock OFF or ON OFF 1024 data setting key lock PT NO PT No key lock OFF or ON OFF 1026 RUN RUN key lock OFF or ON OFF 1027 MODE MODE key lock OFF or ON OFF 1028 LP1 Operating parameter OFF or ON OFF 1030 main menu LP1 lock LP2 Operating parameter OFF or ON OFF 1031 main menu LP2 lock PID Operating parameter OFF or ON OFF 1032 main menu PID lock USR Operating parameter OFF or ON OFF 1033 main menu USR lock PYS1 Operating parameter OFF or ON OFF 1034 main menu PYS1 lock PYS2 Operating parameter OFF or ON OFF 1035 main menu PYS2 lock IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 Blank Page
185. act Input Common 7 terminals differ according to 5V the controllers suffix code ON when using 16 or more of program patterns DI8 Check the numbers of input Dis 280 e 28 terminals DI1 to DI8 of the COM controller that you have by Common COM 20 i Bo the following table m i Contact rating 12 V DC 10 mA or more O shows available X shows not available 9 Model and Contact input terminals suffix codes UP550 L0 O O O O O O O x UP550 01 O O O O O O O e Fig 3 1 9 UP550 Contact Input Terminals The UP550 s DI numbers DI No and the corresponded terminal numbers are listed in the Table 3 1 10 The factory set function of each terminal is listed in the table Table 3 1 10 When the UP550 Single loop control mode UP mode 1 Terminal No DI No I relay no 5000 The factory set function 19 DI 5161 ae 18 eee Diz es te te 5162 oo Assign the function of selecting the program pattern number 40 DI3 5163 1 to 15 Note1 ae rine aan 5164 88 OB 5165 Assign the function of starting program operation OFFON 87 D6 5166 Assign the function of stopping program operation OFFON 36 Ci iOWS S 6167 Assign the function of starting Local mode operation OFF gt ON 2000 2 Common terminal for DI to DI 28 IB 6168 no function e S Common terminal for DI8 0 Note1 The ON and
186. al Point A3H parameter to 75 Set the Analog Output 3 0 Segmental Point A3L parameter to 0 The figure above shows an example where both analog outputs 1 and 3 are set to the current signal of 20 to 0 mA DC The type of output signal can be determined separately for each of the analog outputs listed above using the following three parameters Analog output 1 Analog output 1 type AO1 Analog output 2 Analog output 2 type AO2 Analog output 3 Analog output 3 type AO3 Table 2 1 6 Parameter Function Split computation output terminal Output signal type setting parameter A1H Analog output 1 100 segmental point Control output terminal AO1 Note1 segmental point AIL Analog output 1 0 Heating side terminal in Heating cooling control segmental point A2H Analog output 2 100 segmental point Cooling side output terminal 5 Available for the dual loop type of UT750 UP750 and AO2 Note1 A2L Analog output 2 0 heating cooling control of UT55Z UP550 segmental point A3H Analog output 3 100 segmental point ae Retransmission 1 output terminal AOS Note1 A3L Analog output 3 0 IM 05J01B02 01E Note1 You can select the output signal type from Table 2 1 7 To select them use the parameter AO1 AO2 or AO3 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 2 1 References Related to Control Output gt Ref 2 15 Table 2 1 7
187. al modes e Switching between loop 2 local and cascade modes the parameters are shown only during cascade control or cascade control with 2 universal inputs Selecting starting segment number PROG operating The PROG operating parameter main menu see Fig 7 1 2 is not shown parameter lock This prohibits you from changing any of the PROG parameter settings LP1 operating The LP1 operating parameter main menu see Fig 7 1 2 is not shown parameter lock This prohibits you from changing any of the LP1 parameter settings LP2 operating The LP2 operating parameter main menu see Fig 7 1 2 is not shown parameter lock This prohibits you from changing any of the PROG parameter settings n PID operating The n PID n 1 to 8 operating parameter submenu see Fig 7 1 2 is not shown parameter lock This prohibits you from changing of any of the PID parameter settings by key operation USR operating The USR operating parameter main menu see Fig 7 1 2 is not shown parameter lock This prohibits you from changing any of the USR parameter settings PYS1 operating The PYS1 operating parameter main menu see Fig 7 1 2 is not shown parameter lock This prohibits you from changing any of the PYS1 parameter settings Note1 PYS2 operating The PYS2 operating parameter submenu see Fig 7 1 2 is not shown parameter lock This prohibits you from changing of any of the PYS2 paramet
188. al variations in the SP value of a program pattern By allowing the derivative term D to positively act upon e For UT series Remote mode or cascade mode operation control mode Factory set values For the UPLI50 the mode is defined by setting as MODn 1 n 1 or 2 For the UT750 a cain variations resulting from a marginal change in the program e For UP series MOD 0 pattern the controller keeps track of the pattern without delay Program mode i operation except for hold or soak mode SP gt K PV MV PV derivative type Use this control method in order to protect the PV value from For UT series Note1 PID control any disorder that may result when the control output MV Local mode operation reacts over sensitively against a change in the SP value during Control output bump is continuous fixed point control e For UP series Note2 not allowed during If the PV derivative type PID control mode is used with the Local mode Note3 change in SP value permitted control output bump the MV value does not change hold mode or soak suddenly during a change in the SP value The controller uses mode operation the integral term only and gradually eliminates the deviation Fixed point that has occurred SP gt MV PV derivative type PID control Use this control method when using the controller for the secondary loop of cascade control In this method the control
189. aling Procedure 1 For UT750 and UT500 The following procedure shows how to change setpoints from the factory set defaults 1V 2V 4V 5V kK Input range of gt EU 0 8 analog input 3 IN 41 A baie 12 BU 100 N ia 2 000V RL3 T Remote input range 4 000V RH3 lt __ For UT551 reverse range can be set 1 RL3 4 000V RH3 2 000V Minimum value of PV Maximum value of PV input range or PV input x Physical quantity range gt input range or PV input lt scale i e 270 0 SL3 scale i e 1370 0 SH3 10 00 SL3 kk a ee gt 50 00 SH3 lt ___ Fig 1 2 2 Step1 This example shows a remote input range of 1 000 to 5 000 for standard signals 1 to 5 V for an analog input 3 type IN3 41 Step2 In this example the remote input range is set as 2 000 to 4 000V using the parameters RL3 and RH Step3 With the UT750 UT5L1L the same units and decimal point position set for the PV input range are used for the remote input range For this reason if the PV input range is set to a thermocouple type K 270 0 to 1370 0 C the initial value of SL3 is set to 270 0 and that of SH3 is set to 1370 0 Step4 Change the initial settings of SDP3 SL3 and SH3 to the actual values for the remote Input range In this example the SDP3 is set to 2 and SL3 is set to 10 00 and the
190. alog input 3 0 0 to 5 0 of PV input range 1 0 1012 Note 2 LC3 low signal cutoff Note 1 These parameters are used for 2 loop type of UP750 or UT750 Not displayed for UP550 UT550 UT551 and UT520 Note 2 These parameters can be used when the controller has Remote input function IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 1 1 References Related to PV Input gt Ref 1 10 E Setting the Required Parameters To set the parameters carry out the following steps Here we explain how to display the parameter setting display and to change the parameter values Before carrying out these operations be sure to refer to the User s Manuals Initial Settings and Parameter Map of the controller The parameter map is very helpful in finding the path to the setting display for a particular parameter ParametreMap UT750 1 Referring to the User s Manuals above display the Setup parameter main menu CMLP Then display the submenu AIN 2 Press the key 3 times to display the param eter A SR1 Note1 When you use the Spuare root extraction of PV set the parameter value to ON using the J E keys then press the J key to register it Note1 A SR1 is the parameter for UP750 UP550 and UT750 SR1 is the parameter for UT550 UT551 and UT520 3 Press the key once to display the parameter A LC1 Note2 Set the Analog input 1 low signal cutoff
191. an instrument alarm within 0 0 to 100 0 of the PV input range span Figures 3 4 2 and 3 4 3 show examples of setting the parameter HY1 Instrument Alarm 1 Hysteresis when the parameter Instrument Alarm 1 Type AL1 is set to the option PV upper limit alarm type code 1 In these figures Open and Closed indicate the states of a relay contact Fig 3 4 2 is an example when the instrument range RL1 to RH1 is set to 0 to 1000 C and HY1 to 5 C 0 5 of the instrument range span HY1 5 C example HY1 15 C example Mem e a m Closed ON F A Closed ON Open Open y gt z gt AL1 setpoint 100 C example i AL1 setpoint 100 C example PV value Kk PV value lt Alarm is ON lt OFF lt ON lt OFF Alarm is ON lt ON OFF OFF Yy Time Time Fig 3 4 2 Fig 3 4 3 If the on off switching of the instrument alarm is too busy you can alleviate the busyness by increasing the hyster esis on off bandwidth Since the HY1 parameter in Fig 3 4 3 is set to a larger value compared with Fig 3 4 2 the alarm switches on and off a slower rate IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 3 4 References Related to Instrument Alarms and Events gt Ref 3 85 The parameter used here is summarized below To change the settings of these parameters see the Initial Settings user s manual or the Pa
192. ansistor contact output IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 3 1 References Related to Contact Input gt Ref 3 35 A CAUTION The factory set function of each terminal of I O Expansion module is listed in the table below Reassign functions by referring to the Function changing procedure if necessary Input code Function Remarks RDI101 Starting HOLD operation Into HOLD when the contact status changed from OFF to ON RDI102 Starting ADVANCE operation Advance to the next segment when the contact status changed from OFF to ON RDI103 Switching Auto Manual ON AUTO Control output value can be operation OFF MANUAL changed by A key operation when MANUAL operation RDI104 Program patterns with the following se numerals added to numbers RDI105 selected by other contact turned RDI106 Switching program pattern Up z a me el o Ak st numbers canbe selected Note RDI105 turned on 32 RDI107 e RDI106 turned on 64 eee RDI107 turned on 128 RDI108 e RDI108 turned on 256 Note Note For example when you want to select the program pattern 17 set the ON OFF status of the Dls as followings DI ON DI2 OFF DI3 OFF DI4 OFF RDI104 ON and RDI105 to RDI108 OFF Function changing program The relationship between the contact input terminals of an I O expansion module and the Relay numbers is given in the table below To assign contact switched fu
193. arget setpoint SP number selection Factory set default e Zone PID selection selects by PV e Zone PID selection selects by target setpoint for UT551 only e Selects by specified PID number for UT551 only The following parameter is used Change parameter as explained in the User s Manuals Initial Settings and Parameter Map e Setup parameters Control action related parameter ZON UT750 UT5 UT400 er D register UT3 Description Setting range Default No 9 Code Code ZON Inn Zone PID selection 0 Target setpoint SP number selection 0 OFF 929 ZON 1 Zone PID selects by PV 2 Zone PID selects by target setpoint 3 Selects by specified PID number Setpoints 2 and 3 can be used with UT551 only Note With UT750 or UT500 this parameter is used commonly between loop 1 and loop 2 E Setting the required parameters Carry out the operation shown below UT7 Here we explain how to display the parameter setting display and to change the parameter values Before carrying out these operations be sure to refer to the User s Manuals Initial Settings and Parameter Map of the controller The parameter map is very helpful in finding the path to the setting display for a particular param eter 1 0 s parameter setting way is shown in the following example UT750 Parameter Map Password i
194. as parameter A SR1 are given in Ref 1 1 3 Square root extraction of PV of this section Refer to it as necessary IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 1 1 References Related to PV Input gt Ref 1 18 lt lt Ref 1 1 References Related to PV Input gt gt Ref 1 1 7 Using PV tracking function UT only The PV tracking function is available with UT750 UT550 UT551 UT520 UT450 and UT420 PV tracking is used to prevent a sudden change in PV Note As shown below PV tracking is turned OFF at the time of shipment Turn it ON if necessary When PV tracking is ON the controller sets the SP equal to PV temporarily in the event of the following e Power on Switching from MAN to AUTO mode e Switching from STOP to RUN e Switching the number of setpoint SP No After SP is equalized to PV the SP is gradually changed toward the original SP value at a constant rate of change for ramp rate see the CAUTION below and the following Fig 1 1 7 A CAUTION The SP rate of change ramp rate is set using parameter UPR and or DNR which is set to OFF at the time of shipment To use PV tracking you must set parameter UPR and or DNR to a desired ramp rate value gt See Ref 4 1 4 Changing SP at a ramp rate when SP is switched in Ref 4 1 References Related to Target Setpoint SP With these parameters OFF which specifies no ramp rate ramp rate 0 PV tracking will not operate IM
195. at function must start from segment number 1 All event settings can also be used during the repeat operation as they are Once the repeat operation starts it will continue operation until otherwise stopped by key operations external contacts or via communications The following shows where an identical program pattern will be repeated A SEG1 SEG2 SEG3 SEG4 SEG5 SEG1 a from segment number 1 SEG2 SEG3 SEG4 SEG5 Repeated until 1st program pattern Y Start repetition Fig 5 2 24 Program pattern with program 1 repetition specified The following parameters are used stop operation i is executed To change parameter values follow the Program Setup or Parameters section in the appropriate User s Manual Program parameters junction code parameters 1 JC 2 JC UP35 Description Setting range Default Code ar Junction code 2 Pattern 1 startup E f d 6 for program pattern 1 3 Pattern 2 startup A h is AE Junction code not set at the factory CUL Set 2 or 3 above to set 2 JC for program pattern 2 repeat operation before shipment IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 5 2 References Related to Program Setup gt Ref 5 37 lt lt Ref 5 2 References Related to Program Setup gt gt Ref 5 2 7 Using the Advance Functions The advance function enables a program to be advanced forcibly to the next
196. ata obtained from dry and wet bulb calculations in temperature and humidity control The decimal point position of the PV range can be set with parameters P DP1 and P DP2 P RL1 RL1 Fig Dry bulb Input 1 50 to 100 C gt RH2 or 3 l PV range i lt lt lt lt _ ___ _ i PRHA i Range of analog input 2 or 3 RL2 or 3 g a i i Range of analog input 1 RH1 0 300 500 1 1 8 PV Range for a Control Having More than One Input Wet bulb Input 2 50 to 100 C y calculation Dry and wet bulb PV range convention 1 100 0 for P RH2 and 30 0 for P RL2 1000 C lt Example gt _ for P DP2 Y PV1 PV2 50 to 100 C 30 0 to 100 0 Fig 1 1 9 PV Range for Temperature and Humidity Control Setup parameters Input related Parameters P UNn P RLn etc UP750 UT55 ure ee Description Setting range Default D register No UT750 Code Code P UNn PL PVn Unit Percent C Degree Celsius 1230 for loop 1 Note1 P Un C Degree Celsius 1234 for loop 2 F Fahrenheit No unit P DPn Pdr PVn decimal 0 to 4 Note2 1231 for loop 1 P D1 1235 for loop 2 P RHn Pho Maximum value 19999 to 30000 Maximum value 1232 for loop 1 P H1 of PVn range Note3 of PVn range 1236 for loop 2 or scale P RLn m Minimum value 19999 to 30000 Minimum value 1233 for loop 1 P L1 of PVn range Note3 of PVn range 1
197. ations When the target setpoint of the current segment is higher than that of the last segment ramp up operations are performed for the current segment During ramp up the amount of change between target setpoints per hour or per minute is set with the ramp time parameter TM RM PV A n 1 to 99 Segment n Target setpoint TSP1 or TSP2 operatio Target setpoint of last segment Start target setpoint if program just started Segment ramp time eee The unit of time is set with TMU gt Time lt TM RT sets the amount of change in this area per hour or per minute TM RT Fig 5 1 2 Segment time during ramp up operations Segment time during ramp down operations When the target setpoint of the current segment is lower than that of the last segment ramp down operations are performed for the current segment During ramp down the amount of change between target setpoints per hour or per minute is set with the ramp time parameter TM RM PV A n 1 to 99 Target setpoint of last segment Start target setpoint if program just started Segment n operation Target setpoint TSP1 or TSP2 gt Time Fig 5 1 3 Segment time during ramp down operations IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 5 1 References Related to Segment Operation gt Ref 5 6 Segment time during soak operations When the target setpoint of the
198. atterns 1 to 30 101 to 199 for UP750 Program patterns 1 to 99 IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 5 3 Handy Features for Creating and Editing Programs gt Ref 5 48 Ref 5 3 Handy Features for Creating and Editing Programs A IMPORTANT Applicable models of this section UP750 UP550 UP35 UT750 UT5 UT4000 UT3 UM300 UP750 UP550 None None None None None None Note Note These functions are not available with the UP350 This section contains reference information on the following aspects of program creating and editing This information can be particularly handy in creating new program patterns from existing patterns Refer to and use this information only if necessary 1 Checking the Total Number of Unused Segments 2 Checking the number of segments in a specific Program Pattern 3 Checking the number of all unused events 4 Copying Program Patterns 5 Deleting Program Patterns 6 Adding Inserting Deleting segments in Program Patterns lt lt Ref 5 3 Handy Features for Creating and Editing Programs gt gt Ref 5 3 1 Checking the Total Number of Unused Segments The total number of unused segments amongst all program patterns can be checked with the UP750 and UP550 The total number of segments allowed with the UP750 is 3 000 That for t
199. bers see Table 8 1 11 in Ref 8 1 4 l relay Outline and I relay Map Note that the I relay numbers used for PV events are shared by local events Table 3 4 6 Terminal Number DO Number Factory set Assignment Output Type 6 DO1 PV event 1 output local event 1 Relay ew 5 poz BV event 2 output local event 2 Relay as 4 pos Instrument alarm output Relay or cooling side control output Note te 7 Commonterminal forDO1t0D03 BA Dos Timeevent 1 output 00000 Transistor or cooling side control output Note eee ee Do5 Time event 2 output ts Transistor BR DOO i O O S Time event 3 output ts Transistor ie Sl boy Timeevent 4output ts Transistor BB Common terminal for DO4 to DOP TIP In principle you can set a maximum of eight events for any single segment If you want to set at least nine events but no more than 16 for the segment assume the immediately preceding segment time to be zero and set a virtual segment Likewise if you want to set at least 17 events but no more than 24 for the segment assume the immediately preceding two segment times to be zero and set virtual segments Then set neces sary PV events or time events for these virtual segments IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 3 4 References Related to Instrument Alarms and Events gt Ref 3 98 Set time events for the UP550 UP750 on a segment by segment basis A
200. bers and 3 register I relay numbers each being incremented by 5000 that corre spond to the allocated instrument alarms For information on how to register the I relay numbers see Ref 3 2 2 Changing Contact Output Functions for the UP550 and UP750 In addition rewire the controller as required according to the output terminal numbers you specified IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 3 4 References Related to Instrument Alarms and Events gt Ref 3 79 Table 3 4 1 Contact Output Terminals of Single loop Control Type UP550 or UP750 and Their Factory set Assignments Terminal Number DO Number Factory set Assignment Output Type 6 DO1 PV event 1 output local event 1 Relay a 5 DO2 PV event 2 output local event 2 Relay 4 Do Instrument alarm output Relay or cooling side control output Note es 7 Commonterminal forDO1t0D03 ee BA DO 0 Time event 1 output S Transistor or cooling side control output Note BB DOS Time event 2 output ts Transistor Poo a Doe Time event 3 output ts Transistor e a DOZ Time event 4 output ts Transistor BB Common terminal for DO4 to DOZ Note If you select relay output or open collector transistor output as the type of control output for your heating cooling control the cooling side output is assigned to terminal DO3 or DO4 IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 3 4 References Related to Instrument Alarms
201. bility oriented mode of the Super2 function set the SC code to 2 When selecting the responsiveness oriented mode set the code to 3 If you set the SC code to 1 the Super overshoot preventing function works This means you cannot use both the Super and Super2 functions at the same time Note2 The Super2 function is turned off when the controller is shipped from the factory Note3 Loop 2 is supported only by models other than the UP350 UT400 and UT300 IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 2 1 References Related to Control Output gt Ref 2 13 lt lt Ref 2 1 References Related to Control output gt gt Ref 2 1 7 Using Split signal Computation Output Function This function can be used with UP750 UP550 UT750 UT550 UT551 and UT520 There are two modes V mode Output and Parallel mode Output of the split signal computation 1 When V mode Output Example of the V mode output Outline Analog output 3 100 segmental point A3H Analog output 1 Analog output 2 100 segmental point A1H Analog output 1 mA A 20 100 lt O Control output r Control output terminals for terminals cooling side are used are used A l og output 1 gt Retransmission output terminals are used Analog output 3 16 75 12 50 Output value after computation Analog output 3 0 segmental 8
202. bump the MV value does not change suddenly during a change in the SP value The controller uses the integral term only and gradually eliminates the deviation that has occurred ia PV MV For UT3 When SP number is setto 1 2 3 or 4 For UP35 Hold mode or soak mode operation PV derivative type PID control Control output bump is allowed during change in SP value Use this control method when using the controller for the secondary loop of cascade control In this method the control output never reacts over sensitively against a change in the primary loop output Rather it delivers stable control output PV aise MV SP gt For UT3 When SP number is set to 0 When using communication function For UP35 Program mode operation except for hold or soak mode IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 2 1 References Related to Control Output gt Ref 2 8 lt lt Ref 2 1 References Related to Control output gt gt Ref 2 1 3 Using Control Output Limiter This function can be used with UP750 UP550 UT750 UT5 For the function the parameters n OH and n OL are used These parameters limit the control output regardless of the operation mode UT750 UT5 UT400 UP750 and UP550 can set up to eight sets of n OH and n OL n 1 to 8
203. by Analog Input Filter IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 1 1 References Related to PV Input gt Ref 1 17 The following parameters are used e Setup parameters Analog Input Computation Parameters A BS1 A FL1 etc UP750 UT5 ia Description Setting range Default ne peni Code Code A BS1 hG H Analog input 1 100 0 to 100 0 of 0 0 of 1001 BS1 bias input range span input range span A FL1 Fi i Analog input 1 OFF or 1 to 120 sec OFF 1002 FLA filter no filter A BS2 no function Analog input 2 100 0 to 100 0 of 0 0 of 1005 Note1 bias input range span input range span A FL2 no function Analog input 2 OFF or 1 to 120 sec OFF 1006 Note1 filter no filter A BS3 hG j Analog input 3 100 0 to 100 0 of 0 0 of 1009 Note2 BS3 bias input range span input range span A FL3 Fl J Analog input 3 OFF or 1 to 120 sec OFF 1010 Note2 FL3 filter no filter Note 1 These parameters are used for 2 loop type of UP750 or UT750 Not displayed for UP550 UT550 UT551 and UT520 Note 2 These parameters can be used when the controller has Remote input function E Setting the Required Parameters To set the parameters carry out the following steps Here we explain how to display the parameter setting display and to change the parameter values Before carrying out these operations be sure to refer to the User s Manuals Initial Setting
204. c gt lt Ref 3 3 References Related to Alarms gt Ref 3 69 E Setting the Required Parameters To use the alarm timer 2 parameters must be set at the same time These parameters are setup parameter AL1 and operating parameter n A1 Carry out the parameter setting operation shown below Here we explain how to display the parameter setting display and to change the parameter values Before carrying out these operations be sure to refer to the User s Manuals Initial Settings and Parameter Map of the controller The parameter map is very helpful in finding the path to the setting display for a particular parameter 1 Referring to the User s Manual above UT550 Setup parameter Map display the setup parameter main menu LOOP 1 Baek Then display the submenu ALM we ae 2 Press the key one time to display the i PNA parameter AL1 i N toore k CMLP k CONF k UTMD Ji Set the parameter value to 21 22 23 or 24 a ee a using the 4 keys then press the key to register it For example register 21 when you want a to select the alarm type of Upwarddetec Gem tion Time unit hours and minutes
205. ch nummer plus 5000 5167 1131 Switching Note3 that correspond to the DI DI7 witching Note3 numbers of the contact input _ D 7 R L2 Loop 2 Remote Local terminals you want to use 0 1132 Switching Note3 Note1 not specified S R Run Stop Switching The relationship between 5166 1133 Note4 the DI numbers and the DI6 when the single loop is used Relay numbers is as 5167 follows DI7 when the secondary loop is used CAS Switch to Cascade mode Dit 5161 0 1134 Note5 DI2 5162 not specified when in cascade control DI3 5163 DI4 5164 AUTO Switch to Auto mode DI5 5165 0 1135 Note5 DI6 5166 not specified when in cascade control DI7 5167 MAN Switch to Manual mode 0 1136 Noted not specified when in cascade control SP 0 Bit O of SP number 5161 1137 setting Note6 DI1 SP 1 Bit 1 of SP number The setting range equals the 5162 1138 setting Note6 range of I Relay numbers DI2 P each number plus 5000 SP 2 ae ce that correspond to the DI ae 1139 g numbers of the contact input SP 3 Bit 3 of SP number terminals you want to use 5164 1140 setting Note6 Note1 D14 DP1 Operating display The relationship between 0 pr 1141 interruption 1 Note7 the DI numbers and the not specified DP2 Operating display Relay numbers is as 0 1142 interruption 2 Note7 follows not specified MG1 Message display DI 5161 0 1143 interruption 1 Note8 DI2 5162 not specified MG2 Message display ae i r 0 1144 i
206. changed from the start setpoint SSPn n 1 or 2 to the target setpoint TSPn n 1 or 2 This change is made totally independent of PV using the TSPn SSPn TIME ramp Note Note When SEG T is set to 1 segment ramp time is selected the ramp rate obey the TM RT setting value See Ref 5 1 1 PV A i SEG1 i SEG2 a pe ee Loop 2 program pattern SPQ Loop 1 program pattern SSP1 ee gt Time TIME lt Segment time TSPn Target setpoints The unit of time is determined by TMU setup parameter SSPn Start setpoint Fig 5 2 1 Start operation at start target setpoint The parameter used to set the starting target setpoint is as follows Change parameters as explained in the User s Manuals programming and Parameter Maps Program Parameter Parameters for setting the Conditions of Program Operation Startup SSP1 SSP2 UP750 UP35 a Description Setting range Default Code Code SSP1 55P Starting target 0 0 to 100 0 of 0 0 of PV SSP2 Note1 25 GP Note2 setpoint PV input range input range 1 SSP or 2 SSP Note1 Only for UP750 Dual loop control or Temperature and humidity control Note2 The 2 SSP parameter is used for the 2 nd program pattern IM 05J01B02 01E B register No UP750 UP550 only 11 12 Note1 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 5 2 References Related to Program Setup gt Ref 5 13 E Ramp
207. contact input status same as D0034 193 to 208 Input error 209 to 224 PV1 error 225 to 240 PV2 error 241 to 256 Calibration parameter error 257 to 272 Loop1 mode 273 to 288 ae Loop2 mode 289 to 304 Alarm status 305 to 352 Use not permitted 353 to 368 External contact input status 369 to 384 Expanded external contact input status 385 to 400 Input error 401 to 416 PV1 error 417 to 432 PV2 error 433 to 448 Calibration parameter error 449 to 464 Loop1 mode 465 to 480 ale Loop2 mode 481 to 496 Alarm status 497 to 544 Use not permitted 545 to 560 External contact input status 561 to 576 Expanded external contact input status 577 to 592 Actual cascade SP No same as D0010 Note1 593 to 608 Current Loop1 PID number same as D0009 Note1 609 to 624 Current Loop2 PID number same as D0025 Note1 625 to 656 Use not permitted 657 to 672 i Timer setting 1 sec 5 sec 10 sec 1 min Note2 673 to 688 PV2 LP2 deviation lamp status Note3 689 to 704 Alarm output status same as D0036 705 to 720 Use not permitted 721 to 2048 User area Note4 User write read area Note1 Four bit information using hexadecimals 0000 for 0 0010 for 2 0011 for 3 to 0111 for 7 and 1000 for 8 The least significant bit of four bits corresponds to the last digit in the relay number Note2 The timer settings 1 5 10 or 60 sec are only applicable to I relay Note3 The status of the lamps on the front pane
208. controllers can retransmit program pattern 2 at the same time when they are running their own program patterns TIP The PT2 G parameter designed for this function is called the Program Pattern 2 Retransmission param eter because it retransmits a program pattern used for loop 2 To retransmit program pattern 2 the RET1 and RET2 setup parameters discussed in the previous section and the PT2 G parameter related to target setpoints are used The terminals used for retransmission differ depend ing on which of the RET1 or RET2 parameters you select therefore you should also be careful with terminal wiring Furthermore exercise care not to use these terminals for control output 1 Set the PT2 G parameter to ON 2 Set either the RET1 or RET2 parameter to 6 As discussed earlier the setting value 6 is used to select the target setpoint 2 SP2 retransmission output This completes parameter setting Program pattern retransmission will begin at the same time when the controller goes into program operation The following parameters are used Change parameters as explained in the User s Manuals Initial Settings and Parameter Map e Setup parameters Target Setpoint related Parameters PT2 G UP750 bia Description Setting range Default Te egister Code l PT2 G Program pattern 2 OFF or ON OFF 906 retransmission IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edit
209. cription Setting range Default da Code Code n Pc ae Pre Coolong side 0 0 to 999 9 Note4 5 0 Refer to the n Pc proportional band Note7 Table 4 1 1 n Ic nic Cooling side Integral time OFF or 1 to 6000 sec 240 seconds Refer to the nle Note7 Table 4 1 1 n De n or Cooling side Derivative time OFF or 1 to 6000 sec 60 seconds Refer to the n Dc Note7 Table 4 1 1 n Hec n He Cooling side ON OFF 0 0 to 100 0 of 0 5 of PV Refer to the n Hc control hysteresis Note7 PV input range span input range span Table 4 1 1 n DB n db Dead band Note8 e In heating cooling control 3 0 Refer to the n DB 100 0 to 50 0 Table 4 1 1 e In position proportional control 1 0 to 10 0 n PO g Po Preset output Heating side 5 0 to 105 0 of control 0 0 Refer to the n PO preset out output MV Table 4 1 1 in heating cooling control Note9 n Oc n oc Cooling side preset out 5 0 to 105 0 of control 0 0 Refer to the n Oc in heating cooling control Note7 output MV Table 4 1 1 Note1 The prefix nin the table above represents the number of each of the parameters such as target setpoints and their associate PID constants listed in the table Since a maximum of eight target setpoints are available with each of the UT750 UT550 UT551 and UT520 n 1 to 8 holds true Note2 The UT550 01 UT550 03 UT551 OC and UT551 LD are designed so that setting the AMD setup parameter which is used to set a loop 1 alarm mode to either 3
210. ct output terminal assignments check that the new assignment agrees with the current wiring If necessary rewire the terminals This section contains reference information on the following aspects of contact output functions Refer to this information and only change parameter settings if necessary 1 Changing Contact Output Functions for the UT750 UT550 UT551 and UT520 2 Changing Contact Output Functions in the UP750 and UP550 3 Using the I O Expansion Module with UT750 and UP750 IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 3 2 References Related to Contact Output gt Ref 3 41 lt lt Ref 3 2 References Related to Contact Output gt gt Ref 3 2 1 Changing Contact Output Functions for the UT750 UT550 UT551 and UT520 Each of UT750 UT550 and UT551 comes with nine contact output terminals and the UT520 comes with four These include the common terminal The terminals of the UT750 UT550 and UT551 are numbered 4 5 6 7 common 31 32 33 34 and 35 common the terminals of the UT520 are numbered 4 5 6 and 7 common Note For the UT550 UT551 and UT520 the number of contact output terminals varies depending on the model suffix codes Check whether or not the related output terminals are present by referring to the table on the right The UT750 provides all terminals described above Mo
211. current segment is the same as that of the last segment soak operations are performed for the current segment The time duration of the soak segment is set with the ramp time parameter TM RM PV A n 1 to 99 Segment n operation Target setpoint of last segment Start target setpoint if program just started _ Target setpoint TSP1 or TSP2 TM RT gt Time Fig 5 1 4 Segment time during soak operations IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 5 1 References Related to Segment Operation gt Ref 5 7 lt lt Ref 5 1 Reference Related to Segment Operation gt gt Ref 5 1 2 Selecting PID control between Zone and Segment With the UP750 and UP550 program controllers PID control can be selected from the two criteria below Selection is made with the ZON program parameter With the UP350 only zone PID control is available e Zone PID Factory set default e Segment PID The following parameters are used Change parameters as explained in the User s Manuals Initial Settings and Parameter Maps e Setup Parameter Control Action related parameter ZON UP750 meee Description Setting range Default D register No Code ZON Zone PID selection 0 Segment PID 1 929 1 Zone PID Note With UP750 this parameter is used with the 1st and 2nd loop in common E Setting the Required Parameters Carry out the operation shown below UP750 UP550 parameter setting way is
212. d MG2 Message display 0 1167 Interruption 2 not specified MG3 Message display 0 1168 Interruption 3 not specified MG4 Message display 0 1169 Interruption 4 not specified Note1 The I Relay numbers used here are 161 to 168 DI numbers for contact input terminals are specified by these I Relay numbers each of which is incremented by 5000 For more information on I Relay numbers see Ref 8 1 4 The relationship between the factory set DI numbers and input terminal assignments may differ depending on the UP mode of your controller Always refer to the terminal wiring diagrams in the Installation user s manual to verify the factory set terminal assignments of each UP mode Note2 Each mode is executed when the state of the contact input changes from OFF to ON Note3 Refer to the table 3 1 13 IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 3 1 References Related to Contact Input gt Ref 3 34 7 2 Using contact I O expansion module with the UP750 The UP750 comes with eight contact input terminals including one common terminal terminals 18 19 20 common terminal 36 37 38 39 and 40 If these do not suffice your needs using I O expansion modules increase the number of available contact inputs to a maximum of 23 Note1 Up to two expansion modules can be installed at a time Each has eight contact inputs and eight contact outputs Therefore connecting tw
213. d UT400 controllers that have auxiliary analog input capabilities This function equalizes the local setpoint to the remote setpoint when switching from remote to local control This prevents any sudden change in setpoint when control is switched from remote to local Setpoint tracking functions as follows Setpoint tracking ON Setpoint tracking OFF Regardless of any preset local setpoints the remote When control is switched from remote to local the setpoint is used as the local setpoint when control is preset local setpoint is used in operation switched from remote to local To use the preset local setpoint punch in the setpoint from the keys A A Preset local Preset local setpoint gt setpoint gt Remote i Remote i PN setpoint PV setpoint i S i a Time a Time Control switched from Control switched from remote to local here remote to local here Fig 1 2 7 Setpoint tracking The following parameters are used Change parameters as explained in the User s Manuals Initial Settings and Parameter Map e Setup parameters Target Setpoint related Parameters SPT UT750 UT5 SAO Description Setting range Default v Code Code SPT GPL SP tracking selection OFF ON ON loop 1 902 SPT Note loop 2 942 Note This parameter can be displayed with UT750 UT5 and UT400 controllers that have auxiliary analog input capabilities IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition
214. d changes from OFF to ON The four maximum messages correspond to the setup parameters MG1 to MG4 For example if the message text registered with the MG1 is POWER DOWN and for some reason the status of the assigned contact changes from OFF to ON the message POWER DOWN appears on the display This contact is selected by registering the I Relay number with an increment of 5000 that corresponds to the DI number of the contact terminal as the MG1 setting as explained earlier see Table 3 1 12 For example if you use terminals 19 and 2d as shown in the Fig 3 1 12 register 5161 the I Relay number of DI1 plus 5000 as the MG1 setting Pressing the DISP key on the UP750 s front panel clears the message from display Showing an operating parameter setting display by holding down the key for more than 3 seconds on the display also clears the message e Message 1 created with the LL100 tool UP750 or by other alternative mean is registered with parameter MG1 using A LCD display the D registers numbered D0801 to D0810 The same applies to message Massage 1 2 and later Massage 2 Specify the contact input terminal where a change in status from OFF to a Massage 3 ON is made to show message 1 as Massage 4 the M
215. d hold down the JJ key for 3 seconds or C operano aspay longer to call up oP PA abm 4 amp 2 Press the 4 key one time to call up oPPA_ SeuP STUP Pug eo parameters 3 Press the key 5 times Note to display ale a i the parameter PVT And adjust the Zeya Ala bee parameter value OFF or ON using the SET J keys then press the key to pas register it When ON is set PV tracking SPE operate pvr ae Note The times of key operation may change by the condition I of controller s setting dub IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 1 1 References Related to PV Input gt Ref 1 21 lt lt Ref 1 1 Ref 1 1 8 References Related to PV Input gt gt PV input range adjustment When the UT UP mode No is 6 7 or 12 only Parameters RH1 to RL3 are used to set the range used for control within the instrument range Parameters P RH1 to PRL2 PV range are used to set the PV ranges used for the controller s internal computa tion when the controller performs loop control with PV switching or loop control with PV auto selector which receives two inputs of different measurement ranges see Fig 1 1 8 The parameters are also used to set the PV range for relative humidity d
216. d operating display specific to an event that occurs during operation A CAUTION The optional LL 200 custom computation building tool is required to use this function Refer to the User s manual of LL200 for more details The expected operating display appears when the status of the contact input terminal where the operating display is registered changes from OFF to ON The operating display correspond to the setup parameters DP1 or DP2 This contact is selected by registering the l Relay number with an increment of 5000 that corresponds to the DI number of the contact terminal as the DP1 or DP2 setting as explained earlier see Table 3 1 7 Pressing the DISP key on the UT750 s front panel displays the next operating display The following parameters are used Change parameters as explained in the User s Manuals Initial Settings and Parameter Map e Setup parameters Contact Input Registration Parameters DP1 DP2 UT750 Default i Description Setting range I Relay number plus 5000 ad Code Note1 i DP1 Operating display The settin 0 1141 g range equals the es interruption 1 Note1 range of I Relay numbers not specified each number plus 5000 that DP2 Operating display correspond to the DI numbers 1142 interruption 2 Note1 of the contact input terminals not specified you want to use Note1 Note1 The I Relay numbers used here are 161 to 1
217. d terminal Terminal number Parameter Output Function 6 DO1 Relay Outputs PV event 1 5 DO2 Relay Outputs PV event 2 4 DO3 Relay Outputs alarm output 1 or cooling output in heating and cooling control Note1 34 DO4 Transistor Outputs time event 1 or cooling output in heating and cooling control Note1 33 DO5 Transistor Transistor Outputs time event 2 32 DO6 Transistor Transistor Outputs time event 3 31 DO7 Transistor Transistor Outputs time event 4 For example to assign pattern end signal output to parameter DO7 sets terminal No 31 complete the follow ing steps 1 Get the DO7 parameter setting display from the DO submenu on the CONF main menu See the User s Manuals Initial Settings and Parameters 2 From the I Relay Table Table 5 2 1 check the I relay number assigned to the pattern end signal PTEND is 157 3 Change the DO7 parameter setting to 5157 and press the key Add 5000 to 157 I relay No and IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 5 2 References Related to Program Setup gt Ref 5 40 register it as 6157 As such the pattern end signal is assigned to terminal 31 and a transistor output can be sent when needed Table 5 2 1 lI Relay Table STATUS ON No 1 to No 65 to No 129 to No 193 to No 257 to No 321 to 1 AD1ERR 65 A M1 129 TME1 193 AD1ERR
218. ded Ethernet indicates that the code is for the PID group 1 IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 8 1 Outline of Registers and l relays gt Ref 8 15 Table 8 1 4 4 4 UT750 UT55L UT520 D register Map 4 4 1301 AIN1 1351 SP b0 1401 MO1L 1451 MO26L 1501 IRDO251 1601 MO1L 1651 MO 26L 1352 SPb1 1402 MO 1H 1452 MO 26H 1502 RDO252 1602 MO1H 1652 MO 26H 1353 SP b2 1403 MO2L 1453 MO27L 1503 IRDO253 1603 MO2L 1653 MO27L 1354 SPb3 1404 MO2H 1454 MO 27H 1504 IRDO254 1604 MO2H 1654 MO 27H 1355 DP1 1405 MO3L 1455 MO28L 1505 IRDO255 1605 MO3L 1655 MO 28L 1356 DP2 1406 MO3H 1456 MO 28H 1506 IRDO256 1606 MO3H 1656 MO 28H 1357 MG1 1407 MO4L 1457 MO 29L 1507 HOUT 1 MO4L 1657 MO29L 1358 MG 2 1408 MO4H 1458 MO 29H 1508 HOUT 2 1558 RDO258 1608 MO4H 1658 MO 29H 1359 MG3 1409 MOS5L 1459 MO30L 1509 COUT 1 1559 MOS5L 1659 MO30L 1360 MG 4 1410 MO5H 1460 MO30H 1510 COUT 2 1560 MO5H 1660 MO30H 1361 1411 MOGL 1461 MO31L 1511 RET1 MO6L 1661 MO31L 1362 1412 MOG6H 1462 MO31H 1512 RET2 1562 MO6H 1662 MO31H 1363 1413 MO7L 1463 MO32L 1513 1563 MO7L 1663 MO32L 1364 1414 MO7H 1464 MO32H 1514 1564 MO7H 1664 MO32H 1365 1415 MO8L 1465 MO33L 1515 1565 MO8L 1665 MO33L 1366 1416 MO8H 1466 MO33H 1516 1566 MO8H 1666 MO33H 1367 1417 MO9L 1467 MO34L 1517 1567 MO9L 1667 MO34L 1368 1418 MO9H 1468 MO34H 1518 1568 MO9H 1668 MO34H 13
219. del and suffix Contact output terminals codes DO1 DO2 DO3 DO4 DOS DO6 DO7 UT550 00 UT551 OA o lojo x x x x UT550 01 UT551 O0D O JO o o o o o UT550 02 UT551 O0B O O oO x x x x UT550 03 UT551 O0C OI OOl GO OJ O UT550 04 O Oo O x x x x UT520 00 O O Oo x x x UT520 07 O a O x x x x UT520 08 O O O x x x x Note O Present x Not present External contact output Alarm 4 output DO4 34 T GD Alarm 1 output DO1 k o 2 Alarm 3 output DO5 33 Alarm 2 output DO2 5 H O Alarm 4 output DO6 32 Aejoy JO SISUBIL Alarm 3 output DO3 4 No functions DO7 31 Common COM 7 Common COM 35 UT520 does not provide these terminals CRISIS OKI Q QV O ELO O The relationship between the DO numbers and output terminals of the UT750 in single loop control is given in Table 3 2 1 This relationship is also given for the UT550 UT551 and UT520 in Tables 3 2 2 and 3 2 3 respec tively When the controller is shipped from the factory its contact output functions are pre assigned to the DO terminals as shown in Table 3 2 1 for the UT750 Table 3 2 2 for the UT550 UT551 or Table 3 2 3 for the UT520 Settings of each controller model for control modes other than single loop control are given on the following pages Make sure the set
220. des are referred to as the standard PID control mode and fixed point control mode For each of these PID control modes select either the PV derivative type PID control method or deviation deriva tive type PID control method to carry out control according to the operating condition mode You can also select from the Yes No options for a control output bump at the moment of change in the SP value See Table 2 1 2 or 2 1 3 depending on your controller model Note that there is a slight difference in this information between the UP750 UP550 UT750 UT500O and UT400 group of controllers and the UP350 and UT3L00 group controllers This section discusses the former group first and then the latter group See either reference topic according to your controller model 1 Control Mode Selection when the Model Is UP750 UP550 UT750 UT500 or UT4L00 To select the PID control mode use one of the setup parameters explained below To set change the parameter see the Initial Settings or Parameters user s manual of the model in question E Setup Parameters for UP750 UP550 and UT750 e Setup parameters Control Action related Parameters MOD1 MOD2 and MOD UP750 UT750 UP550 Description Setting Range Default D register No Code Code MOD1 MOD Loop 1 PID 0 Standard PID control mode 0 927 Note1 control mode 1 Fixed point control mode MOD2 MOD Loop 2 PID 0 Standard PID control mode 0 96
221. e adjust the parameter value to 41 and register it by pressing the 3 key Press the key once to display the parameter UN3 Set the Remote Input Unit if necessary After the above operation repeat the following operation for the parameters RH3 RL3 DP3 SH3 and SL3 if necessary e Display the parameter setting display which you want to set the value ie RH3 e Adjust the parameter value using the 4 keys then press the key to register it UT550 UT520 Parameter map This completes the setting operation If other settings are unnecessary return to the operating display IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt lt Ref 1 2 Reference Related to Remote Input gt gt Ref 1 2 2 Using square root extraction during remote input lt Ref 1 2 References Related to Remote Input gt Ref 1 27 Square root extraction is available with UT750 and UTSI controllers that have auxiliary analog input capabili ties It cannot be used with the UT400 Squar
222. e with the UP750 in single loop control if time event 1 is assigned to I O expansion OUTPUT 1 relay output specification time event 1 can be a relay output For the standard model time event 1 is transistor open collector output If the UP750 is used in a control mode other than single loop control follow the appropriate terminal assignments In this case register the I relay number 5000 in time event 1 to contact output parameter R151 The I relay number for time event 1 is 129 as indicated on the I relay map As such register setpoint 5129 to parameter R151 STATUS ON No 17 No 65 No 129 No 193 No 257 7 No 3217 1 ADIERR 65 A M1 129 TME1 193 AD1ERR 257 A M1 321 TME1 2 AD2ERR 66 130 A TME2 194 AD2ERR 258 322 TME2 3 AD3ERR 67 131 TME3 195 AD8ERR 259 323 TME3 4 68 132 196 260 324 5 AD1BO 197 AD1BO 261 325 TME4 6 198 AD2BO 262 326 TMES5 l relay number for AD3BO time event 1 output Table 3 2 7 Extended contact Contact output D register number for output terminal parameter parameters to the left OUTPUT1 R151 1113 OUTPUT2 R152 1114 OUTPUT3 R153 1115 Contact I O OUTPUT4 R154 1116 Sue OUTPUTS R155 1117 OUTPUT6 R156 1118 OUTPUT7 R157 1119 OUTPUT8 R158 1120 OUTPUT1 R251 1121 OUTPUT2 R252 1122 OUTPUT3 R253 1123 Contact I O OUTPUT4 R254 1124 Sane OUTPUTS R255 1125 OUTPUT6 R256
223. e TIP below A CAUTION e The UP750 UP550 and UP350 can change the target segment setpoint to more advanced settings than the currently operating segment and changes are applied to operation With the UP750 UP550 and UP35C it is possible to change the target setpoint parameter of a running program from the program parameter display during a ramp segment Changes will not be applied to operation The program will continue towards the previously set target setpoint With the UP750 and UP550 if the program is first put on hold and then the target setpoint parameter of that program is changed from the program parameter display the program will resume towards the new target setpoint the moment that the hold state is released It is also possible during the hold state to change the target setpoint of segments yet to be run and have those changes applied to operation However set the segment setting to time set segment time and the HOLDSP and HOLDTIME param eters must not be changed while the program is on hold IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 5 2 References Related to Program Setup gt Ref 5 31 E To change the target segment setpoint A CAUTION Changes can be made to parameter settings for soak segments only constant setpoint that are on hold However when the UP750 is in the dual loop control mode or in the temperature and humidity control mode or when the setup
224. e changing way with UP750 UP550 UT750 UT550 UT551 and UT520 below and UT320 are shown in the next page The way with UP35 1 When the Model Is UP750 UP550 UT750 or UT5 UT450 UT420 UT35 The type of retransmission output signal is changed using the following setup parameter Change the parameter settings as explained in the Initial Settings or Parameters user s manual that comes with your controller e Setup parameters Retransmission Output Parameters RET1 RET2 Note1 UP750 UT5 UP550 a D register UT750 Description Setting range Default No Code Code RET1 rk i Retransmission output 1 OFF or 1 to 7 Note2 1 1013 RT1 type selection RET2 rte Retransmission output 2 OFF or 1 to 7 Note2 OFF 1016 RT2 type selection Note1 The parameter RT1 and RT2 are parameters with UT550 UT551 and UT520 Note2 See the below Table 2 2 1 for the meaning of the setting values Table 2 2 1 Parameter Settings and Types of Retransmission Output Parameter Setting Type of Retransmission Output OFF Turns the function off no retransmission output is used 1 PV1 Measured value 1 TIP1 2 SP1 Setpoint 1 TIP1 OUT1 Control output 1 TIP1 However the following conditions apply if the parameter is set to 3 e In position proportional control a valve opening 0 to 100 is output e In heating coolin
225. e factory before shipment In single loop controllers the same contact outputs are set at the factory before shipment For the items set for other than single loop controllers refer to pages Ref 3 49 through Ref 3 54 to meet your selected model later in this manual Table 3 2 4 Contact Output Terminals of the UP750 and UP550 for Single loop Control and Their Factory set Functions Terminal No DO No Factory set Function Output Type 6 DO1 PV event 1 output Relay BOR PV event 2 output Relay A 0B Instrument alarm output Relay or cooling side control output Note1 oa A Common terminal for DO1 to DO3 BA DA Time event 1 output Transistor or cooling side control output Note1 es DO Time event 2 output ts Transistor Co a2 o Doe Time event 3 output tS Transistor Oa BOF Time event 4 output Transistor 835 Common terminal for DO4 to DO7 Note1 oy ern control using relay or transistor output in control output is selected cooling side output is assigned to DO3 or above The UP750 and UP550 enable you to change the contact output functions These functions can be set with setup parameters DO1 through DO7 For the procedure of function assignments follow the steps below 1 Decide which signal to output from which contact output terminals see the table above 2 Identify the DO number corresponding to the selected terminal number For example if you use terminal number 6 the corresponding DO number is 1
226. e is indicated by the 1108 relay D register or l relay number for a DO4 DO4 output flag registration contact output flag 5000 1109 renee Gee lea These numbers depend on the control mode set at the factory So details on DOS DO5 output flag registration this are described on a mode basis later 1110 transistor open collector in this manual DO6 DO6 output flag registration 1111 transistor open collector DO7 DO7 output flag registration 1112 transistor open collector The contact outputs assigned for individual UP modes in the UP750 and UP550 are as follows 1 Single loop control UP mode 1 Contact output Output Type Function DO1 Relay PV event 1 output DO2 Relay PV event 2 output DO3 Relay Instrument alarm 1 output or cooling side output in heating cooling control Note1 DO4 Transistor Time event 1 output or cooling side output in heating cooling control Note1 DO5 Transistor Time event 2 output DO6 Transistor Time event 3 output DO7 Transistor Time event 4 output Note1 When heating cooing control using relay or transistor output in control output is selected cooling side output is assigned to DO3 or TIP DO4 for the UP750 If the output type other than a relay see the table above is selected for control output time event 5 output will be assigned to the relay terminal for output 1 for the UP550 and time event 6 output is assigned to the relay terminal for output 2
227. e root extraction can be used with remote input as shown in the flowchart below It is also possible to set the square root low signal cut off Remote input Auxiliary analog 3 rsees Bep Square root extraction Remote setpoint filtering Ratio bias computation Setpoints 1 8 Remote input selection gt Ol Local O Remote Sea selection Target setpoint Pv for ramp setting Target setpoint Controller CPU Fig 1 2 4 Processing for remote setpoint input The following parameters are used Change parameters as explained in the User s Manuals Initial Settings and Parameter Map e Setup parameters Analog Input Computation Parameters A SR3 A LC3 UT750 UT5 Description Setting range Default egister Code Code A SR3 or J Analog input 3 OFF ON OFF 1011 SR3 square root computation A LC3 L iq Analog input 3 0 0 to 5 0 1 0 1012 LC3 low signal cut off of PV input range Out put A Low signal cut off point gt Input 0 0 to 5 0 Fig 1 2 5 Square root Extraction IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 1 2 References Related to Remote Input gt Ref 1 28 lt lt Ref 1 2 Reference Related to Remote Input gt gt Ref 1 2 3 Using remote setpoint filtering and ratio bias computing The function described below is available with UT750 UT500 and UT4 0 co
228. e terminal numbers allocated to instrument alarms or event outputs If you have made any change to the instrument alarm or event settings you must also change the DO output terminal assignments and the wiring Note Note For example a single loop control type UP750 controller comes with the factory set DO contact output assignments shown in Table 3 4 6 The terminal numbers for time events 1 to 4 is 34 33 32 and 31 and its DO numbers are DO4 or DO7 In other words four contact outputs are allocated to time events when the controller is shipped from the factory On the other hand you can set a maximum of eight time events for a single segment Denotes the total number including PV events See TIP below Therefore in order to set five or more time events and output them through contact terminals 1 specify their DO output terminal numbers 2 select the numbers of desired time events from EV1 to EV8 and allocate them to the terminal numbers and 3 register l relay numbers each being incremented by 5000 that correspond to the allocated time events For information on how to register the I relay numbers see Ref 3 2 2 Changing Contact Output Functions for the UP750 and UP550 In addition rewire the controller as required according to the output terminal numbers you specified The l relay numbers used for the statuses of time events are defined as 129 to 154 For more information on the I relay num
229. ecessary Table 3 4 5 n Alarm Type A Alarm Type Alarm Action yP Alarm Action Codes Alarm Type Open and Closed refer to the Alarm Type Open and Closed refer to the state of a relay contact and On Sedan conten state of a relay contact and On Sedin oened in and Off the state of a lamp case of alarm case of alarm and Off the state of a lamp case of alarm case of alarm Noaam CT Hysteresis ceed De energization lt _ steresis i y in case of Open On Closed ae deviation y PV upper limit Ofi Open Closed On lower limit Deviation setpoint po eae alarm PV value Alarm setpoint Target setpoint Hysteresis Hysteresis Hysteresis Closed On gt Open gt Closed On T Deviation f Off i PV lower limit Closed On j Open Off upper lower a limits Deviation setpoint PV value Alarm setpoint PV value lt Target setpoint Hysteresis Hysteresis Closed Hysteresis Within coe On A Deviation Open Off Closed On deviation Open Off Open Off upper limit upper lower A PV value gt Deviation setpoint limits Deviation setpoint PV value Target setpoint Target setpoint Hysteresis lt gt De energization lial inti Closed nn Deviation On Open Off in case of PV lower limit Deviation sanie upper limit Closed Off Open On eviation setpoin ners e y pont am PV value alarm Alarm
230. ed PID number Method Is Selected For UT551 only In the PID number selection method the operators of the controller can switch between the eight PID setpoints as necessary In this method target setpoint is not in conjunction with PID setpoint and an arbitrary PID setpoint can be selected On the other hand in the Target setpoint SP number selection method target setpoint is in conjunction with PID setpoint Switching is carried out by setting the parameter P NO using key operation or by using external DIS contact inputs For the switching by external contact input see Ref 3 1 3 Changing contact input functions for the UT550 UT551 UT551 When the PID number is selected by external contact input the PID number cannot be selected by key operation or communication In the case of key operation and communication the last selection is effective Change parameter as explained in the User s Manuals Initial Settings and Parameters e Setup parameters UT551 Description Setting range Default D register No Code Pra PID No selection 1to8 1 225 P NO Note 1 Note 2 Note1 Displayed when the setup parameter ZON 3 Note2 The setting range depends on the setup parameter GRP IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 4 1 References Related to Target Setpoints gt Ref 4 17 lt lt Ref 4 1 References Related to Target Setpoints gt gt Ref 4 1 3 Limiting Changes in Target Setpoi
231. ed while in the hold status If the segment time is decreased the time event and segment time are automatically adjusted following the time over which the program segment is held and a decrement of the segment ramp time A SEG1 i SEG2 SEG3 SEG4 SEG5 LLL Segment pattern before the segment time is decreased f Segment pattern Decreased after the segment time segment time has been decreased a mc ms ay a a Time event Off Hsleinesival l Hold interval _ timer stops SS Time event decreased by a decrement of segment time Fig 5 2 21 Segment time decreased in hold state TIP When running 2 patterns simultaneously with the UP750 as long as both the held segments in the primary loop pattern and the secondary loop pattern are soak segments the segment time can be changed IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 5 2 References Related to Program Setup gt Ref 5 34 lt lt Ref 5 2 References Related to Program Setup gt gt Ref 5 2 6 Using the Repeat Functions Repeat functions enable you to repeat successive segments in a program pattern a multiple number of times There are some differences in using these functions between the UP750 UP550 and UP350 This section first provides those functions for the UP750 and UP550 For those that apply to the UP350 see Page Ref 5 36 later in this manual Refer to either of
232. ee eee eee eee Assigns the function of switching between remote and local modes 30 Common terminal Note1 The ON and OFF status of the DI3 D14 DI5 and DI6 contact inputs can be programmed as shown in the Table 3 1 2 to define eight 8 choices of target setpoints Table 3 1 2 DI3 DI4 DI5 DI6 1 SP ON OFF OFF OFF 2 SP OFF ON OFF OFF 3 SP ON ON OFF OFF 4 SP OFF OFF ON OFF 5 SP ON OFF ON OFF 6 SP OFF ON ON OFF 7 SP ON ON ON OFF 8 SP OFF OFF OFF ON Table 3 1 3 When the UT420 Terminal No DI No The factory set function 19 DI1 Assigns the function of switching between auto and manual modes 18 I Assigns the function of switching between STOP and RUN statuses BB Common terminal for DI1 and DI2 29 D No function BRL Assigns the function of switching between remote and local modes e O Common terminal for DI3 and R L IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 3 1 References Related to Contact Input gt Ref 3 7 The UT450 and UT420 are designed so that the functions assigned to their contact input terminals can be change using the DIS setup parameter If necessary reassign functions by referring to the DIS setup parameter table on page Ref 3 8 A CAUTION If you change any of the contact input terminal assignments check that the new assignment agree with the current wiring If necessary rewire the terminals U
233. eeeseees Ref 8 23 UP750 UP550 B register Map ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeaaeeeeseaeeeeeeaas Ref 8 24 Ref 8 1 4 I relay Outline and I relay Map ccsscsecceseceesseeeseeeenneenseeeeeeeesenees Ref 8 26 UP750 UP550 I relay Map cccecceecceeeceeeeeeeeseeeceeeeaeseaeeeaeseeeeeeeeeeetaees Ref 8 28 Ref 8 1 5 I relay Timer setting ccecseccceeeeeeeeeneeeeeeseeeeesneeseeeseeseeesneeseeseenseesenes Ref 8 33 Revision INTOFM ANON iis isstencses seoteewsatectecsecuceete tavesndenebendeebesiuastwdssvencudsessneueieteeavtenees i IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 Ref 1 1 lt Toc gt lt Ref 1 1 References Related to PV Input gt Ref 1 1 References Related to PV Input A IMPORTANT Applicable models of this section UP750 UP550 UP35 UT750 UT5 UT400 UT3 UM3 UP750 UP550 UP350 UT750 UT550 UT450 UT350 None UT520 UT420 UT320 Note The functions discussed in this section apply to all the models of UT and UP series However some of the functions are unavailable with certain models Such models if any will be clearly noted in each of the following items from 1 to 8 These sections provide references related to PV input such as PV correct
234. eferences Related to Displays gt 3 Register the D register numbers for parameter C S1 to C S3 considering the display order of the SELECT displays In this example the numbers are registered as shown below in order to show the SELECT Displays in the order of RET1 RTH1 RTL1 Table 6 1 1 Parameters Setting value C S1 1013 C S2 1014 C S3 1015 C S4 OFF C S5 OFF ki 4 UP350 or UT3 has only four parameters C SI to C S4 This completes the registration The following parameters are used Change parameters as explained in the User s Manuals Initial Settings and Parameter Map e Setup parameters SELECT display Parameters C S1 to C S5 UP750 UP35 UP550 UT500 UT750 UT400 Description UT3 Code Code c s1 5 SELECT display 1 C S1 registration c S2 52 SELECT display 2 C S2 registration c s3 5 SELECT display 3 C S3 registration c s4 GH SELECT display 4 C S4 registration c s5 r55 SELECT display 5 C S5 Notet registration Setting range OFF or within the range of D register numbers Note2 Default i ae OFF 1101 OFF 1102 OFF 1103 OFF 1104 OFF 1105 Note1 UP350 UT400 or UT300 does not have a parameter C S5 Note2 With UT3010 UP35 With UT400 UT5 OFF or 1 to 9999 OFF or 201 to 1039 With UT750 OFF or 2
235. elated to Contact Input gt Ref 3 14 lt lt Ref 3 1 References Related to Contact Input gt gt Ref 3 1 4 Changing contact input functions for the UT750 4 1 Changing contact input terminal assignments of the UT750 With UT750 8 Max contact input terminals can be used Note The terminal numbers are 18 19 20 common terminal 36 37 38 39 and 40 If these do not suffice your needs using I O expansion modules increases the number of available contact inputs to a maximum of 23 See 4 2 Using the I O expansion module for the UT750 lt UT750 Terminal Arrangement gt The functionality of a contact input can be varied by changing the setting of the contact input registration parameter External contact inputs O GD t When switching among target setpoints 1 to 8 UT Contact ae Transistor contact I SPP SPB SPHSPE SPESPISPBS DIt glooo DI Tig 2 G GD DI3 ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ae ple GB 3 3 Di4 OFF ON ON OFFIOFF ON ON OFF pio 1gl lt o 5V 18 DI5 OFFIOFFIOFF ON ON ON ON OFF DI3 pI O DI6 OFF OFFIOFF OFFIOFFIOFFOFF ON p13 140 o 45V 40 If all of the contact inputs are set to OFF 5 25 the controller uses the immediately
236. elays number 769 through 784 in the user area are not shown in the l relay map but write or read operation is possible with the 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 8 1 Outline of Registers and relays gt Ref 8 28 UP750 UP550 I relay Map Table 8 1 11 1 2 UP750 UP550 I relay Map 1 2 STATUS ON STATUS No 1 _ No __05 __ No 129 No _193 __ No 257 _ No 321 198 _AD1ERR_ 257 VLVAT ERR VLV BOUT PV1ADC TM E9 PV1ADC TME9 PV1BO TME10 PV1BO TME10 RJC1ERR TM E11 RJC1IERR TME11 PV1 0Vver TME12 PV1 over TME12 PV1 over TME13 PV1 over TME13 TME14 TME14 CAS LSP TME15 TME15 TME16 TME16 WEND WEND PTEND PTEND PTEND3 PTEND3 AT1ERR PTENDS AT1ERR PTENDS5 PV2ADC Dit PV2ADC Di PV2BO DI2 PV2BO DI2 RJC2ERR DIS RJC2ERR DI3 DI4 DI4 PV2 over DI5 PV2 over DI5 PV2 over DI6 PV2 over DI6 AT2ERR AT2ERR CALB E CALB E UCALB E UCALB E USERE USERE UPMD UPMD RANGE RANGE SETUP SETUP PARA E PARA E MODE E MO DE E FILE E FILE E SYSTEM E SYSTEM E Note The code in the square like a AD2ERR is used only with UP750 The code in the shaded square like a VLVAT ERR is used only with UP550 IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 8 1 Outline of Registers and relays gt Ref 8 29 Table 8 1 11 2 2 UP750 UP550 I relay Map 2 2 OFF STATUS STATUS No 385 No 449 No _513 ne 577 __ No 641 No 705 VLVAT ERR VLV BOUT PV1ADC TME9 PV1
237. en in the local mode the current PV event continues to operate but the time event is off The contents that are set in advance as local events are changed to PV events when in local mode If no PV events are set in the program events set as local events in advance are all off PV A Programmed operation Local mode n 1 to 99 Last segment SEG n Even if a local setpoint is set in advance constant control is engaged using the target Local setpoint setpoint of the last segment in the program as the constant setpoint To return operation to the presetpoint change the target setpoint by key input i i i i i gt Time Time event EVn Fig 5 2 10 Local control as the segment end condition when setpoint tracking is ON IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 5 2 References Related to Program Setup gt Ref 5 21 2 When setpoint tracking is OFF At the end of the last segment in the program the local constant setpoint mode is engaged In this case a local setpoint that is set in advance is used as the target setpoint In the local mode PV events will operate according to the contents of the preset local events The time events remain off PV Programmed operation lai ot gt Local mode n 1 to 99 Last segment SEG n At the end of the last segment in the program constant control is engaged using a local setpoint that is set in advance Local setpo
238. en the SUPER 2 function is used Set the PV sampling period as 500ms when the SUPER 2 function is used in Cascade control dual loop control or Temperature and Humidity control mode The following parameters are used e Setup parameters UP Mode UT Mode Parameters SMEC SMC UP750 UT5 UP550 er n D register UT750 Description Setting range Default No Code Code SMEC Sab Sampling period 0 to 30000 Note 0 Note 32 SMC error counter Note Since parameter SMEC is display only it has no setting range When the controller is powered on for the first time the error counter value is 0 The counter value displayed can increase up to 30000 as errors occur Turning the power off resets the counter value to 0 E Setting the Required Parameters To check that the selected PV sampling period is appropriate Here we explain how to display the parameter setting display and to change the parameter values Before carrying out these operations be sure to refer to the User s Manuals Initial Settings and Parameter Map of the controller The parameter map is very helpful in finding the path to the setting display for a particular parameter Referring to the User s Manual above UT750 1 Note1 SMC is the parameter for UT550 UT551 and UT520 display the setup parameter main menu UTMD Then display the submenu MD Press the key 3 times to display the parameter SMEC and check the cou
239. en the SUPER 2 function is used in Cascade control dual loop control or Temperature and Humidity control mode 4 UT550 UT551 UT520 Digital indicating controller PV sampling period Limitations of controller functions 50 ms the fastest Possible with UT5 single loop model with no optional specification when single loop control UT mode 1 is used and none of the following functions are used lt This is given as a rough guide Note e SUPER function e Heating cooling control e PV input computation e Deviation alarm e Sensor grounding alarm e Self diagnostic alarm FAIL output SP rate of change limiter e Output rate of change limiter 100 ms Possible when cascade control UP mode 4 is not used and any of the fumctions prohibited listed above with a 100ms sampling period are used 200 ms factory set default When cascade control mode is used 500 ms Note Note To check that the selected PV sampling period is appropriate use the setup parameter SMC described later e Set the PV sampling period as 100ms when the SUPER 2 function is used Set the PV sampling period as 200ms when the SUPER 2 function is used in Cascade control The following parameters are used e Setup parameters UP Mode UT Mode parameters SMP UP750 UT5 noe Description Setting range Default ao Code Code SMP Gar PV sampling 50 Note1 100 200 200 1281 UP mode Note 2 SM
240. enees Ref 5 34 Ref 5 2 7 Using the Advance FUNCTIONS cccssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenneeeeeeeeeenneeees Ref 5 37 Ref 5 2 8 Signal Output at Program end s cccseceeeceeseeeeeeeseeseseeeeseeesseeeeeeees Ref 5 39 Ref 5 2 9 Operation in Local Mode with Constant Target Setpoint Ref 5 41 Ref 5 2 10 Starting the Program Operation at Any Segment cseee Ref 5 44 Ref 5 2 11 Operation with Linked Program Patterns Pattern link Ref 5 46 IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 Ref 5 3 Handy Features for Creating and Editing Programs Ref 5 48 Ref 5 3 1 Checking the Total Number of Unused Segments cs1eeeee Ref 5 48 Ref 5 3 2 Checking the number of segments in a specific Program Pattern Ref 5 50 Ref 5 3 3 Checking the number of all unused event cseceeeeereeeeeeeeeees Ref 5 51 Ref 5 3 4 Copying Program Patterns cssccseesseeeeseeeseeeeseeesneeeeeseeenseeeeeeees Ref 5 53 Ref 5 3 5 Deleting Program Patterns cssscsseeeeeeeeseeseeeseseeseseeenseeeeeeeseeees Ref 5 55 Ref 5 3 6 Adding Inserting Deleting segments in Program Patterns Ref 5 57 Ref 6 1 References Related to Displays ecccsseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeneeeeees Ref 6 1 Ref 6 1 1 Using SELECT DisplayS csecccssccesseeeseesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeenseeenseeeneas Ref 6 2 Ref 6 1 2 Cha
241. ent 4 output Transistor eS BB Common terminal for DO4 to DOP IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 3 4 References Related to Instrument Alarms and Events gt Ref 3 102 The UP550 UP750 s local event types are summarized in Table 3 4 8 Use the program parameters E21A to E28A and E21B to E28B shown in Table 3 4 8 to change the type of local event or set its value Each local event type is set to OFF unused when the controller is shipped from the factory Change the factory set values or set new values only if local events are necessary Table 3 4 8 Alarm Action Alarm Type Open and Closed refer to the state of a relay contact and On and Off the state of a lamp No alarm Hysteresis lt _ gt PV value Alarm setpoint Hysteresis gt PV lower limit Closed On ff Open ot a Alarm setpoint PV value Hysteresis Deviation Open Off Closed On upper limit x PV value Deviation setpoint Target setpoint Hysteresis lt gt Deviation on Open Off lower limit i Deviation setpoint BY value Target setpoint wales Hysteresis De energization In gase of Closed Open On deviation Off y upper limit ost Deviation setpoint alarm PV value iy Target setpoint Hysteresis Setpoint upper limit Setpoint Alarm setpoint Hysteresis e Setpoint lower limit A Alarm setpoint Setpoint
242. ent range can be segmented by reference points 1 to 6 into a maximum of seven zones In the case of the UT350 and UT320 this area is segmented by reference points 1 and 2 into three zones You can assign a group of optimum PID constants to each of these zones Accordingly even if a PV travels across any two or more zones the controller automatically selects and uses the PID constants assigned to the zone where the PV is currently positioned If the PV is currently positioned at this point control is based on the PID constants assigned to zone 6 Maximum value of PV range Reference point 6 _No 7PID No 6PID Reference point 5 l No 5PID Reference point 4 No 4PID Reference point 2 No 3PID No 2PID Reference point 1 No 1PID Minimum value of PV range Change in PV Fig 4 1 1 Reference Points Set reference points using the n RP n 1 to 6 operating parameter For the UT350 and UT320 n 1 or 2 The following parameters are used Change parameters as explained in the User s Manuals Initial Settings and Parameter Map e Setup parameters Control Action related Parameters n RP UT750 UT5 T E Description Setting range Default oo Code Code n RP ar o Zone PID 0 0 to 100 0 of PV input range 100 0 of Refer to the Note n RP reference point Note PV input range Table 4 1 4 n 1 t06 n 1 to 6 Note However 1 RP lt 2 RP lt 3 RP l
243. enu LOC through the operating parameter main menu PROG Then display the LSP1 set with the key Press in turn the a key to display parameter set displays LSP2 through E28B as indicated above On each display press the LAJ CZJ keys to display the desired value and then press the key to register that value IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 5 2 References Related to Program Setup gt Ref 5 44 lt lt Ref 5 2 References Related to Program Setup gt gt Ref 5 2 10 Starting the Program Operation at Any Segment This function is for UP750 and UP550 For example this function can be used for restarting the program operation after returning the program in opera tion to the preceding segment The following shows an example of starting operation at SEG 3 Note that the controller should be set to RESET mode when it is in operation gt SEG1 SEG2 SEG3 SEG4 SEGS5 Temperature When STC 2 k i i Current PV iS i i i Segment time for SEG3 Starting program operation at SEG3 The program operation starts according to the Start Code STC as follows when starting the program operation at SEG3 12 When STC 0 SSP start Program operation starts at the point A as starting target setpoint to the point 2 When STC 1 Ramp prioritized PV1 start Program operation starts at the point B to the point 3 When STC 2 Ti
244. er 1 1501 1502 1503 1504 PV 1 PV 2 CSP 1 CSP 2 1505 OUT 1 1506 OUT 2 1507 HOUT 1 1508 HOUT 2 1558 1509 COUT 1 1559 1510 COUT 2 1560 1511 RET1 1512 RET2 1562 1513 1514 1515 1516 1517 1518 1519 1520 1521 1522 1523 1524 1525 1526 1527 1528 1529 1530 1531 OUT1A 1532 OUT2A 1533 OUT3A 1534 OUTIR 1535 OUT2R 1536 DOT 1537 DO2 1538 DOS 1539 DO4 1540 DOS 1541 DOG 1542 _DO7 1543 RDO151 1544 RDO152 1545 RDO153 1546 RDO154 1547 RDO156 1548 RDO156 1549 RDO157 1550 RDO158 1551 RDO251 1601 1552 RDO252 1602 1553 RD0253 1603 1554 RDO254 1604 1555 RD0255 1605 1556 RDO256 1606 1557 RDO257 MO1L MO1H MO2L MO2H MO3L MO3H MO4L 1608 MO4H MO5L MO5H MO6L MO6H MO7L MO7H MO8L MO8H MO9L MO9H 1619 MO10L 1620 MO 10H 1621 MO11L 1622 MO11H 1623 MO12L 1624 MO12H 1625 MO 13L 1626 MO 13H 1627 MO14L 1628 MO 14H 1629 MO15L 1630 MO 15H 1631 MO16L 1632 MO 16H 1633 MO17L 1634 MO17H 1635 MO18L 1636 MO 18H 1637 MO19L 1638 MO 19H 1689 MO20L 1640 MO20H 1641 MO21L 1642 MO21H 1643 MO22L 1644 MO22H 1645 MO23L 1646 MO23H 1647 MO24L 1648 MO24H 1649 MO25L 1650 MO25H IM 05J01B02 01E 1651 MO26L 1652 MO26H 1653 MO27L 1654 MO27H 1655 MO28L 1656 MO28H 1657 MO29L 1658 MO29H 1659 MO30L 1660 MO30H 1661 MO31L 1662 MO31H 1663 MO32L 1664 MO32H 1665 MO33L 1666 MO33H 1667 MO34L 1668
245. er DO2 Relay Alarm 2 output functions assigned to contact output registration DO3 Relay Alarm 3 output parameters DO1 to DO7 are shown below Sie aire IN otel Model Function Registered number DO4 Transistor Alarm 4 output Alarm 1 output 5689 I relay number or cooling side control in Common to UT750 Alarm 2 output 5690 I relay number heating cooling control Note UT550 UT551 and DOS5 Transistor Alarm 3 output UT520 Alarm 3 output 5691 l relay number DO6 Transistor Alarm 4 output Alarm 4 output 5693 I relay number DO Transistor Not assigned Cooling output 1607 D register number Note When heating cooing control using relay or transistor output via DO3 in the control output is selected cooling side output is UT750 only assigned to DO3 or DO4 above Pat aaa 1609 D register number E UT550 UT520 UT551 UT550 UT551 and FAIL output 1609 D register number DO Output Type Function UT520 only DO1 Relay Alarm 1 output DO2 Relay Alarm 2 output DO3 Relay Alarm 3 output Note2 DO4 Note1 Transistor Alarm 4 output Note2 DO5 Note1 Transistor Not assigned DO6 Note1 Transistor Not assigned DO7 Note1 Transistor FAIL output Note1 Used for the UT550 01 UT550 03 UT551 OC and UT551 OD only Note2 If the control output selects a transistor output alarm 4 output is assigned to the relay terminal for output 1 and alarm 3 output is also assigned to the relay terminal for 2 output 2 UT55 only 7 Loo
246. er are pre assigned to their respective input terminals when the controller is shipped from the factory The function assignments in each of the UT UP modes are defined in terms of the most frequently used Check the controller model you will use and the factory set terminal assignments for each controller mode of the model Changes should only be made if you require any of the functions listed below or need to change any of the terminal numbers If you change any of the contact input terminal assignments check that the new assignment agrees with the current wiring If necessary rewire the terminals This section contains reference information on the following aspects of contact input functions Refer to this information and change parameter settings only if necessary This section explains the function for each of the following models Refer to the paragraph that ia applicable to your model When the UT series controllers 1 Changing contact input functions for the UT350 UT32 2 Changing contact input functions for the UT450 UT420 3 Changing contact input functions for the UT550 UT520 Note The function discussed in the following reference topic are not included in your controller model and these are not described in this manual 4 Changing contact input functions for the UT750 4 1 Changing contact input terminal assignments of the UT750 4 2 Using contact I O expansion module with the UT750 4 3 Us
247. er settings Note1 Note1 When using a UP mode requiring no secondary loop such as single loop control the controller shows a parameter with which you can decide whether to show or hide the LP2 or PYS2 parameter You need not set the parameter in this case however IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 7 1 References Related to Security gt Ref 7 9 Parameter Map Example shown for UP550 Operating display lt SET3S For example locking hiding the parameters of the LP1 main menu further prohibits you from changing the settings of parameters such as AT that belong to the RAR submenu or any of the 1 PID to 8 PID submenus y eros PYS1 BEA STUP A CET SET SET GET Y Password verification display OK eee ARNI yaa i or ee a peace EPPO TofLocy ii ia 2a i To PARA submenu of tt bt 1 2b1 main menu of program 1 i aa ea setup setting display iee i 2w ching apt To program vi tas fs 2a3 if Tosetup parameter gt t abs 2b3 parameter map tT
248. er value using the 4 aH Es Z keys then press the key to a N fe our Pe ae register it Cae e UTM IN1 OTi PSL1 V RS SMP men T HE on PRI T H RL1 CT2 STP1 TR SDP1 CTc1 DLN1 V MOD SH1 CTc2 ADR1 yy SLI AO1 RP T1 IN3 BSL1 AOQ2 PSL2 UNIS RJC1 AO3 BPS2 RH3 IN2 A1H PRI2 RL3 UNI2 AiL STP2 SDP3 RH2 A2H DLN2 SH3 RL2 A2L ADR2 SL3 SDP2 A3H RP T2 BSL3 SH2 ASL P UN1 SL2 P DP1 BSL2 P RH1 RJC2 P RL1 P UN2 P DP2 P RH2 P RL2 IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 1 1 References Related to PV Input gt Ref 1 14 lt lt Ref 1 1 References Related to PV Input gt gt Ref 1 1 5 Checking that the changed PV sampling period is appropriate A CAUTION When you have changed the PV sampling period according to Ref 1 1 4 Changing the PV sampling period in this section be sure to check that the new period is appropriate by referring to the following descriptions It is necessary to check the new period with UP750 UP550 UT750 UT550 UT551 and UT520 after the PV sampling period has been changed It is possible to check whether or not the currently set PV sampling period is appropriate for the controller to perform its required functions For example with UT550 the PV sampling period can be selected from 4 periods as shown in Table 1 1 1 However some of the controller functions will be restricted under the use of each period Although these limitations are given as Limita
249. erforming a ramp up or ramp down operation control in the same PV zone is based on the same PID constants Zone PID control is used with reactors that change chemical reaction gain according to temperature As shown in the figure below up to 7 zones Note can be created using the maximum and minimum values of the PV range as reference points 1 6 PID constants can be assigned to each individual zone In this way even if PV changes from zone to zone control within each individual zone is automatically based on the PID constants assigned to that zone Note With UP35 _ up to 3 zones can be created If the current PV is here control is based on the PID constants set for zone No 6 PV range max value No 7PID Reference point 6 x No 6PID Reference point 5 No 5PID Reference point 4 No 4PID No 3PID No 2PID Reference point 3 Reference point 2 Reference point 1 No 1PID PV range min value PV Fig 5 1 5 Reference points The following parameters are used Change parameters as explained in the User s Manuals Initial Settings and Parameter Maps Setup Parameter Control Action related Parameter n RP UP750 UP35 reese Description Setting range Default D register No Code Code n RP Note n r Zone PID reference 0 0 to 100 0 of PV input 100 0 of PV See the table D n 1 6 n RP point range Note input range 5 1 1 n 1 or 2 Note However 1 RP lt 2 RP lt
250. ers 1 PID to 5 PID can be displayed 1 When the Model Is UT750 UT550 UT551 or UT520 Operating display a SET S ae Parameters that can Dar TSP 7 es beset according to the sc EE ZAI eat P BS 1 A2 7 A2 aaz each target setpoints FL TAS 7 A3 Bas i UPR 1 A4 7 A4 8 A4 DNR T P 7P aP RT 11 71 ar fy i RBS 1D 7D 8 D l i Same RFL TOH 7 0H BOH as ORB 7 0L 7 0L Bol LPI ORH 1 MR 7MR aMR ORL TH 7H 8H 1 DR 7 DR 8 DR T P 7 Po 8 Pc Tic 7c Ble 1 De 7 De 8 De THe 7He amp He 1 DB 7 DB 8 DB 1 PO 7 PO 8 PO 1 0 7 0c 8 0c IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 4 1 References Related to Target Setpoints gt Ref 4 3 2 Operating display Menu When the Model Is UT450 or UT420
251. ersfoort THE NETHERLANDS Phone 31 334 64 1611 Facsimile 31 334 64 1610 Sales Branch Offices Houten The Netherlands Wien Austria Zaventem Belgium Ratingen Germany Madrid Spain Bratislava Slovakia Runcorn United Kingdom Milano Italy Velizy villacoublay France Johannesburg Republic of South Africa YOKOGAWA AMERICA DO SUL S A Headquarters amp Plant Praca Acapulco 31 Santo Amaro Sao Paulo SP BRAZIL CEP 04675 190 Phone 55 11 5681 2400 Facsimile 55 11 5681 4434 YOKOGAWA ENGINEERING ASIA PTE LTD Head office 5 Bedok South Road Singapore 469270 SINGAPORE Phone 65 6241 9933 Facsimile 65 6241 2606 YOKOGAWA ELECTRIC KOREA CO LTD Seoul Sales office 395 70 Shindaebang dong Dongjak gu Seoul 156 010 KOREA Phone 82 2 3284 3000 Facsimile 82 2 3284 3019 YOKOGAWA TAIWAN CORPORATION Head office 17F No 39 Sec 1 Chung Hwa Road Taipei 100 TAIWAN Phone 886 2 2314 9166 Facsimile 886 2 2314 9918 YOKOGAWA AUSTRALIA PTY LTD Head office Centrecourt D1 25 27 Paul Street North North Ryde N S W 2113 AUSTRALIA Phone 61 2 9805 0699 Facsimile 61 2 9888 1844 YOKOGAWA INDIA LTD Head office 40 4 Lavelle Road Bangalore 560 001 INDIA Phone 91 80 227 1513 Facsimile 91 80 227 4270 LTD YOKOGAWA ELECTRIC Grokholskiy per 13 Build 2 4th Floor 129010 Moscow RUSSIA FEDERATION Phone 7 095 737 7868 Facsimile 7 095 737 7869
252. essages on a setting display using signals from contact input terminals Messages must be no longer than 20 single byte alphanumeric charac ters This feature is convenient as it automatically displays a message specific to an event that occurs during operation A CAUTION The optional communication function or the optional LL100 Parameters Setting Tool is required to register these messages each comprising no more than 20 alphanumeric characters The text strings of messages must be registered with the UP750 s D registers numbered 801 to 840 in advance Up to four messages can be registered Register each message with its specifically numbered D register as shown below For more information on how to register messages see the user s manual of the communication function or the LL100 Parameters Setting Tool Register numbers for registering message 1 MG1 D0801 to D0810 Register numbers for registering message 2 MG2 D0811 to D0820 Register numbers for registering message 3 MG3 D0821 to D0830 Register numbers for registering message 4 MG4 D0831 to D0840 IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 3 1 References Related to Contact Input gt Ref 3 37 Messages are displayed in the following way A message appears when the controller is showing an operating display and the status of the contact input terminal where the message is registere
253. et Setpoints 8 Max The UT750 UT500 and UT400 are designed so that you can set a maximum of eight target setpoints at a time You can also set a maximum of eight target setpoints at a time for each loop in a controller mode of the UT750 or UT5U0 that uses two loops Note In the case of the UT3 you can set a maximum of four target setpoints at atime Note To change the number of target setpoints set the GRP setup parameter to a desired value from 1 to 8 This feature is convenient in such applications where more than one product is manufactured at the same time Set multiple target setpoints in advance and switch between them according to the type of product You can set PID constants and other parameters separately for each individual target setpoint However appli cable parameters will differ slightly according to the controller model Parameters that can be set according to the target setpoints of each controller model are listed on the following parameter map Verify the types of parameter available with your controller You can switch between target setpoints in any of the following ways e Select a target setpoint number by key operation e Use external contacts e Use communication means The number of target setpoint can be changed reduced with the parameter GRP PID group number For example when 5 is set to the GRP only five PID group paramet
254. et to OFF when the controller is shipped from the factory If you set the code to 2 or 3 the Super2 hunting prevention function works For more information on the Super2 functions see Ref 2 1 6 A CAUTION The SUPER function can only be used with the PID function If both the integral time and derivative time are set to OFF the SUPER function will not operate even when SC is setto 1 The SUPER function operates under the condition that P I and D are set up It is therefore more efficient to set the SUPER code SC to 1 after auto tuning is carried out The SUPER function is an overshoot suppressing function that uses fuzzy inference This function is highly effective when used together with the auto tuning function in the event of the following e Overshoots must be suppressed e Rise up time needs to be shortened e Load varies often e SP is changed frequently When the SUPER function is set on the controller monitors deviation in order to detect the possibility of an overshoot When the possibility of overshoot is detected the controller changes the target setpoint to a tentative value as a secondary setpoint auxiliary setpoint SSP and continued control Then when the possibility of an over shoot no longer exists the target setpoint is gradually reset to its original value Temperature Secondary SP SP F a gt Time Super ON Start of fuzzy inference Fig 2 1 3
255. ey once to display the parameter AL1 With the UT500 the sensor ground alarm can be set to any of AL1 AL2 AL3 or AL4 When you want to use AL3 press the key 2 times more and call up the AL3 Setting display 3 Set the parameter value to 25 using the A keys then press the 3 key to register it 25 must be set when you want to use the sensor ground alarm Note With UT3500r UT320 23 must be set 4 After the above operation set the cycle time CT The default value of CT is 30seconds When the time is good path the setting of CT Display the setup parameter main menu UTMD and then display the submenu OUT Press the key 3 times to display the parameter CT Adjust the cycle time value using the 4 zZ it keys and press the key to register 5 After the above operation pressing the key for at least 3 seconds to go back to the operating display 6 Then press the key for at least 3 seconds again to display the operating parameter main menu MODE Press 4 key once to display main menu LP 1 Then display the submenu PAR UT550 Parameter map Password i OK Main menu DISP CS
256. eys to display the submenu EDIT UP750 UP550 Parameter Map EDIT program edit Ga ee 4 a sub menu i fo i Lio l mne E em ALL S lt 7 ERS S NO feo 3 Press the key one time to display the parameter ALL S S NO The remaining unused segments number is shown on this display MENU PROG EDIT 1 unused segment no TIP The remaining unused segments number is displayed in LCD display as shown below This time the parameter code ALL S is S NO 3000 displayed on PV display LED The remaining unused segment numbers IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 5 3 Handy Features for Creating and Editing Programs gt Ref 5 50 lt lt Ref 5 3 Handy Features for Creating and Editing Programs gt gt Ref 5 3 2 Checking the number of segments in a specific Program Pattern The number of segments in a specific program pattern can be checked with the UP750 and UP550 With both the UP750 and UP550 a single program can contain a maximum of 99 segments This function can be used to check how many segments can be added to a program pattern before actually adding them to the program The parameter used to check the number of segments in a specific program pattern is as follows Program Parameter Parameters for Editing Programs Ptn S
257. f JC 2 local control is set the local constant setpoint mode is engaged See Ref 5 2 9 Operation in the Local Constant Setpoint Mode on page Ref 5 41 of this manual On the other hand if UC 0 program continue or JC 1 segment hold the program is reset stopped Control output in this case is the preset output E If the advance function is applied in the repeat end segment the repeat operation is started E f the advance function is applied while the program is on hold the hold state is released and the program resumes from the next segment IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 5 2 References Related to Program Setup gt Ref 5 38 2 For the UP350 A Note The advance function is performed through key operation or via communications For the applications of communication functions see the separate GREEN Series Communications User s Manual To use the advance function by key input highlight the ADV operating parameter for the running pattern and set it to 1 After the advance function has been applied the monitor will automatically return to the operating display PV SP display For more information on key input see the User s Manual Operations Applying the advance function to the currently running segment advances the program to the next segment However operation differs as follows depending on the operating state of the segment E
258. f 111 ioi SPA each segment SPT to n SPA 0 0 to 100 0 of 0 0 of PV ie a gt PV input range input range TSP2 Note1 Note1 Target SP for 2nd loop 112 TIME a L A i Time set segment time unregistered or 113 to Lr o TIME is displayed 00 00 to 99 59 unregistered ra Pht on TMA only when SEG T is Hour minute or set to 0 Minute second Note1 The parameter TSP2 can be displayed only when the PT2 G parameter is set to ON e Setup Parameter Target Setpoint related Parameter TMU UP750 UP35 Brae Description Setting Range Default D register No Code Code TMU Lay Program time unit hh mm Hour minute hh mm 904 TMU mm ss Minute second IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 5 1 References Related to Segment Operation gt E When segment ramp time is selected Ref 5 4 The segment ramp time criterion bases segment operation on the TSP 1 target setpoint Note and the TM RT segment ramp time Ramp time in segment ramp up or ramp down is expressed as an amount of change between target setpoints per hour or per minute The unit of time is selected with TMU When segment is set for soaking at a constant target setpoint ramp time expresses the time duration of the segment Note TSP2 can also be used if using dual loop control with the UP750 With the UP35 parameters are used
259. f the advance function is applied during any segment other than the last segment of the program pattern the program advances to the next segment regardless of the 1 JC or 2 JC Note setting E f the advance function is applied in the last segment of the program pattern the programs acts as follows depending on the 1 JC or 2 JC Note setting 1 JC or 2 JC setting for last segment and operating state after advance function is applied 0 Reset Operation stopped _ gt Reset Operation stopped state 1 Segment hold gt Reset Operation stopped state 2 Program pattern 1 start gt Program pattern 1 running 3 Program pattern 2 start Program pattern 2 running E f the advance function is applied while the program is on hold the hold state is released and the program resumes from the next segment Note With the UP350 two program patterns can be run simultaneously 1 JC is the junction code for program pattern 1 and 2 JC for program pattern 2 IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 5 2 References Related to Program Setup gt Ref 5 39 lt lt Ref 5 2 References Related to Program Setup gt gt Ref 5 2 8 Signal Output at Program end This function can be used with UP750 or UP550 The pattern end signal output function outputs a signal via a relay contact at program end However the patte
260. ferences Related to Program Setup gt Ref 5 35 E Program pattern without the repeat operation Fig 5 2 22 shows the program pattern without the repeat operation A SEG1 SEG2 SEG3 SEG4 SEG5 SEG6 Secondary loop program pattern TSP2 Primary loop program pattern TSPn Target setpoint Fig 5 2 22 Program pattern without the repeat operation TIP The above figure is for dual loop control with the UP750 The secondary loop program pattern is also shown If it were single loop control there would be no secondary loop program pattern E Program pattern with the repeat operation Fig 5 2 23 shows the program pattern with one repeat cycle Repeat cycle 1 Repeat start segment 3 Repeat end segment 5 A SEG1 SEG2 SEG4 SEG5 SEG3 SEG4 SEG5 SEG6 Secondary loop program pattern TSP2 Primary loop program pattern gt Repeated cycle x 1 Repeat start Repeat end TSPn Target setpoint segment 3 segment 5 Fig 5 2 23 Program pattern with one repeat cycle IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 5 2 References Related to Program Setup gt Ref 5 36 2 For the UP350 With the UP350 the repeat function can be used by setting the junction code either 1 JC or 2 JC Though the UP350 can run two program patterns the repeat function set with 1 JC or 2 JC is applied to both patterns The repe
261. for at least 3 seconds to go back to the operating display IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 3 4 References Related to Instrument Alarms and Events gt Ref 3 90 lt lt Ref 3 4 References Related to Instrument Alarms and Events gt gt Ref 3 4 5 Using PV Events Using PV events is possible with the UP35L UP550 or UP750 The function specifications differ however between the UP550 UP750 and the UP35L This section first dis cusses 1 PV events when the controller is Model UP550 or UP750 and then 2 PV events when the control ler is Model UP350 1 When the Controller Is Model UP550 or UP750 A CAUTION The output terminals for PV events have been predetermined at the factory according to the UP mode Confirm the terminal numbers allocated to instrument alarms or event outputs If you have made any change to the instrument alarm or event settings you must also change the DO output terminal assignments and the wiring Note Note For example a single loop control type UP750 controller comes with the factory set DO contact output assignments shown in Table 3 4 3 The terminal number for PV event 1 or 2 is 6 or 5 and its DO number is DO1 or DO2 In other words two contact outputs are allocated to PV events when the controller is shipped from the factory On the other hand you can set a maximum of eight PV events for a single segment Denotes the to
262. ft to do so delete any unnecessary patterns with this function The parameter used to delete the program pattern is as follows e Program Parameter Parameters for Editing Programs CLEAR UP750 ali Description Setting range Default URSo UPS50 only Code none 1 to 30 when UP550 1 to 300 when UP750 Note The setting values of this parameter are the program pattern numbers those are already registered CLEAR Program pattern clearance Note To delete the program patterns carry out the operation shown below 1 Refer to the Parameter Map and Program Parameter Map in the user s Manual First display the operating parameter main menu PROG then press the key to display the program parameter setting display Submenu LOC will be displayed 2 And then press 4 J keys to display the submenu EDIT UP750 UP550 Parameter Map EDIT i ae EDIT program edit Eas elfen submenu pe 7 Ji an Loc e PRG o IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 5 3 Handy Features for Creating and Editing Programs gt Ref 5 56 3 Press the key five times to display the parameter clear Ptno CLEAR MENU PROG EDIT 7 TIP The clear Ptno is displayed in LCD display clear PTno as shown in the figure This time the parameter code CL
263. function is for UP750 and UP550 The following shows an example of linking the program patterns 1 and 2 pattern link A E A o i i 1 1 i 1 1 i o SEGI SEG2 SEG3 SEG4 SEG5 8 SEGI SEG2 SEG3 SEG4 SEG5 1 1 1 1 1 E 1 1 1 1 oe a Program Pattern 1 Program Pattern 2 aiai C Time Linking the point to the point like the above example disables the operation for SEG5 of the program pattern 1 Link the point of the program pattern 1 to the point Bof the program pattern 2 pattern link V i gt Temperature A Note When the temperature difference between the points A and 8 is large the derivative item D item works and the output may travel up to 100 and stay at this point However only when Start Code STC is set to 0 For the above pattern link set the value added 100 to the program pattern number 2 to be linked to the Junction Code JC parameter of SEG4 of the program pattern 1 JC 102 IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 5 2 References Related to Program Setup gt Ref 5 47 The following parameter is used To change parameter value follow the Program Setup or Parameters section of the appropriate User s Manual Program Parameter Junction Code parameter JC UP750 cs Description Setting range Default oe Code JC Setting Junction code 101 to 130 for UP550 0 140 Program p
264. g auto tuning TIP The heater burnout measured current 1 and 2 HC1 HC2 are not to be set The measured values for the current detection are shown on the displays for HC1 and HC2 TIP e Use the heater burnout current setpoint 1 HB1 for detecting the alarms of a 2 phase heater e Fora 3 phase heater use both HB1 and HB2 to detect alarms TIP The heater burnout alarm shares the output terminals with the other alarm A CAUTION Precautions for Use of Heater Burnout Alarm 1 The heater burnout alarm can be used only in on off control relay output or in time proportional PID control relay output voltage pulse output It cannot be used in continuous PID control current output Only heating side can be used in heating cooling control Cooling side cannot be used 2 Timing which detects an alarm is as follows In time proportional PID control When on state time of control output is 130 ms or longer heater current value is detected and measured heater current value is updated Heater current value is detected 100 ms after control output turns on In on off control output Heater burnout is detected in on state Heater burnout is not detected in off state Heater burnout is not detected during Auto tuning However if Auto tuning is started when heater burnout alarm occurs alarm state will be held during Auto tuning 3 In time proportional PID output control output is updated for every cycle time When the controller i
265. g control the output value before allocation to the heating and cooling sides is output 0 to 50 Cooling side output 0 to 50 Heating side output 4 Loop power supply Note 1 5 PV2 Measured value 2 Note 2 TIP2 6 SP2 Setpoint 2 Note 2 TIP2 7 OUT2 Control output 2 Note 2 TIP2 8 TSP1 Target setpoint 1 TIP3 9 HOUT1 Heating side control output in the control other than cascade control TIP3 10 COUT1 Cooling side control output in the control other than cascade control TIP3 11 OUT1 Position proportional control output in the control other than TIP3 TIP4 cascade control Internally computed output 12 TSP2 Target setpoint 2 TIP3 13 HOUT2 Heating side control output in cascade control TIP3 14 COUT2 Cooling side control output in cascade control TIP3 15 OUT2 Position proportional control output in cascade control TIP3 TIP4 internally computed output 16 Al1 Analog input 1 Setup parameter RL1 to RH1 TIP3 17 Al3 Analog input 3 Setup parameter RL3 to RH3 TIP3 Note1 For more information on the loop power supply see 3 Using the Loop Power Supply Function Note2 PV2 SP2 and OUT2 are available for controller modes UP UT modes that use a secondary loop These types of retransmission output cannot be used for single loop control This feature is not supported with the UP35 UT400 and UT3 IM 05J01B02 01E 0 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 l
266. g cooling control Note2 n oH Output high limit Heating side 5 0 to 105 0 100 0 Refer to the n OH output high limit Heating side limiter in Table 4 1 2 in heating cooling control Note2 heating cooling control 0 0 to 105 0 n OL lt n OH nook Output low limit Heating side SD shut down Note4 or 0 0 Refer to the n OL output low limit 5 0 to 105 0 100 0 Table 4 1 2 in heating cooling control Note2 Cooling side limiter in in heating cooling heating cooling control control 0 0 to 105 0 n OL lt n OH near Manual reset Heating side 5 0 to 105 0 50 0 Refer to the manual reset enabled when integral time Table 4 1 2 n MR in heating cooling control Note2 n l is OFF n H ON OFF control hysteresis 0 0 to 100 0 of 0 5 of PV Refer to the n H PV input range span input range span Table 4 1 2 e Heating side ON OFF control hysteresis Position proportional PID 0 5 in heating cooling control control or heating cooling control 0 0 to 100 0 Ar Direct reverse RVS reverse action RVS Refer to the n DR action switching Note5 DIR direct action reverse action Table 4 1 2 H o Coolong side 0 0 to 999 9 Note3 5 0 Refer to the n Pc proportional band Note6 Table 4 1 2 de Cooling side Integral time OFF or 1 to 6000 sec 240 seconds Refer to the n Ic Note6 Table 4 1 2 n de Cooling side Derivative time OFF or 1 to 6000 sec 60 second
267. g input bias and analog input filter read the following description and only set them if neces sary Sensor input value correction is available with UP750 UP550 UT750 UT550 UT551 and UT520 Analog input bias is used to correct sensor input characteristics compensating lead wire errors and so on Normally the PV biasing BS is convenient as mentioned in the CAUTION above however use the analog input bias A BS in cases where a constant correction is required due to sensor deterioration or for other reasons Since this biasing is set using a setup parameter it is suitable for input correction where once the parameter is set it will not be changed for a long time The analog input filter is used to remove noise from a PV input signal that contains high frequency noise such as flow rate and pressure signals This filter provides a first order lag calculation which can remove more noise the larger the time constant be comes see the figure below However an excessively large time constant will distort the waveform See the figure below As mentioned in the CAUTION above a similar effect can be obtained by using the PV filter FL However an analog input filter should be used in the cases where a constant level of correction is required such as in an environment that contains a lot of noise Actual input With a small time constant With an excessively large time constant WI w Fig 1 1 6 Image of PV Input Correction
268. gain to display the parameter AMD Same as bop 1 Adjust the parameter value using the keys then press the 1 key to HY4 register it IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 3 3 References Related to Alarms gt Ref 3 65 lt lt Ref 3 3 Reference Related to Alarms gt gt Ref 3 3 2 Setting Alarm hysteresis ON OFF range Alarm hysteresis ON OFF range can be set with the UT750 UT550 UT520 UT551 UT450 UT420 UT35L and UT32 This function differs as follows according to model Use it as specified for your model 1 With the UT350 UT32L and UT420 alarm 1 hysteresis HY1 to alarm 3 hysteresis HY3 correspond to alarm 1 AL1 to alarm 3 AL3 respectively 2 With the UT750 UT550 UT520 UT551 and UT450 alarm 1 hysteresis HY1 to alarm 4 hysteresis HY4 correspond to alarm 1 AL1 to alarm 4 AL4 respectively 3 The UT550 UT520 and UT551 add alarms 5 to 8 to those above Alarm 5 hysteresis uses HY1 of the secondary loop to alarm 8 hysteresis uses HY4 of the secondary loop correspond to alarm 5 uses AL1 of the secondary loop to alarm 8 uses AL4 of the secondary loop Note With the UT550 UT520 and UT551 primary loop alarms 5 to 8 are set in the AL1 to AL4 parameters of the secondary loop See Ref 3 3 1 Setting Alarm Trigger Conditions The ala
269. ginal setting display is automatically updated to the same value IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 6 1 References Related to Displays gt Ref 6 3 Registering SELECT Display The procedure for registering the SELECT display is as follows 1 Select a maximum of five parameters to be registered as SELECT displays In this example the three parameters RET1 RTH1 and RTL1 are registered Retransmission Output Parameters Located in Main menu CMLP Submenu RET Parameter Name of Parameter Setting Range and Description Symbol RET1 Retransmission OFF Disable output 1 type 1 PV1 2 SP1 3 OUT1 4 LPS loop power supply 15 V 5 PV2 6 SP2 7 OUT2 Setpoints 5 to 7 are not available for single loop control Retransmission output 1 is always provided via terminals 14 and 15 In position proportional control a valve opening signal 0 to 100 is transmitted if setpoint 3 is selected In heating cooling control an output value before allocation to heating cooling control 0 to 100 is transmitted if setpoint 3 is selected 0 to 50 Cooling side output 50 to 100 Heating side L output RTH 1 Maximum value RT1 1 2 TL1 1 digit to 100 0 of PV input range of retransmission RT1 3 TL1 1 digit to 100 0 output 1 scale RTL1 Minimum value RT1 1 2 0 0 of PV input range to TH1 1 digit of retransmission RT1 3 0 0 to TH1 1 digit L
270. gment end condition IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 5 2 References Related to Program Setup gt Ref 5 20 E Local control JC 2 A CAUTION Local control JC 2 can be set only for the last segment in the program pattern If set for a segment in the middle of the program the program will act as if program continue JC 0 were set as the segment end condition When local control JC 2 is selected as the segment end condition the controller is in the local mode constant setpoint at the end of the last segment in the program The target setpoint and event setpoint used here will vary between 1 and 2 below depending on whether setpoint tracking is ON or OFF Note To turn setpoint tracking ON OFF see the descriptions below e For PID control zone or segment selection follow the description Selecting PID Control between Zone and Segment For local mode operation see Ref 5 2 9 Operation in the Local Constant Setpoint Mode 1 When setpoint tracking is ON At the end of the last segment in the program the local constant setpoint mode is engaged In this case the target setpoint of the last segment is used as the target setpoint of the local mode See the figure below The local setpoint can be set in advance but when setpoint tracking is ON the target setpoint of the last segment in the program will be tracked and used regardless of the local target setpoint Ev
271. gs and Parameter Map e Setup parameters I O related Parameters DIS UT35 mise Description Setting range Default oo Display dg DI function OFF Turns contact input off 1 932 DIS selection 1 Assigns the functions of switching between 2 SP and 1 SP to DI1 Note1 Assigns the function of switching between auto and manual modes to DI2 Note1 2 Assigns the function of showing and hiding the Keylock LOCK setup parameter setting display to DI1 Note2 Nothing is assigned to Dl2 Assigns the function of selecting the target setpoint number by turning on or off the DI1 and DI2 contact inputs Note3 4 Assigns the function of switching between 2 SP and 1 SP to DI1 Note4 Assigns the function of switching between the STOP and RUN statuses to DI2 Note4 Note1 When switching between setpoints 2 SP and 1 SP is assigned 2 SP is selected when the contact is ON and 1 SP is selected when the contact is OFF In operation mode switching the auto mode is selected when the contact is ON and the manual mode is selected when the contact is OFF Note2 The Keylock LOCK setup parameter setting display is hidden when the DI1 contact is ON and is shown when the contact is OFF This function of hiding the keylock parameter using external input is an extra safeguard against erroneous operations Note3 The ON and OFF states of the DI1 and DI2 contact inputs can be programmed as shown below to def
272. gt Ref 7 6 Parameter Map Example shown for UTS50 UTS20 Operating display SET3S or For example locking hiding the parameters of the LP1 main menu further prohibits you from changing the settings of parameters such as AT that belong to the RAR submenu or any of the 1 PID to 8 PID submenus STUP a Fig 7 1 1 CSET Password verification display OK t i vi TE areren eenn or i a i ea To Loops u2 1i 1B1 2B1 main menu of setup us i aaz i aaz parameter n i setting display apa i 2B2 222 ot atone i aaa eas 4 83 2 83 aaa aaa B4 Ba as i 2a B5 285 aas 2 a6 4 86 2 B6 147 i 2 47 4 87 287 Faas 2 A8 4 88 2B8 Taag 2 49 4 89 2 89 AA 2 A10 Ba 2 810 4 AB 2 att sos BB 2811 ve eee eset tree esse eee Meese LMD 2 MD
273. he UP mode is on follow the TIP below Fig 5 2 20 shows where the segment time can be increased while in the hold status If the segment time is increased the time event and segment time are delayed automatically adjusted following the time over which the program segment is held and an increment of the segment ramp time A i i i 1 i i SEG1 i SEG2 SEG3 SEG4 SEG5 comes Segment pattern before the segment time is increased di Segment pattern Delayed after the segment time segment time i has been increased Time event Hold interval timer stops Time delayed by timer stops TSP Target setpoint Fig 5 2 20 Segment time delayed by timer stops A TIP When running 2 patterns simultaneously with the UP750 as long as both the held segments in the primary loop pattern and the secondary loop pattern are soak segments the segment time can be changed IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 5 2 References Related to Program Setup gt Ref 5 33 E To decrease the segment ramp time A CAUTION Changes can be made to parameter settings for soak segments only constant setpoint that are on hold However when the UP750 is in the dual loop control mode or in the temperature and humidity control mode or when the setup parameter PT2 G in other the UP mode is on follow the TIP below Fig 5 2 21 shows where the segment time can be decreas
274. he UP550 is 300 The more program patterns Note1 are created the less unused segments are left This function can be used to check how many segments are left before creating a new program pattern Note1 A single program pattern can contain a maximum of 99 segments The parameter used to check the total number of unused segments is as follows Program Parameter Parameters for Editing Programs ALL S UPSA B register No Description Setting range Default UP750 UP550 only Code ALL S Shows the number of remaining None 8 or 108 Note2 unused segments Note1 Note1 The ALL S S NO parameter is used only to display the total number of unused segments It need not be set Note2 The number of total unused parameters B register No 8 or 108 can be read by writing 1 for the read flag of B register 3 RDTRG after writing the No of any used program pattern and a segment No in B registers 1 PTNO and 2 SEGNO IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 5 3 Handy Features for Creating and Editing Programs gt Ref 5 49 To check the number of remaining unused segments carry out the operation shown below i Refer to the Parameter Map and Program Parameter Map in the user s Manual First display the operating parameter main menu PROG then press the key to display the program parameter setting display Submenu LOC will be displayed 2 And then press 4 k
275. he reference deviation has priority over PID setpoint switching based on the zone PID method However if the actual amount of deviation becomes smaller than the reference deviation setpoint the controller immediately reverts to the PID constants assigned to the zone appropriate for the current PV value To make the reference deviation function available use the RDV parameter This parameter is only shown for zone PID control If the model is UT750 or UT5UI0 the RDV parameter belongs to the same submenu CTL as the ZON and n RP parameters discussed earlier If the model is UT4L0 this parameter belongs to the setup parameters Control Action related parameter If the model is the UT3 this parameter belongs to the 4 PID group among operating parameters The following parameters are used to set the reference deviation Change parameters as explained in the User s Manuals Initial Settings and Parameter Map e Setup parameters However RDV belong to operating parameter with UT350 or UT320 UT750 UT5 UT400 Ay F D register UT3 Description Setting range Default No Code Code RDV r dH Reference deviation OFF or 0 0 to OFF 494 for loop 1 RDV 100 0 of PV 694 for loop 2 Note1 input range span Note1 The D registers for the loop 2 can be used with UT750 or UT5 only For e
276. he target setpoint of segment No 1 The segment ramps in the figure below are determined by the TIME segment time In this case starting applies to both PV1 and PV2 An example of PV time start is as follows Ramp Target setpoint PV Segment time 1 Example of a soak segment for segment No 2 of the primary loop The start point of primary loop program will be a point a e Because the secondary loop program will start at the same point as the primary loop does it will start at a point a2 e2 f f f gt Time SEG1 SEG2 SEG3 SEG4 SEG5 TSPn Target setpoint of loop n n 1 or 2 Fig 5 2 6 Example of a soak segment for segment No 2 Program start point is determined by the primary loop PV The primary loop starts at PV1 while the secondary loop starts at PV2 PV at program The primary loop s program The secondary loop s program operation start operation start points operation start points a a a2 b b b2 c c c2 d d d2 e e e2 IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 5 2 References Related to Program Setup gt Ref 5 17 lt lt Ref 5 2 References Related to Program Setup gt gt Ref 5 2 2 Using the Delayed Start Timer for Programmed Operation The delayed start timer can be used with the UP750 and UP550 It sets the time delay from when the program start operation is performed pressing the key etc to when operation actual
277. hese functions see Ref 5 2 4 Using the Wait Function later in this manual E Selecting segment insertion JC INSERT or segment deletion JC DELETE For these functions see Ref 5 3 Handy Features for Creating and Editing Programs later in this manual 2 For the UP350 Operations at the end of program patterns can be set with the junction code JC 1 When the program is reset JC 0 When the program is terminated it will be reset At this time the control output is a preset output and an event is also reset 2 When the program is on hold JC 1 After the program has been terminated it is in the hold status At this time control is acted on the setpoint at the time of program termination PV event operations will continue The time event status remains held This hold status continues until it is released with a key operation or an external contact If the hold status is released it will be in the reset status 3 Starting program 1 JC 2 After program 1 or 2 is terminated program 1 will start 4 Starting program 2 JC 3 After program 1 or 2 is terminated program 2 will start IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 5 2 References Related to Program Setup gt Ref 5 23 With 3 and 4 above an identical program pattern can be repeated or program patterns 1 and 2 can be linked Figure 5 2 13 shows where program pattern 1 is repeated This repetition will continue until
278. hing the STOP status is selected when the contact is ON and the RUN status is selected when the contact is OFF Note4 Eight choices of target setpoint numbers can be defined by programming the ON OFF states of DI3 to DI6 contact inputs DI3 DI4 DI5 DI6 1 SP ON OFF OFF OFF 2 SP OFF ON OFF OFF 3 SP ON ON OFF OFF 4 SP OFF OFF ON OFF 5 SP ON OFF ON OFF 6 SP OFF ON ON OFF 7 SP ON ON ON OFF 8 SP OFF OFF OFF ON Note5 With 2 SP 1 SP setpoint switching 2 SP is selected when the contact is ON and 1 SP is selected when the contact is OFF Note6 The following four choices of target setpoint numbers can be defined by programming the ON OFF states of DI1 and DI2 contact inputs DH DI2 1 SP OFF OFF 2 SP ON OFF 3 SP OFF ON 4 SP ON ON IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 3 1 References Related to Contact Input gt Ref 3 9 lt lt Ref 3 1 References Related to Contact Input gt gt Ref 3 1 3 Changing contact input functions for the UT550 UT551 UT520 With UT550 10 Max contact input terminals can be used Note The terminal numbers are 18 19 20 common terminal 28 30 commmon terminal 36 37 38 39 and 40 With UT520 6 Max contact input terminals can be used Note The terminal numbers are 18 19 20 common terminal 28 29 and 30 commmon terminal lt UT550 UT551 Terminal Arrangement gt
279. hough program 1 parameters can be viewed on the operating parameter setting display by pressing the key you are not allowed to change their settings Prohibits program 2 parameter settings from being changed Although program 2 parameters can be viewed on the operating parameter setting display by pressing key you are not allowed to change their settings Prohibits both the program 1 parameter settings and program 2 parameter settings from being changed Although pro and or 2 parameters can be viewed on the operating parameter setting display by gram 1 pressing the or key you are not allowed to change their settings The following parameters are used Change parameters as explained in the User s Manuals Initial Settings and Parameter Map e Setup parameters Security related Parameters UP35 Description Setting range Default D register No Code back Key lock OFF No key lock turns the 0 1036 LOCk key lock function OFF 1 to 9 See the Table 7 1 4 IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 7 1 References Related to Security gt Ref 7 8 5 When the Model Is UP750 and UP550 The keylock function of the UP750 and UP550 works as described in the table below Two or more options of the keylock function can be selected using security related setup parameters Table 7 1 5 Keylock Function Opt
280. if necessary Note2 A LC1 is the parameter for UP750 UP550 and UT750 LC1 is the parameter for UT550 UT551 and UT520 4 After the above operation repeat the following operation if necessary e Display the parameter setting display which you want to set the value ex A LC2 e Adjust the parameter value using the 4 vy keys then press the key to register TIP it A SRT E Descriptions of other parameters that belong to submenu AIN such as parameter A FL1 are given in Ref 1 1 6 Correcting the Input Value from a Sensor of this section Refer to it as necessary IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 1 1 References Related to PV Input gt Ref 1 11 lt lt Ref 1 1 References Related to PV Input gt gt Ref 1 1 4 Changing the PV sampling period A CAUTION When the controller is shipped the PV sampling period is already set to values suitable for implementing the model s functions and specifications Therefore under normal conditions the default sampling period should be used with the controller and changing it to a shorter one may disable some of the controller s functions The sampling period should on
281. inals that can be used for example to change the operation mode When the controller is shipped from the factory the terminals are set to the functions starting and stopping Reset program 1 operation and starting and stopping Reset program 2 operation The terminal numbers are 18 19 and 20 common terminals Terminal 18 is assigned as DI1 for contact input 1 and terminal 19 as Dl2 for contact input 2 See the terminal wiring diagrams in the Installation user s manual lt UP35L Terminal Arrangement gt DIS is a setup parameter Changing DIS setpoint allows you to change the function of external contact input Tanninal Correspondence between parameter DIS and external contact input functions When DIS OFF Factory shipped setting When DIS 1 When DIS 2 When DIS 3 UD Contact DU R Start program 1 when DI1 ON Hide setup parameter lock when DI1 ON Start program 1 when DI1 ON Di4 19 o No 19 No function Reset program 1 when DI1 OFF Show setup parameter lock when DI1 OFF Reset program 1 when DI1 OFF DI2 i Start program 2 when DI2 ON Hold program when DI2 ON 18 lt o No 18 No function Reset program 2 when DI2 OFF No function Cancel hold when Di2 OFF P 2 2 INS 20 Common Common Common Common COM Fig 3 1 8 UP350 Contact Input Terminals The UP350 is designed so that the
282. ine four choices of target o setpoints DI DI2 1 SP OFF OFF 2 SP ON OFF 3 SP OFF ON 4 SP ON ON Note4 When switching between the target setpoints 2 SP and 1 SP is assigned 2 SP is selected when the contact is ON and 1 SP is selected when the contact is OFF In the case of switching between the STOP and RUN statuses the STOP status is selected when the contact is ON and the RUN status is selected when the contact is OFF IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 3 1 References Related to Contact Input gt Ref 3 4 Part of the parameter map for the UT35L UT32H is shown below Refer to it when changing parameter values in order to access the desired parameter setting display A CAUTION If you change any contact input terminal assignment check that the new assignment agrees with the current wiring If necessary rewire the terminals Operating displ Setup parameter map Cad toons orme Note1 Pressing the 3Jkey on the OP PA display changes to PPR m1 the i operating parameter setting display LL Note2 If you have set a password FUNC is not displayed es unless the correct password is entered Oo aU Note3 The displays Funt and io Jcan be switched with Jor key fa PYd Note2 ia Fling Moe Fro iz 1 Call up the I O
283. ing Interrupt message functions with the UT750 4 4 Using Interrupt operating display functions with the UT750 When the UP series controllers 5 6 7 Changing contact input functions for the UP35 Changing contact input functions for the UP550 Changing contact input functions for the UP750 7 1 Changing contact input terminal assignments of the UP750 7 2 Using contact I O expansion module with the UP750 7 3 Using Interrupt message functions with the UP750 7 4 Using Interrupt operating display functions with the UP750 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 IM 05J01B02 01E lt Toc gt lt Ref 3 1 References Related to Contact Input gt Ref 3 2 When the UT series controllers lt lt Ref 3 1 References Related to Contact Input gt gt Ref 3 1 1 Changing contact input functions for the UT35DO UT320 Each UT35U and UT320 comes with three contact input terminals that can be used for example to change the operation mode When the controller is shipped from the factory the terminals are set to the functions switching between target setpoints 1 and 2 and switching between the auto and manual modes The terminal numbers are 18 19 and 20 common terminals Terminal 18 is assigned as DI1 for contact input 1 and terminal 19 as Dl2 for contact input 2 See the terminal wiring diagrams in the Installation user s manual lt UT35U Terminal Arrangement gt
284. ing cooling See Table 2 1 4 control Note2 in heating cooling control except for UP350 UT300 Note1 control Note1 n 1 to 8 means the number of PID group Note2 Not displayed in ON OFF control mode Table 2 1 4 1st for loop 1 2nd for loop 2 UT400 has no loop 2 n 1 n 2 n 3 n 4 n 5 n 6 n 7 n 8 ist 2nd ist 2nd ist 2nd ist 2nd ist 2nd ist 2nd 1st 2nd ist 2nd n OH 309 509 334 534 359 559 384 584 409 609 434 634 459 659 484 684 n OL 310 510 335 535 360 560 385 585 410 610 435 635 460 660 485 685 IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 2 1 References Related to Control Output gt Ref 2 9 lt lt Ref 2 1 References Related to Control output gt gt Ref 2 1 4 Using Anti reset Windup Over integration Prevention Function A Note The parameter AR is not used to turn on and off the anti reset windup function This function can be used with UP750 UP550 UP350 UT750 UT5 UT400 and UT3 e Parameter AR sets the point by specifying a deviation ratio at which to restart the integral computation that is suspended by the controller s anti reset windup function Integral computation restarts when the deviation ratio has decreased to the AR value e The deviation ratio setting range of AR is obtained by the
285. ing operation of the wait functions Use these for your references IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 5 2 References Related to Program Setup gt Ref 5 26 E Program wait at segment end Set JC to 11 15 Program wait at segment end makes the program wait at segment end if PV has not attained the target setpoint The program will advance to the next segment the moment that the measured input attains the wait zone If the measured input does not attain the wait zone within the wait time the program will advance to the next segment the moment the wait time elapses Operation when the measured input attains the wait zone before the wait time elapses From when the wait operation starts if the measured input attains the wait zone the wait state is changed to the operating state and the program advances to the next segment During the wait state the program timer is stopped therefore the time event EVn value is held SEG n SEG n 1 f n 1 to 98 Ramp to target setpoint i NS Wait zone gt Wait zone Target setpoint a ae H 7 i The moment that the PV attains the wait zone the program advances Program timer to the next segment SEG n 1 r PV stopped here 7 lt gt lt EVn ot Wait time EVn 1 Fig 5 2 14 Example of wait operation when the measured input attains the wait zone before the wait time elapses Operation when the measured
286. input does not attain the wait zone within the wait time If the wait time elapses before the measured input attains the wait zone the wait state is changed to the operating state and the program advances to the next segment the moment that the wait time elapses This happens even if the measured input has not attained the wait zone SEG n 1 SEG n n 1 to 98 Wait zone Wait zone Though PV has not attained the wait zone the program advances to the next segment SEG n 1 the moment that the wait time elapses Program timer PV stopped here lt gt EVn hs EVn 1 Wait time Fig 5 2 15 Example of wait operation when the measured input does not attain the wait zone within the wait time IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 5 2 References Related to Program Setup gt Ref 5 27 E Program wait in the middle of a segment Set JC to 21 25 When the wait operation is set so that the program waits in the middle of the segment the wait state is automati cally engaged and the program is delayed if PV drifts outside of a preset wait zone This wait zone is set with respect to the current target setpoint If PV returns within the wait zone the wait state is changed to the operating state and the program resumes running In dual loop control or temperature and humidity control the operating state is changed to the wait state if PV drifts outside of either wait z
287. input range PID PID group no in local mode 1to 8 1 103 Note2 EnA Local event n types Off 1 to 10 28 to 31 OFF 104 to 118 Note3 for control loop 1 Noted Off 41 to 50 68 to 71 for control loop 2 EnB Local event n types PV SP alarm 105 to 119 Notes 3 and 4 100 0 to 100 0 0 0 of PV Note5 of PV input range input range Deviation alarm 100 0 to 100 0 0 0 of PV of PV input range span input range span Output alarm 5 0 to 105 of output range Note1 Used only for dual loop control or temperature and humidity control in the UP750 Note2 Displayed only in segment PID control see Ref 5 1 2 Selecting PID Control Between Zone and Segment earlier in this manual The controller uses the 1st group of PID constants when PID group number in local mode is larger than the PID group number setup parameter GRP Note3 nin EnA and EnB is 21 to 28 Eight events can be used in the local mode Note4 After a maximum of eight events have been set those event settings are set with EnB Note5 D register numbers are alternately assigned to EnA and EnB o Y r D register D register EnA No EnB No E21A 104 E21B 105 E22A 106 E22B 107 E23A 108 E23B 109 E24A 110 E24B 111 E25A 112 E25B 113 E26A 114 E26B 115 E27A 116 E27B 117 E28A 118 E28B 119 IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 5 2 References Related to Program Setup gt Ref 5 43 Part of the parameter
288. int LSP1 or LSP2 gt Time _ SF Time event EVn Fig 5 2 11 Local control as the segment end condition when setpoint tracking is OFF To turn setpoint tracking ON OFF Setpoint can be tracked with the UP750 and UP550 This function equalizes the local setpoint to the remote setpoint when switching from remote to local control This prevents any sudden change in setpoint when control is switched from remote to local A brief expression regarding setpoint tracking is given below Where the setpoint tracking features are provided Where the setpoint tracking features are not provided A A Local _ yl p Local _yI setpoint F setpoint per a PV value Program i Program pattern PV value pattern 7 a Time a Time Switching from PRG to local mode Switching from PRG to local mode Fig 5 2 12 Setpoint tracking operation IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 5 2 References Related to Program Setup gt Ref 5 22 The following parameters are used herein To change parameter values consult the default setting or parameter map in the appropriate User s Manuals available separately e Setup parameter target setpoint related parameters SPT UP750 UP550 Description Setting range Default oo Code SPT Setpoint tracking OFF or ON ON 902 on off E Selecting the wait function at segment end JC 11 15 or during segment operation JC 21 25 For t
289. ion Eight point inputs Eight point outputs SUPPLY a i E H POWER O O RUNO DO T INPUT 2000 lt 9999 ooog 7 spureuT O gogg YOKOGAWA jr a AB SHIELD uFA2 Expansion Module2 The following four types of I O expansion modules are available depending on the supply voltage and output types Select the one that meets your needs Model Supply voltage Output type P2ER1 20J 100 to 240 V AC Relay P2ET1 20J 100 to 240 V AC Transistor P2ER6 20J 24V DC Relay P2ET6 20J 24V DC Transistor Uses of the I O expansion module s contact output terminals vary between the UT750 Digital Indicating Controller and the UP750 Program Controller The following describes the applications where the UT750 is used and then where the UP750 is used Select and refer to the one appropriate for your selected model IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 3 2 References Related to Contact Output gt Ref 3 58 For UT750 Digital Indicating Controllers The I O expansion module s contact output terminals and the corresponding contact output setup parameters are listed in Table 3 2 5 To assign the output functions to the extended contact output terminals follow the steps below 1 Select the desired I O expansion module contact output terminals 2 Check the contact
290. ion Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 2 2 References Related to Retransmission Output gt Ref 2 24 lt lt Ref 2 2 References Related to Retransmission Output gt gt Ref 2 2 3 Using the Loop Power Supply Function A CAUTION The loop power supply is available in two voltage levels 1 The 14 5 to 18 0V DC 21 mA DC voltage level is the standard loop power supply for all controller models This standard feature becomes available when you specify the type of retransmission output See the explanation given below 2 The 21 6 to 28 0V DC 30 mA max voltage level is added to your controller as an option if specified by the option code at the time of ordering This optional feature is assigned to specific terminals prior to delivery Therefore you can use the feature directly without having to select a type of retransmission output as explained below 1 Using the Standard Loop Power Supply As discussed in Ref 2 2 1 Changing the Type of Retransmission Output earlier in this section set the relevant parameter see the table below to 4 in order to use the standard loop power supply e Setup parameters Retransmission Output Parameters UP750 UT5 UP35 e 7 0 Description Setting range Code Code RET1 ril rEL Retransmission output 4 RT1 RET 1 type selection RET2 rig Retransmission output 4 RT2 Note 2 type selection Note Note
291. ion listed below Only read the following descriptions if necessary and carry out the required operation lt lt Ref 1 1 Ref 1 1 1 Correcting the PV 1 Using PV input filter and PV input bias Correcting the PV 2 Using ten segment linearizer biasing or approximation Square root extraction of PV Changing the PV sampling period Checking that the changed PV sampling period is appropriate Correcting the input value from a sensor Using PV tracking function UT only PV input range adjustment when the UT UP mode No is 6 7 or 12 only References Related to PV Input gt gt Correcting the PV 1 Using PV input filter and PV input bias Filtering and biasing functions are available with all the UT UP series models E PV input filtering can be used to remove noise from a PV input that contains high frequency noise such as flow rate and pressure signals The PV input filter provides first order lag computation Setting a larger time constant as a parameter value can increase the amount of noise removed This filtering is also used to improve controllability and for phase compensation The time constant of the PV filter is offered as an operating parameter and can be changed during operation Actual input With a small time constant With a large time constant IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt
292. ion while codes 11 to 20 and 51 to 60 denote alarms with a stand by action IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 3 4 References Related to Instrument Alarms and Events gt Ref 3 81 E The waiting action The waiting action turns off the PV and deviation alarms during the start up of control and does not allow them to resume until the operation stabilizes The following figure shows the behavior of an alarm with the waiting action ie C Normal Abnormal Waiting Action adie de z normal Alarm output ON lt Low limit of alarm setpoint In this area the alarm output is turned off even if PV falls below the low limit alarm setpoint Power on gt Time A CAUTION In the following events the alarm output will be suppressed until a normal state is achieved even though there is an abnormality if the alarm set has the waiting action 1 Power on 2 Power recovery 3 Alarm type is changed E Fault diagnosis output The function output an alarm signal when input burnout A D converter failure or reference junction compensation failure The preset value is output when the alarm condition is caused e Setup parameters ALn n 1 to 4 Function Setpoint Remarks Using Fault diagnosis output 26 or 66 i E a n a A E FAIL output The FAIL alarm is output when the program ROM RAM or power failure detection fails The FAIL a
293. ions Keylock Function Option Description La Jkeylock Locks the A 7 keys on the controller front panel to prohibit their operation However the password setting or the following security related parameters setting operation is possible a key lock Locks the PT NoaJkey on the controller front panel to prohibit switching Program pattern No key lock e Locks the RuN key on the controller front panel key lock e Locks the ove key on the controller front panel This prohibits you from making the following changes by key operation 1 When the Model Is UP750 e Switching to hold mode of program operation Advancing to the next segment during program operation e Starting operation in local mode with the target setpoint kept constant e Switching between loop 1auto and manual modes e Switching between loop 2 auto and manual modes the parameters are shown only during cascade control dual loop control temperature and humidity control or cascade control with 2 universal inputs e Switching between loop 2 local and cascade modes the parameters are shown only during cascade control or cascade control with 2 universal inputs e Selecting starting segment number 2 When the Model Is UP550 e Switching to hold mode of program operation Advancing to the next segment during program operation e Starting operation in local mode with the target setpoint kept constant e Switching between loop 1auto and manu
294. ions below are not available on certain models For more information see those sections This section contains reference information on the following aspects of segment operation programmed with UP Series program controllers Refer to this information and change parameters only if necessary 1 Selecting Segment time between Time and Ramp time 2 Selecting PID Control between Zone and Segment lt lt Ref 5 1 Reference Related to Segment Operation gt gt Ref 5 1 1 Selecting Segment time between Time and Ramp time Segment time selection is available for the UP750 UP550 and UP350 Segment time can be selected between the two criteria below Selection is made with the SGT setup parameter e Segment time Factory set default e Segment ramp time The selected time criterion is applied to all segments in the program pattern A CAUTION Changing segment time criterion will erase the entire program pattern IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 5 1 References Related to Segment Operation gt Ref 5 2 The following parameters are used e Setup parameters Target Setpoint related Parameters SEG T UP750 UP35 pee Description Setting Range Default D register No Code Code SEG T GEGE Segment setting 0 Programming by setting 0 905 SEG T method segment times 1 Programming by setting segment ramps Depending on the selected segment time criterion the above
295. is shipped from the factory 2 The following parameters are used to specify the PID group Change parameters as explained in the User s Manuals Initial Settings and Parameter Map e Operating parameters UT450 pee Description Setting range Default co Code Pid PID parameter MENU or 1Gr to 8Gr MENU No register No PID display number Note1 Note1 Only 1Gr to 4Gr can be displayed when the controller is shipped from the factory To display 5Gr to 8Gr change the setting value of GRP from the default value to 5 to 8 IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 Ref 4 7 lt Toc gt lt Ref 4 1 References Related to Target Setpoints gt 3 The following parameters are used to set the value of the following parameters such as PID constants Change parameter as explained in the User s Manuals Initial Settings and Parameter map e Operating parameters UT450 pases Description Setting range Default oe Code n P Promotional band Heating side 0 1 to 999 9 5 0 Refer to the n P Notet proportional band In heating cooling control Table 4 1 2 in heating cooling control Note2 0 0 to 999 9 Note3 act Integral time Heating side OFF or 1 to 6000 sec 240 seconds Refer to the n l integral time Table 4 1 2 in heating cooling control Note2 n d Derivative time Heating side OFF or 1 to 6000 sec 60 seconds Refer to the n D derivative time Table 4 1 2 in heatin
296. isplay the program parameter setting display Submenu LOC will be displayed 2 And then press 4 J keys to display the submenu EDIT UP750 UP550 Parameter Map EDIT PROG program edit a ena EDIT sub menu cop 4 Zh ik iy Loc H PRG k gt l A n a aT ee Ise S No i E NO copy HA IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 5 3 Handy Features for Creating and Editing Programs gt Ref 5 54 3 Press the key one time to display the parameter ALL S S NO The remaining unused segment numbers is shown on this display Confirm that the unused segment numbers can be left after copying the new program pattern here Note The program pattern can not be copied when remaining segments are not enough For example the program pattern to be copied has 30 segments and the numbers of remaining segment are 20 the program pattern can not be copied MENU PROG EDIT 1 unused segment no ee The remaining unused segment numbers S NO 1500 4 After confirmation of remaining unused segment numbers press the key three times to display the copy source Ptno COPY setting display Then set the source program pattern number which you want to copy to new program pattern number using 4 YJ keys and press the key to register it MENU PROG
297. istration parameters DO1 to DO7 are shown below Model Function Registered number Alarm 1 output 5689 l relay number Common to UT750 Alarm 2 output 5690 I relay number UT550 UT551 and UT520 Alarm 3 output 5691 I relay number D Alarm 4 output 5693 Cooling side 1607 output via DO3 l relay number register number UT750 only Cooling side 1609 D register number output via DO4 UT550 UT551 and FAIL output 1609 D register number UT520 only IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 3 2 References Related to Contact Output gt 2 Cascade primary loop control UT mode 2 E UT750 DO Output Function DO1 Relay Alarm 1 output DO2 Relay Alarm 2 output DO3 Relay Alarm 3 output DO4 Transistor Alarm 4 output DO5 Transistor Not assigned DO6 Transistor Not assigned DO7 Transistor FAIL output UT550 UT520 UT551 DO Output Type Function DO1 Relay Alarm 1 output DO2 Relay Alarm 2 output DO3 Relay FAIL output DO4 Note1 Transistor Alarm 4 output Note2 DO5 Note1 Transistor Alarm 3 output Note2 DO6 Note1 Transistor Not assigned DO7 Note1 Transistor Not assigned Note1 Used for the UT550 01 UT550 03 UT551 L1C and UT551 HD only Note2 If the control output selects a transistor output alarm 4 output is assigned to the relay terminal for outp
298. ith UT750 e The number attached to the end of code means loop number 1 indicates that the code is for the loop 1 The number attached to the top of code means PID group number 1 indicates that the code is for the PID group 1 IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 8 1 Outline of Registers and relays gt Ref 8 14 Table 8 1 4 3 4 UT750 UT55 CONF 1 UT520 D register Map 3 4 UTMD No 1001 No 10514 No 1101 No 1151 No 1201 No 1251 1001 A BS1 BS1 1002 A FL1 FL1 1003 A SR1 SR1 1004 A LC1 LC1 1055 1056 1057 1058 1009 A BS3 BS3 1059 1010 A FL3 FL3 1060 1011 A SR3 SR3 1061 1012 A LC3 LC3 1062 1013 RET1 RT1 1063 1014 RTH1 TH1 1064 1015 RTL1 TL1 1065 RT2 unused area 1016 RET2 RT2 1066 1017 RTH2 TH2 1067 1018 RTL2 TL2 1068 1019 DVB1 DVB 1069 1020 DVB2 DV2 1070 1071 1072 1073 1074 1075 1076 Note1 1077 1078 1079 1080 1081 1082 1083 1084 unused area 1101 1102 1103 1104 1105 1106 1107 1108 1109 1110 1111 1112 1113 RDO151 1163 1114 RDO152 1164 1115 RDO153 1165 1116 RDO154 1166 1117 RDO155 1167 1118 RDO156 1168 1119 RDO157 1169 1120 RDO158 1170 PYA1 P1A 1121 RD O251 1171 PYB1 P1B 1122 RD O252_ 1172 PYA2 P2A 1201 IN1 1251 DLN1 DLN 1202 UNI1 UN1 1252 ADR1 ADR 1203 DP1 1253 _RP T1 RP T 12
299. ition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 4 1 References Related to Target Setpoints gt Ref 4 18 lt lt Ref 4 1 Reference Related to Target setpoint gt gt Ref 4 1 4 Setting ramp grades when switching between target setpoints This function can be used with UT750 UT5 UT400 or UT3O To prevent the target setpoint SP from changing suddenly or to change it at a constant rate the ramp up UPR and ramp down DNR rates for SP can be set This function is used in the following four events 1 SP is changed e g when 1 SP is changed from 100 C to 150 C 2 SP number SP NO is switched e g when switched from 1 SP to 3 SP Note This only applies during SP number selection 3 Power is turned on or power has recovered Note 4 Switched from MAN mode to AUTO mode Note Note SP changes at the specified ramp rate starting from the current PV value toward the original target setpoint 1 When SP is changed 2 When SP number SP NO 3 When power is turned on or power has recovered is switched 4 When switched from MAN to AUTO Old SP New SP 5 SP gt l 5g Specified vg ramp rate Specified i ramp rate Specified New SP gt lt Old SP PV ramp rate i gt SP change Time SP No Time Power on or Time switching MAN to AUTO switching Fig 4 1 6 L TIP The time unit of the ramp rate can be set to either
300. l lit when ON 1 unlit when OFF 0 Note4 The I relays number 769 through 2048 in the user area are not shown in the I relay map but write or read operation is possible with 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 8 1 Outline of Registers and relays gt Ref 8 31 Table 8 1 13 1 2 UT750 UT550 or UT520 I relay Map 1 2 STATUS ON STATUS No lho gt No 128 No 193 No 257 No 321 193 __AD1ERR_ 257 12 VLVAT ERR 13 LVLV BOUT 14 15 16 17 PV1ADC PV1ADC 18 PV1BO PV1BO RJC1ERR RJC1ERR PV1 over PV1 over PV1 over PV1 over RSPIADC RSPIADC 26 RSPIBO RSPIBO 27 28 29 C RSPIADC C RSPIADC 30 C RSPIBO C RSPIBO 31 ATIERR AT1ERR 32 33 PV2ADC PV2ADC PV2BO PV2BO RJC2ERR RJC2ERR PV2 over PV2 over PV2 over PV2 over RSP2ADC RSP2ADC 42 RSP2BO RSP2BO 43 44 45 C RSP2ADC 46 C RSP2BO C RSP2BO 47 AT2ERR AT2ERR 48 49 CALB E 1 CALB E 50 UCALB E 2 UCALB E USERE USERE RANGE RANGE SETUP SETUP PARA E PARA E MO DE E MODE E 189 190 191 192 Note The code in the square like a AD2ERR is used only with UT750 The code in the shaded square like a VLVAT ERR is used only withUT550 UT551 or UT520 e Other codes are common to UT750 UT550 UT551 and UT520 IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 8 1 Outline of Registers and relays gt Ref 8 32 Table 8 1 13 2 2 UT750 UT55C or UT520 I relay Map 2 2 OFF STATUS STATUS No
301. l 6 as discussed above register 1609 with the DO1 parameter Note To change the contact output functions use the parameters listed in the table below To change the parameter values follow the Default Setting and Parameters section of the appropriate manual e Setup parameters Contact Output Registration Parameters DO1 to DO7 Refer to the table of D register and I relay numbers assigned to contact outputs at the factory before shipment of each UT mode UT750 UT55 UT520 foi Setting Range and D register Description Default Settings No Code Code DO1 dol DO1 output registration 1106 DO1 relay DO2 dar DO2 output registration 1107 DO2 relay DO3 dod ae output registration The setting range is indicated by the 1108 DO3 relay D register or I relay number for a tact output flag 5000 DO4 dat DO4 output registration con 1109 yF These numbers depend on the control transistor open collector DO4 p mode set at the factory So details on DO5 gda D DO5 output registration this are described on a mode basis later 1110 DO5 transistor open collector in this manual DO6 dab DO6 output registration 1111 DO6 transistor open collector DO7 dol DO7 output registration 1112 DO7 transistor open collector IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 3 2 References Related to Contact Output gt Ref 3 44 Contact Output As
302. lained in the User s Manuals Initial Settings and Parameter Map e Setup parameters Deviation Monitor Parameters DVB1 DVB2 UT750 UT55 ae Description Setting range Default oe Code Code DVB1 dub Deviation display band 1 0 of PV 1019 DVB or Hop 0 0 to 100 0 of input range DVB2 die Deviation display band PV input range span 1 0 of PV 1020 DV2 Note1 for loop 2 input range Note1 UT450 does not have the parameter DV2 IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 Blank Page lt Toc gt lt Ref 7 1 References Related to Security gt Ref 7 1 Ref 7 1 References Related to Security A IMPORTANT Applicable models of this section UP750 UP550 UP35 UT750 UT5 UT400 UT3 UP750 UP550 UP350 UT750 UTSO0 UT400 UT3OD Note The functions discussed in this section apply to all the models of UT and UP series However some of the functions are unavailable with certain models Such models if any will be clearly noted in each of following items from 1 to 2 This section contains reference information on the following aspects of security Refer to this information and change parameters only if necessary 1 Setting a password to prevent unauthorized changes to setup parameters
303. larm output is ON in normal state and turned OFF in a FAIL condition When the FAIL condition is caused control output value are turned OFF or 0 the retransmission output value is set at 0 the alarm output is turned OFF and the controller operation is interrupted e Setup parameters ALn n 1 to 4 Function Setpoint Remarks 1 The default value of AL1 AL3 Using FAIL output at or 67 2 The default value of AL2 AL4 For more information on the sensor ground alarm see Ref 3 4 4 Using the Sensor Ground Alarm IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 3 4 References Related to Instrument Alarms and Events gt Ref 3 82 The following parameters are used to set the types of instrument alarms To change the settings of these parameters see the Initial Settings user s manual or the Parameters user s manual for your controller model e Setup parameters Alarm related Parameters AL1 to AL4 UP750 UP550 Description Setting Range Default co Code AL1 Instrument alarm 1 type 1 PV upper limit Note 915 AL2 Instrument alarm 2 type OFF or 1 to 71 2 PV lower limit Note 916 as indicated by the alarm type a AL3 Instrument alarm 3 type codes shown in Table 3 4 2 1 PV upper limit Note 917 AL4 Instrument alarm 4 type 2 PV lower limit Note 918 Note Each Instrument Alarm parameter defaults to either code 1 PV upper limit or
304. lier in this manual 12 Loop control with PV switching and two universal inputs UT mode 14 This function is for the UT750 only The contact output functions in this control mode are the same as for the loop control with PV switching UT mode 6 in Item 6 For more details refer to Item 6 earlier in this manual 13 Loop control with PV auto selector and two universal inputs UT mode 15 This function is for the UT750 only The contact output functions in this control mode are the same as for the loop control with PV auto selector UT mode 7 in Item 7 For more details refer to Item 7 earlier in this manual 14 Custom computation control UT mode 21 This function is for the UT750 only The contact output functions are not assigned at the factory before shipment IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 3 2 References Related to Contact Output gt lt lt Ref 3 2 References Related to Contact Output gt gt Ref 3 2 2 Changing Contact Output Functions in the UP750 and UP550 Ref 3 50 Nine contact output terminals including a common terminal are provided on both the UP750 and UP550 Their terminal numbers are 4 5 6 7 common 31 32 33 34 and 35 common as listed in the table below Table 3 2 4 also shows the DO numbers corresponding to each contact output terminal in single loop UP750 and UP550 controllers With these DO numbers functions listed in the table are set at th
305. lt Toc gt lt Ref 8 1 Outline of Registers and relays gt Ref 8 1 Ref 8 1 Outline of Registers and relays A IMPORTANT Applicable models of this section UP750 UP550 UP35 UT750 UT5 UT400 UT3 UP750 UP550 UP35 UT750 UT5 UT400 UT3 Note The D registers and l relays apply to all the models of UT and UP series However the kinds of D registers or l relays differ according to the controller model The B registers are used with UP750 or UP550 These sections below provide outline of Registers and l relays Refer to the manual of LL200 PC based Custom Computation Building Tool or the manual of GREEN Series Communication Function Optional for more details about the functions of registers and l relays 1 Outline of Registers and l relays 2 D register Outline and D register Map 3 B register Outline and B register Map 4 _ I relay Outline and I relay Map 5 l relay Timer setting Ay CAUTION The controller internal data should be destroyed and do not read or write operation to the Registers or I relays in the unused area The unused area is shown in each Map of registers or I relays For example any cells left blank for I relays 1 through 720 in the I relay map are the unused area IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 8 1 Outline of
306. ly be changed if you fully understand the procedures described in the following section A CAUTION The response time in communication may be longer when change the PV sampling period shorter In this case reset the PV sampling period longer The PV sampling period can be changed with UP750 UP550 UT750 UT550 UT551 and UT520 E For UP750 and UP550 Program Controllers The PV sampling period can be selected from 100 ms the fastest 200 ms and 500 ms The factory set default is 200 ms E For UT750 UT550 UT551 and UT520 Digital Indicating Controllers The PV sampling period can be selected from 50 ms the fastest 100 ms 200 ms and 500 ms The factory set default is 200 ms The following tables show the limitations of controller functions for each value of the PV sampling period 1 UP750 Program controller PV sampling period Limitations of controller functions 100 ms the fastest Possible with single loop models UP750 0L when neither cascade control UP mode 4 nor custom computation function is used 200 ms factory set default Possible with single loop models UP750 0L when cascade control is used Possible with single loop models UP750 0L and dual loop models UP750 50 when about less than 50 custom computation modules are used 50 is given as a rough guide Note 500 ms When 50 or more custom computation modules are used 50 is given
307. ly starts When the secondary loop is used the delay set here is used with both the primary and secondary loops The parameter used for setting the start timer for program operation is as follows Change parameters as explained in the User s Manuals Initial Settings and Parameter Map Operating Parameter Operation related Parameter S TM UP750 raed Description Setting range Default co Code S TM Starting time of program 00 00 to 99 59 hour minute 00 00 253 pattern operation or minute second Note1 Note1 The unit of the time hour minute or minute second is set by TMU setup parameter PV A SP 7 The program operation X is not started before the time set in S TM is elapsed A 1 p J PS Seen oes program operation start i gt Time Pressing the The time set in key S TM is elapsed Fig 5 2 7 Program start operation when the time delay is set IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 5 2 References Related to Program Setup gt Ref 5 18 lt lt Ref 5 2 References Related to Program Setup gt gt Ref 5 2 3 Selecting Segment end Condition Use the program parameter JC to specify the program segment end conditions However the program parameter setting functions for the UP750 and UP550 differ from those for the UP350 First the program parameter setting functions for the UP750 and UP5
308. ly with UP351 is the User area IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 8 1 Outline of Registers and l relays gt Ref 8 9 Table 8 1 3 2 4 UP35C1 D register Map 2 4 PROCESS PROGRAM MODE PAR OPERATION 1 OPERATION 2 USRPY No 0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 51 1 SP7 52 1 TM7 53 1 SP8 a is read only register is the User area IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 8 1 Outline of Registers and relays gt Ref 8 10 Table 8 1 3 3 4 UP350 D register Map 3 4 MSG L1 L2 CMLP CONF UPMD Zz e 800 900 1000 1100 1200 C S1 IN C S2 UNI C S3 TMU C S4 RH SEGT RL SDP SH CO N OD on BY w N SL o BSL Oo RJC N ak w RET A RTH k oa RTL e gt N o HY1 ho Oo HY2 N ak N N N w N EN PO N o ye oO M N C MD DS oe AR N o ao oO oo oo N DIS oo oo oe R oo oa oo oO LOCK oo N PCMD Note oo
309. m 100 C to 350 C the target setpoint is between the reference points 2 and 3 In this case No 3PID is selected Then when the target setpoint is changed from 350 C to 250 C the target setpoint is between the reference points 1 and 2 Inthis case No 2PID is selected Finally when the target setpoint is changed from 250 C to 800 C the target setpoint is between the reference points 4 and 5 In this case No 5 PID is selected SPA Maximum value of measurement range No 5 PID 800 C RASS SSS RS SS SSE SSSR SOS EES SSSA AS SS SERS RS SRS OSS a P E E E EE Reference point 4 222222222222 222 nn enn nnn enn nnn nn en Bee en en en fine ne ooo No 4 PID Reference point 3 Ee EEE E E E T A Target setpoint No 3 PID 350 C Reference point 2 f 8i f 250 C No 2 PID Reference point 1 r E E EE E T 109G No 1 PID Minimum value of measurement range T gt Time PID No tobe No 1 PID No 3 PID No 2 PID No 5 PID selected A A Target setpoint is Target setpoint is Target setpoint is changed from changed from changed from 100 C to 350 C 350 C to 250 C 350 C to 250 C Fig 4 1 5 Selecting a PID number by target setpoint IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 4 1 References Related to Target Setpoints gt Ref 4 16 2 4 When Selects by specifi
310. mbers each of which is incremented by 5000 For more information on I Relay numbers see Ref 8 1 4 The relationship between the factory set DI numbers and input terminal assignments may differ depending on the UP mode of your controller Always refer to the terminal wiring diagrams in the Installation user s manual to verify the factory set terminal assignments of each UP mode Note2 Each mode is executed when the state of the contact input changes from OFF to ON Note3 Refer to the table 3 1 11 IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 3 1 References Related to Contact Input gt Ref 3 29 lt lt Ref 3 1 References Related to Contact Input gt gt Ref 3 1 7 Changing contact input functions for the UP750 7 1 Changing contact input functions for the UP750 With UP750 8 Max contact input terminals can be used Note The terminal numbers are 18 19 20 common terminal 36 37 38 39 and 40 If these do not suffice your needs using I O expansion modules increases the number of available contact inputs to a maximum of 23 See 7 2 Using the I O Expansion module with the UP750 lt UP750 Terminal Arrangement gt
311. mbers for parameters R152 to R257 see Table 3 2 5 L R258 R258 output flag registration 0 with no functions 1128 For the UP750 Program Controllers For the UP750 commonly used contact functions are assigned in advance to the I O expansion module s contact output terminals The pre assigned contact output features are listed in Table 3 2 6 below E Extended contact output for UP750 only When the contact I O expansion module is connected to the UP750 PV event and time event outputs are output to the extended contact outputs R151 to R158 and R251 to R258 Table 3 2 6 Contact Output Output type Finetions Default Settings Parameters Note1 Set at the factory R151 Note2 Relay O C PV event 3 output 5707 l relay number R152 Note2 Relay O C PV event 4 output 5709 I relay number R153 Note2 Relay O C Time event 5 output 5134 I relay number R154 Note2 Relay O C Time event 6 output 5135 I relay number R155 Note2 Relay O C Time event 7 output 5137 I relay number R156 Note2 Relay O C Time event 8 output 5138 I relay number R157 Note2 Relay O C Time event 9 output 5145 l relay number R158 Note2 Relay O C Time event 10 output 5146 I relay number R251 Note3 Relay O C PV event 5 output 5710 I relay number R252 Note3 Relay O C PV event 6 output 5711 l relay number R253 Note3 Relay O C Time event 11 output 5147 l relay number R254
312. me prioritized PV start Program operation starts at the current PV to the point with the segment time for SEG3 4 When STC 3 Ramp prioritized PV2 start Only for UP750 Dual loop Control or Temperature and Humidity Control For STC 8 refer to Ref 5 2 1 Selecting Program Start Condition IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 5 2 References Related to Program Setup gt Ref 5 45 The following parameter is used displayed by pressing key on the front panel several times To change parameter value follow the Program Setup or Parameters section of the appropriate User s Manual Operating parameter Operation Mode parameter SST UP750 UP550 Description Setting range Default nial Code l SST Program start segment 1 to 99 1 D0224 number A Note e Program operation is not started when the segment set in Program Start Segment Number SST does not exist e SST is back to 1 in program operation RESET mode or LOCAL mode e EVENT PV Time do not work in the segment precedent to the segment set in the Program Start Segment Number SST e Repeat function and pattern link function do not work in this function IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 5 2 References Related to Program Setup gt Ref 5 46 lt lt Ref 5 2 References Related to Program Setup gt gt Ref 5 2 11 Operation with Linked Program Patterns Pattern link This
313. mode 1 Ten segment linearizer linearizer biasing approximation Note 2 2 PMD 2 MD for 2nd loop Note 1 773 Note1 These parameters are used for loop 2 when the UP UT mode is set for using loop 2 or the secondary loop Note2 As shown in the table at the time of shipping the ten segment linearizer mode parameter 1 PMD and others is set to 0 which selects biasing In this mode the ten segment linearizer output parameters are bias values therefore their setting ranges at the time of shipping are 66 7 to 105 0 of measurement range span If the ten segment linearizer mode is changed to 1 which selects approximation the setting ranges of ten segment linearizer output parameters will be 66 7 to 105 0 of the PV input range corrective values for approximation IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 1 1 References Related to PV Input gt Ref 1 8 E Setting the Required Parameters To set the parameters carry out the following steps Here we explain how to display the parameter setting display and to change the parameter values Before carrying out these operations be sure to refer to the User s Manuals Initial Settings and Parameter Map of the controller The parameter map is very helpful in finding the path to the setting display for a particular parameter 1 Referring to the User s Manuals above display UT760 s Parameter Map the operating parameter main menu PSY1 cperaton armay Note
314. mperature and humidity control UP mode 12 This function is for the UP750 only Contact output Output Type Function DO1 Relay PV event 1 output DO2 Relay PV event 2 output or cooling side output in heating cooling control in loop 2 Note DO3 Relay Instrument alarm 1 output or cooling side output in heating cooling control in loop 1 Note DO4 Transistor Time event 1 output or cooling side output in heating cooling control in loop 1 Note DO5 Transistor Time event 2 output or cooling side output in heating cooling control in loop 2 Note DO6 Transistor Time event 3 output DO7 Transistor Time event 4 output Note When heating cooing control using relay or transistor output in control output is selected cooling side output in loop 1 is assigned to DO3 or DO4 and cooling side output in loop 2 is assigned to DO2 or DOS IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 3 2 References Related to Contact Output gt Ref 3 56 E D regisier and I register numbers assigned to contact outputs and extended contact outputs set at the factory The registered numbers of the alarm and other functions assigned to contact output registration parameters DO1 to DO7 R151 to R158 and R251 to R258 are shown below Contact output registration parameter Function Registered number DO1 PV event 1 output 5705 l relay number PV event 2 output 5706 l rela
315. n Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 6 1 References Related to Displays gt Ref 6 2 lt lt Ref 6 1 References Related to Displays gt gt Ref 6 1 1 Using SELECT Displays SELECT displays can be created on all models in the UP and UT series of controllers The UP750 UP550 UT750 UT500 and UT400 permit the use of up to five SELECT displays whereas the UP35H and UT3 permit the use of up to four A SELECT display is selected from among all the parameter setting displays Note1 and contains a parameter whose setting value is frequently changed This allows you to change the setting value easily on an operating display rather than on a parameter setting display Configure SELECT displays using the C S1 to C S5 setup parameters Note2 For example if you want to frequently change the type of retransmission output 1 select the setting display of the RET1 setup parameter Notes When the Model is UT500 UT4L0 UT3 or UP350 SELECT displays are added last to the series of factory set standard operating displays You can switch between the SELECT displays as with the standard operating displays by pressing the key With the key you can switch from one SELECT display to another in the order of SELECT displays from 1 to 5 Note4 Pressing the key after showing a SELECT display returns to a Measured Value PV display When the Model is UT7
316. nce information on the following advanced controller operations related to instrument alarms and events Refer to this information and set parameters or change their settings only if necessary 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Using Instrument Alarms Setting the Operating Conditions of Instrument Alarms Setting Hysteresis On off Bandwidth for Instrument Alarms Using the Sensor Ground Alarm Using PV Events Using Time Events Using Local Events IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 3 4 References Related to Instrument Alarms and Events gt Ref 3 78 lt lt Ref 3 4 References Related to Instrument Alarms and Events gt gt Ref 3 4 1 Using Instrument Alarms Using instrument alarms is possible with the UP550 or UP750 You can set a maximum of four instrument alarms The types of instrument alarm include a measured value PV alarm deviation alarm sensor ground alarm fault diagnosis output and FAIL output A CAUTION An instrument alarm refers to an alarm function that works irrespective of the UP550 or UP750 s operating mode Note such as program operation mode local operation mode constant target setpoints or reset mode stop of operation Thus the instrument alarm functionally differs from a PV event or local event discussed later which works in program operation mode or local operation mode only Be careful of the difference when using these functions Note Fig
317. nctions to the module s terminals follow the steps below 1 Select a contact switched function to assign to a module terminal from the table of setup parameters contact input registration parameters in Page Ref 3 30 and Ref 3 31 2 Select a terminal from those of the I O expansion module listed in the table below 3 Show the setting display of the setup parameter selected in step 1 and register the Relay number with an increment of 5000 of the terminal selected in step 2 For example register 5177 with the HOLD setup parameter to assign the starting HOLD operation function to INPUT1 IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 3 1 References Related to Contact Input gt Ref 3 36 Table 3 1 14 Input terminals I relay No 5000 Code Refer to the l relay Map Note INPUT1 5177 RDI101 INPUT2 5178 RDI102 INPUT3 5179 RDI103 I O expansion INPUT4 5180 RDI104 module 1 INPUT5 5181 RDI105 INPUT6 5182 RDI106 INPUT7 5183 RDI107 INPUT8 5184 RDI108 INPUT1 5185 RDI201 INPUT2 5186 RDI202 INPUT3 5187 RDI203 I O expansion INPUT4 5188 RDI204 module 2 INPUT5 5189 RDI205 INPUT6 5190 RDI206 INPUT7 5191 RDI207 INPUT8 5192 RDI208 Note See Ref 8 1 4 l relay Outline and I relay Map 7 3 Using Interrupt message functions with the UP750 The UP750 is designed so that you can display one of up to four user registered m
318. ng and two universal inputs UT mode 14 Ref 3 49 13 Loop control with PV auto selector and two universal inputs UT mode 15 Ref 3 49 14 Custom computation control UT mode 21 cece cceeeeeesseeessteeeeeaes Ref 3 49 Ref 3 2 2 Changing Contact Output Functions in the UP750 and UP550 Ref 3 50 1 Single loop control UP mode 1 ou eeeeeceeeceeeeceeeeeeteeeeaeeeaeetaeeeeeeeeaes Ref 3 51 2 Cascade primary loop control UP mode 2 eeeeeeseeeeeeereeeteeeeteeees Ref 3 52 3 Cascade control UP mode 4 cece eeeeceeteceeeeeeeeeeseeeesaeetaaeeteaeeneneeeaes Ref 3 53 4 Loop control with PV switching UT mode 6 seese Ref 3 53 5 Loop control with PV auto selector UP mode 7 sceeeeeeeteeeeeees Ref 3 54 6 Dual loop control UP mode 11 This function is for the UP750 only Ref 3 55 7 Temperature and humidity control UP mode 12 This function is for the UP750 only seses Ref 3 55 IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 Toc iii 8 Cascade control with two universal inputs UP mode 13 ee Ref 3 56 9 Loop control with PV switching and two universal inputs UP mode 14 Ref 3 56 10 Loop control with PV auto selector and two universal inputs UP mode 15 Ref 3 56 11 Custom computation control UP mode 21 cccccesseeeeeseeeeesteeeeens Ref 3 56 Ref 3 2 3 Using the I O Expansion Module with UT750 and UP750 Ref
319. nging Contents of Deviation Trend Display for UP750 UP550 ANG UT 750 ONY risinn siaswte eaddcereuseence rua Ref 6 5 Ref 6 1 3 Changing Deviation Display Range of Deviation Monitor for UT750 UT550 UT551 and UT450 only csecceseeeeseeeseeeseeeesees Ref 6 7 Ref 7 1 References Related to Security eeecceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees Ref 7 1 Ref 7 1 1 Setting a password to prevent unauthorized changes to setup PArAME CEL cee e ee eeseeeeeee eee e ee anina anaiai Ref 7 1 Ref 7 1 2 Using the keylock function to prevent unauthorized key operation Ref 7 2 Ref 8 1 Outline of Registers and l relayS ss eeeecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenees Ref 8 1 Ref 8 1 1 Outline of Registers and relays cccccceccssceeseeeeseeeeseeeeseeeeseeseeeneas Ref 8 2 Ref 8 1 2 D register Outline and D register Map ssccseesseeeseeeeeeeeeteeseeees Ref 8 3 UP750 UP550 D register Map eesisisnicieensi innn inanan ana anana ia Ref 8 4 UP35OD register Map ccececcceeeeceeeeeeeeneeeeseeeeeseeeaeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeees Ref 8 8 UT750 UT550 UT520 D register Map ccceecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeestnaeeeeees Ref 8 12 UT450 UT420 D register Map o oo eee eeeeneeeeeneeeeeeeaeeeeeeaaeeeeeaaeeeeeeaeeeeneaas Ref 8 16 UT350 UT320 D register Map eee ee ceeeeeeeeneeeeeeenaeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaas Ref 8 19 Ref 8 1 3 B register Outline and B register Map csscsscsseeeseeeeeee
320. nitial Settings and Parameter Map of the controller The parameter map is very helpful in finding the path to the setting display for a particular parameter Az Referring to the User s Manual above display the setup parameter main menu Parameters map UT750 LOOP1 Note1 Then display the submenu SP Password 7 OK Note 1 To set PVT for loop 2 go to the main menu LOOP2 ose then the submenu SP and carry out the same proce pete e dure E Aay J H on LOOP2 CMLP gt CONF UTMD 2 Press the J key 3 times Note 2 to display the parameter PVT And adjust the parameter value OFF or ON using the 4 keys then press the GI key to register it When ON is set PV tracking operate Note 2 The times of key operation may change by the condition RVT of controller s setting AMD RHY 2 UT450 UT420 Here we explain how to display the parameter setting display and to change the parameter values Before carrying out these operations be sure to refer to the User s Manuals Initial Settings and Parameter Map of the controller The parameter map is very helpful in finding the path to the setting display for a particular parameter 1 With the operating display shown press Rareinctere mag an
321. nsistor Time event 1 output or cooling side output in heating cooling control in loop 1 Note DO5 Transistor Time event 2 output or cooling side output in heating cooling control in loop 2 Note DO6 Transistor Time event 3 output DO7 Transistor Time event 4 output Note When heating cooing control using relay or transistor output in control output is selected cooling side output in loop 1 is assigned to DO3 or DO4 and cooling side output in loop 2 is assigned to DO2 or DOS E D register and I register numbers assigned to contact outputs and extended contact outputs set at the factory The registered numbers of the alarm and other functions assigned to contact output registration parameters DO1 to DO7 R151 to R158 and R251 to R258 are shown below Contact output registration parameter Function Registered number DO1 PV event 1 output 5705 l relay number PV event 2 output 5706 l relay number si Cooling side control output in loop 2 1615 D register number DO Instrument alarm 1 output 5689 l relay number Cooling side control output in loop 1 1607 D register number Time event 1 output 5129 l relay number Do4 Cooling side control output in loop 1 1609 D register number DOE Time event 2 output 5130 l relay number Cooling side control output in loop 2 1617 D register number DO6 Time event 3 output 5131 l relay number DO7 Time event 4 output 5132 I relay number 7 Te
322. nter value Password UTM N1 OTI PSLi V RS SMP UNIT OT2 BPS1 VL ama RHI CTI PRIT V H SMEC t RLI CT2 STPI TRT SDP1 CTct DLNi lv Mop SH1 CTc2 ADRI ye su AO1 RP TI N3 BSLI A02 PSL2 UNIS RJG1 A03 BPS2 RH3 IN2 AIH PRI2 RE UNI2 AIL STP2 SDP3 RH2 A2H DLN2 SH8 RL2 A2L ADR2 sis SDP2 ASH RP T2 BSL3 SH2 ASL PUNI Sl2 P DP1 BSL2 PRAHA RJC2 PRE P UN2 P DP2 P RH2 P RL2 IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 1 1 References Related to PV Input gt Ref 1 16 lt lt Ref 1 1 References Related to PV Input gt gt Ref 1 1 6 Correcting the input value from a sensor A CAUTION The analog input bias and analog input filter described here are similar to the functions described in Ref 1 1 1 Correcting the PV 1 Using PV filter and PV bias of this section To use the PV filter and PV bias operating parameters FL and BS are used As they are operating param eters their settings can be changed during operation Therefore it is recommended that under normal circumstances you use FL and BS As for analo
323. nterruption 2 Note8 not specified pion A Aveles DI5 5165 not specied MG3 Message display DI6 5166 0 1145 interruption 3 Note8 DI7 5167 not specified MG4 Message display 0 1146 interruption 4 Note8 not specified Note1 The I Relay numbers used here are 161 to 168 DI numbers for contact input terminals are specified by these I Relay numbers each of which is incremented by 5000 For more information on I Relay numbers see Ref 8 1 4 The relationship between the factory set DI numbers and input terminal assignments may differ depending on the UT mode of your controller Always refer to the terminal wiring diagrams in the Installation user s manual to verify the factory set terminal assignments of each UT mode Note2 With operation mode switching the auto mode is selected when the contact is ON and the manual mode is selected when the contact is OFF Note3 With control mode switching the remote mode is selected when the contact is ON and the local mode is selected when the contact is OFF Note4 With STOP RUN status switching the STOP status is selected when the contact is ON and the RUN status is selected when the contact is OFF Note5 With cascade control use separate contact input terminals to set the cascade auto and manual modes Each mode is executed when the state of the contact input changes from OFF to ON It does not matter what the contact s state ON OFF was prior to the change IM 05J01B02
324. ntrollers that have auxiliary analog input Remote input capabilities Remote setpoint filtering and Ratio bias computation can be used with remote input as shown in the flowchart below Remote input Guat analog aa CRs4ss Square root extraction Remote setpoint filtering p Ratio bias computation Setpoints 1 8 t Remote input selection gt OF Local b O Remote FARN selection Target setpoint PV for ramp setting Target setpoint Controller CPU Fig 1 2 6 E Remote setpoint filtering Remote setpoint filtering performs first order lag computation for the remote setpoint value signal transmitted from the external equipment The function of Remote setpoint filtering is same as that of PV input filter Refer the Ref 1 1 1 Correcting the PV 1 Using PV input filter and PV input bias The following parameters are used Change parameters as explained in the User s Manuals Initial Settings and Parameter Map e Operating parameters Operation related Parameters RFL UT750 UT5 ee Description Setting range Default rete Code Code RFL rE Remote input filter OFF 1 to 120sec OFF loop 1 249 RFL loop 2 279 Note E 1 UT550 01 UT550 02 UT550 04 UT551 OB UT551 OD UT520 07 UT520 08 this parameter
325. nts The UT750 UT500 and UT400 can be operated using the remote target setpoints that they receive externally In this case the control output may change suddenly when the controller switches from remote mode operation to local mode operation operation based on the controller s own internal target setpoints To avoid this problem the UT750 UT500 and UT400 are designed to allow the control output to keep track of the PV so it can smoothly switch from the remote target setpoint to the local target setpoint The UT35U and UT32H do not have remote control capabilities so this feature is not available Selects the use of the SP tracking function Specify OFF to disable the function or ON to enable the function SP tracking enabled SP tracking enabled A A Local SP gt gt Local SP gt R L mode change R L mode change Fig 4 1 5 SP Tracking The following parameters are used to select ON or OFF of SP tracking function Change parameters as explained in the User s Manuals Initial Settings and Parameter Map e Setup parameters UT750 UT5 UT400 PA Description Setting range Default D register No Code Code SPT LPL SP tracking selection OFF or ON ON 904 for loop 1 SPT 942 for loop 2 Note1 Note1 The D registers for the loop 2 can be used with UT750 or UT5 only IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Ed
326. o modules to the controller provides a total of 23 inputs 16 8 x 2 inputs from the two modules and 7 standard inputs from the controller actually there are only seven standard inputs available be cause terminal 20 of the above mentioned eight terminals is reserved as a common terminals Note1 Requires Yokogawa s optional add on module for the uFA20 compact program controller UP750 lt gt u BUS Communication MAX 15m 8 Input terminals INPUT 24V DC 5mA SUPPLY lt YOKOGAWA POWER D O RUNO O Tra INPUT 24V DC 5mA YOKOGAWA AV DO OJA OUTPUT 240V AC 2A 24V DO 2A ZAV DC OTA OUTPUT 240V AC 2A 24V D 2A oT S E E E 7 E SE 8 Output terminals BERRIKI 8 Output eS SICI SSIS SII 6 Fig 3 1 11 I O Expansion Module1 I O Expansion Module2 I O Expansion Module Wiring Outline The connectable contact I O expansion modules optional are shown below Model Source Voltage Output type P2ER1 20J AC100 to 240V Relay contact output P2ET1 20J AC100 to 240V Transistor contact output P2ER6 20J DC24V Relay contact output P2ET6 20J DC24V Tr
327. of your controller Always refer to the terminal wiring diagrams in the Installation user s manual to verify the factory set terminal assignments of each UP mode UP750 Setup Parameters Register the contact input terminals DI number which are used to show the message 1 to 4 with parameters MG1 to MG4 Specify the DI numbers as the l Relay numbers each of which is incremented by 5000 IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt Ref 3 39 lt Ref 3 1 References Related to Contact Input gt 7 4 Using Interrupt operating display functions with the UP750 The UP750 is designed so that you can display the expected operating display using signals from contact input terminals This feature is convenient as it automatically displays the expected operating display specific to an event that occurs during operation A CAUTION The optional LL 200 custom computation building tool is required to use this function Refer to the User s manual of LL200 for more details The expected operating display appears when the status of the contact input terminal where the operating display is registered changes from OFF to ON The operating display corres
328. ollowing parameter flowchart If necessary reassign functions by referring to the DIS setup parameter table A CAUTION If you change any of the contact input terminal assignments check that the new assignment agree with the current wiring If necessary rewire the terminals OK an LOOP1 j gt LOOP2 gt For example when you want to use the Dl2 terminal number 18 for the function of Auto and Manual mode switching call up the parameter A M setting display and set the value to 5162 The 5162 means I relay number of DI2 plus E ceeseaar sea 5000 e Refer to the Table 3 1 4 or the Table 3 1 6 IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 3 1 References Related to Contact Input gt Ref 3 11 The following parameters are used Change parameters as explained in the User s Manuals Initial Settings and Parameter Map e Setup parameters Contact Input Registration Parameters A M R L S R CAS AUT MAN SP 0 etc UT55 UT520 rer F Default D register Description Setting range I relay number plus 5000 No Code Aen Auto Man
329. ommon terminal 36 37 38 39 and 40 lt UP550 Terminal Arrangement gt The functionality of a contact input can be varied by changing the setting of the contact input registration parameter External contact inputs Switch between the ON and OFF states of the DI1 to D14 m Contact 5V Transistor contact contact inputs to select from program pattern numbers 1 to 15 Di Select a number during a RESET state DIH 119 Los 19 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 s8 9101112131415 NS 1p X4 DI1 ON OFF oN OFF oN OFFI on oFF on OFF ON OFF ON OFFION Di2 118 o 5V 18 DI2 OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON ze J Dis OFF OFF OFF ON on onon OFF OFF OFFIOFF ON ON ONJON pjg 40 o 5V DIS 40 8 DI4 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFFIOFF ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON j Dn Di4 139 o 45V 39 I Start of program operation when o DI5 changes from OFF to ON DIS 38 a 38 b Stop of program operation when DIG 37 o 45V DI6 37 DI6 changes from OFF to ON ae pe Start of local mode operation when DI7 36 o 36 DI7 changes from OFF to ON COM X COM 20 20 Note The numbers of cont
330. ommon terminal for DO4 to DO7 A TIP In principle you can set a maximum of eight events for any single segment If you want to set at least nine events but no more than 16 for the segment assume the immediately preceding segment time to be zero and set a virtual segment Likewise if you want to set at least 17 events but no more than 24 for the segment assume the immediately preceding two segment times to be zero and set virtual segments Then set neces sary PV events or time events for these virtual segments IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 3 4 References Related to Instrument Alarms and Events gt Ref 3 91 E Types of PV Event Available with UP550 UP750 A PV event is a function used to output a PV alarm signal or a deviation alarm signal that has been set in advance during program operation The preset conditions of a PV event are retained even after the end of a given program segment The types of PV events available with the UP550 UP750 are summarized in Table 3 4 4 Use the EVn TYn and PEn program parameters shown in the table to change the type of PV event or set its value Confirm the factory set values and change them or set new values only if necessary Table 3 4 4 Alarm Action Alarm Type Open and Closed refer to the state of a relay contact and On and Off the state of a lamp Noalarm o Hysteresis PV upper limit Off Open Closed
331. on terminal for DI8 Note1 The ON and OFF status of the DI3 D14 DI5 and DI6 contact inputs can be programmed as shown in the Table 3 1 5 to define eight 8 choices of target setpoints IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 3 1 References Related to Contact Input gt Ref 3 10 Table 3 1 5 DI3 DI4 DIS DI6 1 SP ON OFF OFF OFF 2 SP OFF ON OFF OFF 3 SP ON ON OFF OFF 4 SP OFF OFF ON OFF 5 SP ON OFF ON OFF 6 SP OFF ON ON OFF 7 SP ON ON ON OFF 8 SP OFF OFF OFF ON Table 3 1 6 When the UT520 Single loop control mode UT mode 1 Terminal No DI No I relay no 5000 The factory set function 19 DI 5161 Assigns the function of switching between auto and manual modes 18 o DR O OZ Assigns the function of switching between STOP and RUN statuses Sa o Common terminal for DI4 and DI2 000 029 DB O 5163 CN function 28 ti Dg 6168 Assigns the function of switching between remote and local modes o 30o Common terminal for DI3 and DI8 000 The UT550 UT551 and UT520 are designed so that functions assigned to their contact input terminals can be changed Select the desired contact input terminal with which a function predefined for each setup parameter contact input registration parameter is executed To do this register the I Relay number corresponding to the terminal s DI number with the setup parameter whose function you want to use See the f
332. on under Control Method and Description of Control Action to set the type of PID control mode appropriate for the operating condition mode you will use using the setup parameter discussed earlier Table 2 1 2 Control Mode vs Operating Condition Relationship for UP750 UP550 UT750 UT5 and UT4L0 Type of PID Control Mode Control Method Description of Control Action Operating Condition Mode Standard PID control mode Factory set values For the UP the mode is defined by setting MODn 0 n 1o0r2 50 For the UT750 PV derivative type PID control Control output bump is allowed during change in SP value The PV derivative type PID control mode is adopted so that the controller can reach the new SP value without delay when the current SP value is changed In this control mode the controller immediately outputs the value of the proportional term P which is proportional to the deviation resulting from a change in the SP value The controller thus attempts to reach the new SP value as soon as possible SP gt PV MV e For UT series Note1 Local mode operation e For UP series Note2 Local mode Note3 hold mode or soak mode operation Deviation derivative type PID control The deviation derivative type PID control mode is adopted in order to improve the follow up capability of UP series program controllers for margin
333. one 1 or wait zone 2 ie Segment n Oe a Original target aN a Ge Wait zones aa i l Pl xX l p 7 e a Wait operation Fig 5 2 16 Example of wait operation when the program waits in the middle of a segment IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 5 2 References Related to Program Setup gt Ref 5 28 2 For the UP350 With the UP350 the wait function is used at the end of the segment It works only when a ramp up or down segment changes to a soak segment The wait function is set during program setup using the WIT Z wait zone parameter and the WIT T wait time parameter Settings apply to both program patterns 1 and 2 Note That the weight function does not work if the weight time WIT T remains off The parameters used herein are as follows To change the parameter values follow the Program Setup or Parameter Map section in the appropriate User s Manual Program parameters WIT Z and WIT T UP35 Description Setting range Default D register No Code uy LI Wait Zone OFF or 0 0 to 100 0 of PV OFF 260 WIT Z input range span ad d Wait Time OFF or 0 01 to 99 59 OFF 261 WIT T The following provides a brief explanation regarding operation of the wait functions Use these for your references Operation when the measured input attains the wait zone before the wait time elapses From when the wait operation starts if the mea
334. ontact input is OFF follows A M2 Loop 2 AUTO MAN switching DI1 5161 0 1153 AUTO when contact input is ON DI2 5162 not specified MAN when contact input is OFF DI3 5163 L C LOCAL CASCADE switching DI4 5164 0 1154 Not used for single loop Di5 5165 not specified control DI6 5166 DI7 5167 PTN O Bit 0 of program pattern DI8 5168 5161 1155 number Note3 DI1 PTN 1 Bit 1 of program pattern 5162 1156 number Note3 DI2 PTN 2 Bit 2 of program pattern 5163 1157 number Note3 DI8 PTN 3 Bit 3 of program pattern 5164 1158 number Note3 D14 IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 3 1 References Related to Contact Input gt Ref 3 33 e Setup parameters Contact Input Registration Parameters PROG RST LOC HOLD etc lt lt 2 2 gt gt UP750 mae Default D register Description Setting range I relay number plus 5000 No Code Note1 PTN 4 Bit 4 of program pattern 0 1159 number Note3 not specified PTN 5 Bit 5 of program pattern 0 1160 number Note3 Use the I O expansion not specified PTN 6 Bit 6 of program pattern module for specifying the 0 1161 number Note3 PTN 4 to PTN 8 setup not specified PTN 7 Bit 7 of program pattern parameters 0 1162 number Note3 not specified PTN 8 Bit 8 of program pattern 0 1163 number Note3 not specified MG1 Message display 0 1166 Interruption 1 not specifie
335. oop 1 are a ORB detection band PV input range span PV input range span 280 loop 2 Note1 ORH orl ON OFF rate ORL 1digit to 105 0 100 0 251 loop 1 ORH high limit 281 loop2 Note1 ORL orl ON OFF rate 5 0 to ORH 1digit 0 0 252 loop 1 ORL low limit 282 loop 2 Note1 Note1 UT4 0 and UT3L1Ldo not have the function of secondary loop loop 2 IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 3 3 References Related to Alarms gt E Setting the Required Parameters To use the sensor ground alarm some parameters must be set at the same time These parameters are setup parameters Aln CTn CTcn and operating Parameters ORB ORH ORL Carry out the parameter setting operation shown below Here the setting procedure of UT5 Ref 3 73 controller and set parameters in a same way 0 is shown as an example Refer the procedure when you have another Here we explain how to display the parameter setting display and to change the parameter values Before carrying out these operations be sure to refer to the User s Manuals Initial Settings and Parameter Map of the controller The parameter map is very helpful in finding the path to the setting display for a particular parameter f Referring to the User s Manual above display the setup parameter main menu LOOP1 Then display the submenu ALM 2 Press the k
336. ote input units range and scaling 2 Using square root extraction during remote input 3 Using remote setpoint filtering and ratio bias computing 4 Tracking target setpoint when switching from remote to local control IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 1 2 References Related to Remote Input gt Ref 1 23 lt lt Ref 1 2 Reference Related to Remote Input gt gt Ref 1 2 1 Setting remote input units range and scaling To use these remote input functions the controller must have auxiliary analog input capabilities Auxiliary analog input is indicated as input 3 in the parameter table below The following parameters are used e Setup parameters Input related Parameters IN3 UN3 RH3 RL3 SDP3 SH3 SL3 UT750 UT5 UT400 Description Setting range Default ie Code Code Code IN3 l nd r op Remote Input type 0 4 to 2V 40 UT750 1to5V 1221 IN3 RSP Input 3 type 1 to 5V 41 UT5 241 0 to 2V 50 UT400 41 0 to 10V 51 UNI3 Und Remote Input unit 1222 UN3 Note 1 C no unit F RH3 rH4i Maximum value of remote 5 000 1224 RH3 input range Note 1 Within the PV input range RL3 ri J Minimum value of remote 1 000 1225 RL3 input range Note 1 SDP3 dP E Remote input decimal 0 99999 no decimal point 1 1226 DP3 point position 1 9999 9 Note 1 2 999 99 3 99 999 4 9 9999
337. ote1 The I Relay numbers used here are 161 to 168 When the I O expansion module is used the numbers 177 to 192 are also the applicable I Relay numbers For more information on I Relay numbers see Ref 8 1 4 The relationship between the factory set DI numbers and input terminal assignments may differ depending on the UT mode of your controller Always refer to the terminal wiring diagrams in the Installation user s manual to verify the factory set terminal assignments of each UT mode UT750 Setup Parameters meet tos 3 Register the contact input terminals DI Ris7 LLDP 7 number which are used to show the message 1 to 4 with parameters R253 MG1 to MG4 ass Specify the DI numbers as the I Ht Relay numbers each of which is Basa incremented by 5000 IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 3 1 References Related to Contact Input gt Ref 3 22 4 4 Using Interrupt operating display functions with the UT750 The UT750 is designed so that you can display the expected operating display using signals from contact input terminals This feature is convenient as it automatically displays the expecte
338. output parameter corresponding to the selected contact terminal by referring to the table below 3 Display the contact output parameter setup display and then register the D register or I register numbers 5000 for setpoint output For example with the UT750 in single loop control if alarm 4 output is assigned to I O expansion OUTPUT 1 relay output specification alarm 4 output can be a relay output For the standard model alarm 4 output is a transistor open collector output If the UT750 is used in control mode other than single loop control follow the appropriate terminal assignments In this case register the I register number 5000 in alarm 4 output to contact output parameter R151 The I relay number for alarm 4 output is 693 as indicated on the I relay map As such register setpoint 5693 to parameter R151 OFF STATUS No 385 No 449 No 5137 No 5777 No 641 No 7057 385 AD1ERR 449 A M1 513 577 CSPNO O 641 705 ee ee eee CSPNO 1 642 706 see es 79 CSPNO 2 643 707 UCALB E 498 644 754 435 USER E 499 563 RDI103 436 500 564 RDI104 437 UTMD 501 565 RDI105 629 693 ALO14 757 438 RANGE 502 566 RDI106 630 694 758 439 SETUP 503 567 RDI107 631 695 440 504 568 RDI108 632 696 760 441 PARA E 505 569 RDI201 633 697 ALO21 761 442 MODE E
339. p control with PV auto selector UT mode 7 E UT750 DO Output Type Function DO1 Relay Alarm 1 output DO2 Relay Alarm 2 output DO3 Relay Alarm 3 output or cooling side control in heating cooling control Note DO4 Transistor Alarm 4 output or cooling side control in heating cooling control Note DO5 Transistor Alarm 3 output DO6 Transistor Alarm 4 output DO7 Transistor Not assigned Note When heating cooing control using relay or transistor output in control output is selected cooling side output is assigned to DO3 or DO4 above E UT550 UT520 UT551 DO Output Type Function DO1 Relay Alarm 1 output DO2 Relay Alarm 2 output DO3 Relay Alarm 3 output Note2 DO4 Note1 Transistor Alarm 4 output Note2 DO5 Note1 Transistor Not assigned DO6 Note1 Transistor Not assigned DO7 Note1 Transistor FAIL output Note1 Used for the UT550 01 UT550 03 UT551 L1C and UT551 OD only Note2 If the control output selects a transistor output alarm 4 output is assigned to the relay terminal for output 1 and alarm 3 output is also assigned to the relay terminal for output 2 UT550 2 only D register and I relay numbers assigned to contact outputs at the factory before shipment The registered numbers of the alarm and other functions assigned to contact output registration parameters DO1 to D
340. parameters are used Change parameters as explained in the User s Manuals Programming and Parameter Maps Program Parameter PID UP750 UP550 are A B register No Description Setting range Default UP750 UP550 only Code PID Note1 Segment PID group number 1 to 8 Note2 1 115 Note1 The controller uses the 1st group of PID constants when the segment PID group number is larger than the PID group number setup parameter GRP Note2 With UP750 this parameter is used with the 1st and 2nd loop in common IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 5 2 References Related to Program Setup gt Ref 5 10 Ref 5 2 References Related to Program Setup A IMPORTANT Applicable models of this section UP750 UP550 UP35 UT750 UT5 UT400 UT3 UP750 UP550 UP350 None None None None Note Some of the functions below are not available on certain models For more information see those sections This section contains reference information on the following aspects of program setup Refer to this information and change parameters only if necessary 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Selecting Program Start Condition Using the Delayed Start Timer for Programmed Operations Selecting Segment end condition Using the Wait Function Using the Hold Function Changing
341. pond to the setup parameters DP1 or DP2 This contact is selected by registering the l Relay number with an increment of 5000 that corresponds to the DI number of the contact terminal as the DP1 or DP2 setting as explained earlier see Table 3 1 12 Pressing the DISP key on the UP750 s front panel displays the next operating display The following parameters are used Change parameters as explained in the User s Manuals Initial Settings and Parameter Map e Setup parameters Contact Input Registration Parameters DP1 DP2 UP750 Default i Description Setting range I Relay number plus 5000 O Code Note1 DP1 Operating display The settin 0 1141 A g range equals the a3 interruption 1 Note1 range of I Relay numbers not specified each number plus 5000 that DP2 Operating display correspond to the DI numbers 1142 interruption 2 Note of the contact input terminals not specified you want to use Note1 Note1 The I Relay numbers used here are 161 to 168 When the I O expansion module is used the numbers 177 to 192 are also the applicable I Relay numbers For more information on I Relay numbers see Ref 8 1 4 The relationship between the factory set DI numbers and input terminal assignments may differ depending on the UP mode of your controller UP mode IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 3 2 References Rela
342. prioritized PV start STC 1 This section explains about Ramp prioritized PV2 start too With Ramp prioritized PV start operation start is triggered by primary loop PV PV1 or secondary loop PV PV2 The loop not selected as the start condition PV2 if PV1 was selected will start as specified by the PV start condition in the pattern Examples of PV1 ramp start and PV2 ramp start are as follows 1 Example of a soak segment for segment No 2 of the primary loop When ramp prioritized PV1 start is the selected start condition the primary loop ramp is the start trigger The primary loop contains points C1 D1 and E1 PV at those points will vary according to a e The secondary loop program will start at the same time as the primary loop does For example if C1 is the se lected start point for the primary loop program C2 will be that for the secondary loop program Loop 1 program pattern Loop 2 program pattern gt Time SEG1 SEG2 SEG3 SEG4 SEG5S Fig 5 2 2 Example of a soak segment for segment No 2 of the primary loop Program start point is determined by the primary loop PV as follows Try to understand the relationship of a e to program start points C1 D1 and E1 in the above figure PV at program The primary loop s program The secondary loop s program operation start operation start points operation start points a C1 C2 b C1 C2 c C1 C2 d D1 D2 e E1 Start SP E2 Start SP
343. ption Setting range Default D register No Code Code n PO n Pa Preset output 5 0 to 105 0 0 0 See Table2 1 9 n PO Note1 Heating side 5 0 to 105 0 n Oc n 0E Cooling side preset output Cooling side 5 0 to 105 0 0 0 See Table2 1 9 n Oc Note2 Note1 Heating side preset output in heating cooling control mode Note2 The parameter can be displayed in heating cooling control mode Table 2 1 9 D register No list n 1 n 2 n 3 n 4 n 5 n 6 n 7 n 8 ist 2nd ist 2nd 1st 2nd 1st 2nd ist 2nd ist 2nd ist 2nd ist 2nd n PO 320 520 345 545 370 570 395 595 420 620 445 645 470 670 495 695 n Oc 321 521 346 546 371 571 396 596 421 621 446 646 471 671 496 696 IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 2 1 References Related to Control Output gt Ref 2 17 The UT551 can output the manual preset output value when the opration mode is changed from Auto to Manual The control output value is changed to the manual preset output value with a bump at operation mode changing Output A Value Manual preset With bump output value n PO A Run Stop Output A Value Manual preset With bump output value PP y Parameter M MD 1 MPO Manual preset output value Bumpless Parameter M MD 0 Output value bumpless Auto A Auto Manual Fig 2 1
344. put Cc 2 w mA a 0 E O oO g 5 o T gt 3 10 3 O 15 Analog output 3 0 segmental point A3L 20 100 75 50 25 0 Fig 2 1 7 When Parallel mode Output Analog output 3 100 segmental A point asi Analog output 1 100 segmental point A1H Analog output 1 Analog output 1 0 segmental point A1L 0 25 50 75 a 100 Output value before split computation Outline Analog output 2 g lt oO ia Control output 7 terminals for cooling side are used Retransmission output terminals are used Analog output 1 OQ N Control output terminals i are used Analog output 3 The following explains an example of letting Analog OUTPUT 1 terminals 16 and 17 and Analog OUTPUT 3 terminals 14 and 15 present the Parallel mode characteristics of split computations 1 Set the Control Output Type OT1 parameter to 2 This sets the control output to current output 2 Set the Retransmission Output RT1 parameter to 3 This sets the retransmission output to control output retransmission 3 4 5 6 Set the Analog Output 1 100 Segmental Point A1H parameter to 100 Set the Analog Output 1 0 Segmental Point A1L parameter to 25 Set the Analog Output 3 100 Segment
345. put in loop 2 via DO2 1615 D register number Cooling output in loop 2 via DO5 1617 D register number D register and I relay numbers assigned to contact outputs at the factory before shipment The registered numbers of the alarm and other functions assigned to contact output registration parameters DO1 to DO7 are shown below Function Registered number Loop 1 alarm 1 output 5689 I relay number Loop 1 alarm 2 output 5690 I relay number Loop 1 alarm 3 output 5691 I relay number Loop 1 alarm 4 output 5693 I relay number Loop 2 alarm 1 output 5697 I relay number Loop 2 alarm 2 output 5698 I relay number Loop 2 alarm 3 output 5699 I relay number Cooling output in loop 1 via DO3 1607 D register number Cooling output in loop 1 via DO4 1609 D register number Cooling output in loop 2 via DO2 1615 D register number Cooling output in loop 2 via DO5 1617 D register number IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 3 2 References Related to Contact Output gt Ref 3 49 11 Cascade control with two universal inputs UT mode 13 This function is for the UT750 only The contact output functions in this control mode is the same as for cascade control UT mode 4 in Item 4 For more details refer to Item 4 ear
346. r Temperature and Humidity control mode 3 UT750 Digital indicating controller PV sampling period Limitations of controller functions 50 ms the fastest Possible with UT750 00 single loop model with no optional specification when single loop control UT mode 1 is used and none of the following functions are used lt This is given as a rough guide Note SUPER function Heating cooling control e PV input computation Deviation alarm e Sensor grounding alarm e Self diagnostic alarm FAIL output SP rate of change limiter e Output rate of change limiter 100 ms Possible with single loop models UT750 0L when cascade control UP mode 4 is not used Possible with position proportional models UT750 10 This is given as a rough guide Note 200 ms factory set default Possible with single loop models UT750 0L when cascade control is used Possible with single loop models UT750 0L and dual loop models UT750 50 when about less than 50 custom computation modules are used 50 is given as a rough guide Note 500 ms When 50 or more custom computation modules are used 50 is given as a rough guide Note Note To check that the selected PV sampling period is appropriate use the setup parameter SMEC described later e Set the PV sampling period as 200ms when the SUPER 2 function is used Set the PV sampling period as 500ms wh
347. r is exposed to a high degree of disturbance and takes time to settle to normal Even if the PID constants are correctly set hunting remains when the SP value is changed The Super2 hunting preventing function has two modes as shown in Table 2 1 5 You can select either of them by setting the SC parameter accordingly Table 2 1 5 Value of SC Mode Feature Paranictor Stability oriented mode Superior in control stability against a change in the load or SP value 2 This mode supports a wider range of characteristic change compared with the responsiveness oriented mode Responsiveness oriented This mode provides shorter PV tracking time settling time for a change in 3 mode the SP value IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 2 1 References Related to Control Output gt Ref 2 12 You can select either the stability oriented or responsiveness oriented mode by setting the Super code SC accordingly The characteristics of hunting prevention in each of these modes are as shown in Fig 2 1 5 The figure shows examples of the characteristics when PID constants are set for point SP 0 in each mode Each graph shows how the Super2 hunting preventing function works when the SP value is changed to points SP 1 and SP 2 with different SP values The example of characteristics at point SP 2 is given to portray how the function works for a greater chang e inthe SP val
348. rameters user s manual for your controller model e Setup parameters Alarm related Parameters HY1 HY2 HY3 HY4 UP750 lia Description Setting Range Default ilu Code HY1 Instrument alarm 1 hysteresis 0 0 to 100 0 of PV 0 5 of PV input 919 input range span range span The primary loop HY2 Instrument alarm 2 hysteresis 0 0 to 100 0 of PV 0 5 of PV input 920 input range span range span The primary loop HY3 Instrument alarm 3 hysteresis 0 0 to 100 0 of PV 0 5 of PV input 921 input range span range span The primary loop HY4 Instrument alarm 4 hysteresis 0 0 to 100 0 of PV 0 5 of PV input 922 input range span range span The primary loop The figure below is a partial view of the parameter map Use this figure to guide you to the display for configuring the setup parameter discussed above Setup Parameter Map for UP550 UP750 i HY1 4 AL4 HY1 HY2 HY3 HY4 AMD IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 3 4 References Related to Instrument Alarms and Events gt Ref 3 86 lt lt Ref 3 4 References Related to Instrument Alarms and Events gt gt Ref 3 4 4 Using the Sensor Ground Alarm Using the sensor ground alarm is possible with the UP550 or UP750 Note
349. relay terminal for output 1 for the UP550 and time event 6 output is assigned to the relay terminal for output 2 for the UP550 2 only E D register and I register numbers assigned to contact outputs and extended contact outputs set at the factory The registered numbers of the alarm and other functions assigned to contact output registration parameters DO1 to DO7 are shown below Model Registered contact output parameters Function Registered number DO1 PV event 1 output 5705 l relay number DO2 PV event 2 output 5706 l relay number Common to UP750 DOS Instrument alarm 1 output 5689 l relay number and UP550 DO4 Time event 1 output 5129 I relay number DO5 Time event 2 output 5130 I relay number DO6 Time event 3 output 5131 I relay number DO3 Cooling side output in 1607 D register number heating cooling control UP750 only DO4 Cooling side output in 1609 D register number heating cooling control DO7 FAIL output 1613 D register number UP550 only DO7 FAIL output 1611 D register number IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 3 2 References Related to Contact Output gt Ref 3 53 3 4 Cascade control UP mode 4 Contact output Output Type Function DO1 Relay PV event 1 output DO2 Relay PV event 2 output DO3 Relay Instrument alarm 1 output or cooling side output in heating cooling con
350. rend Display with a secondary loop deviation TIP When the controller is UP750 or UP550 The display shows a primary loop deviation DV1 when the controller is set up for cascade control UT mode 4 or cascade control with 2 universal inputs UT mode 13 and in the cascade operation mode and the CAS indicator lamp is lit The display shows a secondary loop deviation DV2 in the secondary loop Local operation mode When the controller is UT750 The display shows a primary loop deviation DV1 when the controller is set up for cascade control UT mode 4 or cascade control with 2 universal inputs UT mode 13 and in the cascade operation mode and the CAS indicator lamp is lit The display shows a secondary loop deviation DV2 in the AUTO automatic or MAN manual operation mode IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 6 1 References Related to Displays gt Ref 6 6 The following procedure explains how to change the contents of a Deviation Trend display 1 Changes can only be made to the trend scale and or trend time of the Loop 1 Deviation Trend display Note This procedure also applies to the trend scale of the Loop 2 Deviation Trend display 120 dots N Trend scale ee ge we Ao ae Trend scale Past gt Present Fig 6 1 2 Deviation Trend scale 2 As shown in the figure above the trend scale of the Loop 1 Deviation Trend display can be set to 0 1 to 1
351. rm 4 output 5693 I relay number DO5 Transistor Loop 2 alarm 1 output Loop 2 alarm 1 output 5697 l relay number or cooling side control in heating 7 cooling control in loop 2 Note Loop 2 alarm 2 output 5698 I relay number DO6 Transistor Loop 2 alarm 2 output Loop 2 alarm 3 output 5699 I relay number DO7 Transistor Loop 2 alarm 3 output Cooling output in loop 1 viaDO3 1607 D register number Note When heating cooing control using relay or transistor output 10 Temperature and humidity control UT mode 12 E For the UT750 only DO Output Type Function DO1 Relay Loop 1 alarm 1 output DO2 Relay Loop 1 alarm 2 output or cooling side control in heating cooling control in loop 2 Note DO3 Relay Loop 1 alarm 3 output or cooling side control in heating cooling control in loop 1 Note DO4 Transistor Loop 1 alarm 4 output or cooling side control in heating cooling control in loop 1 Note DO5 Transistor Loop 2 alarm 1 output or cooling side control in heating cooling control in loop 2 Note DO6 Transistor Loop 2 alarm 2 output DO7 Transistor Loop 2 alarm 3 output Note When heating cooing control using relay or transistor output in control output is selected cooling side output in loop 1 is assigned to DO3 or DO4 and cooling side output in loop 2 is assigned to DO2 or DOS Cooling output in loop 1 via DO4 1609 D register number Cooling out
352. rm hysteresis ON OFF bands for individual alarms can be set within the 0 0 to 100 0 range of PV input range span The following is an example of how to set the Alarm 1 hysteresis HY1 when alarm1 is set as a PV high limit alarm alarm type code 1 In Fig 3 3 1 and 3 3 2 open and close refer to the relay contact status In example below the instrument range RL to RH is set as 0 to1000 C In Fig 3 3 1 HY1 is set at 5 C 0 5 of instrument range span HY1 5 C example HY1 15 C example ple ae beet lt _ lt Closed ON f i Closed ON Open Open I gt T A gt Alarm 1 setpoint i Alarm 1 setpoint 100 C example l 100 C example PV lt Alarm ON lt OFF lt ON lt OFF Alarm ON lt ON OFF OFF Y Y Y Y Time Time Fig 3 3 1 Fig 3 3 2 g If the alarm turns on and off too often set hysteresis band wider to reduce the excessive number of on off actions In Fig 3 3 2 the on off action of the alarm is moderate compared to that in Fig 3 3 1 because of the wider HY1 hysteresis band IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 3 3 References Related to Alarms gt Ref 3 66 The following parameters are used Change parameters as explained in the User s Manuals Initial Settings and Parameter Map e Setup parameters Alarm related Parameters HY1 HY2 HY3 HY4 Note
353. rn end signal is not output when the program operation is forcibly ended by key operation communication or contact input If the several program patterns are linked pattern link the pattern end signal is output when the linked program pattern is ended The contact remains ON for 1 3 or 5 seconds to output the signal The pattern end signal can be used by assigning the controller s internal I relay No 5157 5158 or 5159 to the external output terminals DO1 DO7 refer to Table 5 2 1 It is also possible with the UP750 and the optional I O expansion module Note1 to use the pattern end signal by assigning the controller s internal I relay No 5157 5158 or 5159 to the module output terminals QUTPUT51 OUTPUT58 Note1 For information on the contact I O expansion module see Section Ref 3 2 earlier in this manual A CAUTION The following example only shows how to assign the pattern end signal in UP mode 1 For instruction on how to assign the I relay in other modes see Section Ref 3 2 earlier in this manual With the UP750 and UP550 parameters DO1 DO7 that set output functions in UP mode 1 are assigned to the terminals as shown in the table below To assign the pattern end signal to one of these output terminals it is necessary to change these parameters from their factory set defaults Accordingly check the terminal assignments in the table below and assign pattern end signal output to the indicate
354. rror 257 to 272 Loop1 mode 273 to 288 ON status Loop2 mode 289 to 304 Alarm status 305 to 320 PV event 1 to 8 321 to 352 Time event 1 to 16 353 to 368 External contact input status 369 to 384 Expanded external contact input status 385 to 400 Input error 401 to 416 PV1 error 417 to 432 PV2 error 433 to 448 Calibration parameter error 449 to 464 Loop1 mode 465 to 480 OFF status Loop2 mode 481 to 496 Alarm status 497 to 512 PV event 1 to 8 513 to 544 Time event 1 to 16 545 to 560 External contact input status 561 to 576 Expanded external contact input status 577 to 592 Use not permitted 593 to 608 Current Loop1 PID number same as D0009 Note 1 609 to 624 Current Loop2 PID number same as D0025 Note 1 625 to 656 ias Current program number same as D0042 657 to 672 Timer setting 1 sec 5 sec 10 sec 1 min Note 2 673 to 688 PV2 deviation lamp status Note 3 689 to 704 Alarm output status same as D0036 705 to 720 PV event output status same as D0049 721 to 784 User area Note 4 User write read area Note1 Four bit information using hexadecimals 0000 for 0 0010 for 2 0011 for 3 to 0111 for 7 and 1000 for 8 The least significant bit of four bits corresponds to the last digit in the relay number Note2 The timer settings 1 5 10 or 60 sec are only applicable to l relay Note3 The status of the lamps on the front panel lit when ON 1 unlit when OFF 0 Note4 The l r
355. rs and relays gt Ref 8 17 Table 8 1 5 2 3 UT450 UT420 D register Map 2 3 OPERATION 2 IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 8 1 Outline of Registers and relays gt Ref 8 18 Table 8 1 5 3 3 UT450 UT420 D register Map 3 3 CMLP CONF UTMD No 1001 No 10514 No 1101 No 1151 No a No 1251 IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 8 1 Outline of Registers and relays gt Ref 8 19 UT350 UT320 D register Map Table 8 1 6 1 4 UT350 UT320 D register Map 1 4 PROCESS PROGRAM MODE PAR OPERATI ON 1 OPERATI ON 2 USR PY No 0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 1 A M 1 SP 2 3 4 CSP 5 SR 6 iP 7 SPNO 1 1 8 1D 9 10 11 ALM 1 MR 12 13 14 1 Pc 15 C RSP 1 lc 16 1 Dc 17 MOUTH 18 MOUTC 1 DB 19 1 RP 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 2 SP 27 28 29 30 31 A1 2 P 32 A2 2 l 33 A3 2 D 34 36 2 MR 37 PCCH Note 38 PCCL Note 39 2 Pc 40 2 lc 41 AT 2 Dc 42 SC 43 BS 2 DB 44 FL 2 RP 45 UPR 46 DNR 47 48 49 50 ORB C is read only register is the User area Note The codes PCCH and PCCL are used only with UT351 and UT321 IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref
356. rse When UP750 UP550 UT750 Reverse action 257 n DR DR action switching REVERSE Reverse action UP750 UP550 UT750 When UP35 Note2 DIRECT Direct action REVERSE or UT300 e When UT5O00 UT400 UT500 UT400 RVS Note3 RVS Reverse action UT3ODO UP350 0 DIR Direct action e When UT3SODO UP35 0 Reverse action 1 Direct action Note1 n 1 to 8 The number indicates the number of PID group Note2 This parameter cannot be displayed when heating cooling control mode Note3 The D register numbers are shown in the Table 2 1 1 except for UP350 UT300 Table 2 1 1 1st forloop 1 2nd for loop 2 UT400 has no loop 2 n 1 n 2 n 3 n 4 n 5 n 6 n 7 n 8 1st 2nd ist 2nd 1st 2nd ist 2nd ist 2nd ist 2nd ist 2nd ist 2nd n DR 313 513 338 538 363 563 388 588 413 613 438 638 463 663 488 688 IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 2 1 References Related to Control Output gt Ref 2 4 lt lt Ref 2 1 References Related to Control Output gt gt Ref 2 1 2 Selecting PID Control Mode According to the Operating Condition Determining whether or not a change in the target setpoint involves control output bump With UP and UT series controllers you can select between two types of PID control modes These control mo
357. s E21A and E22A to be able to use them In order to allocate three or more local events to output terminals 1 specify the DO numbers of output terminals to be used 2 select the numbers of desired local events from E21A to E28A and 3 register l relay numbers each being incremented by 5000 that correspond to the allocated local events For information on how to register the l relay numbers see Ref 3 2 2 Changing Contact Output Functions for the UP750 and UP550 In addition rewire the controller as required according to the output terminal numbers you specified Local events and PV events share the same l relay numbers In addition the l relay numbers used for the statuses of these events are defined as 113 to 122 For more information on the I relay numbers see Table 8 1 11 in Ref 8 1 4 l relay Outline and l relay Map Note that the relay numbers used for PV events are shared by local events Table 3 4 7 Terminal Number DO Number Factory set Assignment Output Type 6 DO1 PV event 1 output local event 1 Relay Ta 5 00 Do2 OO PV event 2 output local event 2 Relay es E 4 Do Instrument alarm output Relay or cooling side control output Note 7 Commonterminal forDO1t0D03 eee i Do4 Timeevent 1 output 00000 Transistor or cooling side control output Note Bee Do5 Time event 2 output ts Transistor BR DOO i SOC Time event 3 output Ct Transistor BE DOP Time ev
358. s carry out the following steps For UP750 UP550 UT750 UT550 UT551 and UT520 Here we explain how to display the parameter setting display and to change the parameter values Before carrying out these operations be sure to refer to the User s Manuals Initial Settings and Parameter Map of the controller The parameter map is very helpful in finding the path to the setting display for a particular parameter 1 Referring to the User s Manual above display the operating parameter main menu LP1 Note1 Then display the submenu PAR Note1 If the UP UT mode has been set for using loop 2 or the secondary loop also set the corresponding parameters under the main menu LP2 in the same way 2 Press the key 3 times to display the PV input bias parameter BS Depends on the controller mode Pressing the key one more time displays the PV input filter parameter FL 3 In each of these parameter setting displays adjust the parameter value using the 4 J keys then press the key to register it Main sens Parameter map UT550 UT520 Operating display k SET3S
359. s Refer to the n Dc Note6 Table 4 1 2 n He Cooling side ON OFF 0 0 to 100 0 of 0 5 of PV Refer to the n Hc control hysteresis PV input range span input range span Table 4 1 2 Note6 n dh Dead band Note7 In heating cooling control 3 0 Refer to the n DB 100 0 to 50 0 Table 4 1 2 In position proportional control 1 0 to 10 0 n Pa Preset output Heating side 5 0 to 105 0 of 0 0 Refer to the n PO preset out control output MV Table 4 1 2 in heating cooling control n 0E Cooling side preset out 5 0 to 105 0 of 0 0 Refer to the n Oc in heating cooling control Note6 control output MV Table 4 1 2 Note1 The prefix n in the table above represents the number of each of the parameters such as target setpoints and their associate PID constants listed in the table Since a maximum of eight target setpoints are available with each of the UT450 and UT420 n 1 to 8 holds true Note2 Not shown for on off control however the parameter is shown for the on off control mode of heating cooling control Note3 If the heating side proportional band is set to 0 0 in heating cooling control the heating side goes into on off control Likewise if the cooling side proportional band is set to 0 0 the cooling side goes into on off control Note4 SD stands for Shut Down It is configurable when the control output is 4 to 20 mA and the controller is in manual operation At shutdown the control output is se
360. s and Parameter Map of the controller The parameter map is very helpful in finding the path to the setting display for a particular parameter f Referring to the User s Manual above display the setup parameter main menu CMLP Then display the submenu AIN 2 Press the key once to display the parameter A BS1 Note1 Adjust the parameter value using the 4 keys then press the key to register it Note1 A BS1 is the parameter for UP750 UP550 and UT750 BS1 is the parameter for UT550 UT551 and UT520 3 Press the key once to display the parameter A FL1 Note2 Set the Analog input 1 filter if necessary Note2 A FL1 is the parameter for UP750 UP550 and UT750 FL1 is the parameter for UT550 UT551 and UT520 4 After the above operation repeat the following operation if necessary e Display the parameter setting display which you want to set the value ex A BS2 e Adjust the parameter value using the 4 amp keys then press the key TIP to register it Setting display Operation parameters A BS1 FE UTMD Descriptions of other parameters that belong to submenu AIN such
361. s as follows e Program Parameter Junction Code Parameter JC UP750 iii Description Setting range Default eye Eee only Code JC Junction code INSERT 0 140 DELETE Note note Note 0 Switching for continuation Note Refer to the Ref 5 2 References Related to Program setup for the other functions of this UC parameter IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 5 3 Handy Features for Creating and Editing Programs gt Ref 5 58 To add or delete the segment carry out the operation shown below 1 Refer to the Parameter Map and Program Parameter Map in the user s Manual First display the operating parameter main menu PROG then press the key to display the program parameter setting display Submenu LOC will be displayed 2 And then press 4 keys to display the _vr750 uPss0 Parameter Map submenu PRG som Jado PRG R ioe gt EDIT J a nes i aaa a e ee N i programming a sub menu CED Eeoae aE em reo 3 Press the key one time to display the Seas eg F Be EBS ee Se P parameter PTN ENT
362. s assigned to contact outputs at the factory before shipment The registered numbers of the alarm and other functions assigned to contact output registration parameters DO1 to DO7 are shown below Ref 3 48 Function Registered number Alarm 1 output 5689 I relay number Alarm 2 output Alarm 3 output 5690 I relay number 5691 I relay number Alarm 4 output 5693 I relay number FAIL output 1609 D register number D register and I relay numbers assigned to contact outputs at the factory before shipment in control output is selected cooling side output in loop 1 is assigned to DO3 or DO4 and cooling side output in loop 2 is assigned to DO2 or DOS oe Output Type uneton EENT The registered numbers of the alarm and other Say OORT a Ar L OUIpU functions assigned to contact output registration DO2 Relay Loop 1 alarm 2 output parameters DO1 to DO7 are shown below or cooling side control in heating cooling control in loop 2 Note Function Registered number DO3 Relay Loop 1 alarm 3 output Loop 1 alarm 1 output 5689 I relay number or cooling side control in heating cooling control in loop 1 Note Loop 1 alarm 2 output 5690 I relay number DO4 Transistor Loop 1 alarm 4 output Loop 1 alarm 3 output 5691 I relay number or cooling side control in heating cooling control in loop 1 Note Loop 1 ala
363. s greater than the SP value Inversely it increases if the PV value is smaller than the SP value see Fig 2 1 1 below Reverse Action Direct Action Condition PV gt SP PV lt SP PV gt SP PV lt SP ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF output status Current output Decreases Increases Increases Decreases Time proportional The ON state time The ON state time The ON state time The ON state time output decreases increases increases decreases Direction of Reverse Action Direct Action change in control output SP value SP value 20mA 20mA PV value Increase Increase Output Output value value L L Decrease Decrease 4mA PV value 4mA Minimum Maximum Minimum Maximum PV value is smaller PV value is greater PV value is smaller PV value is greater Fig 2 1 1 Switching between Direct and Reverse Actions IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 2 1 References Related to Control Output gt Ref 2 3 The following parameters are used Change parameters as explained in the User s Manuals Initial Settings and Parameter Map e Operating parameters PID related Parameters n DR UP750 UT5 UP35 UP550 UT4000 UT3 UT750 Description Setting range Default D register No Code Code Code Note1 Note1 n DR n gdr dr Direct reve
364. s many as 16 time events are available for each program pattern For each segment however you are allowed to set a maximum of only eight time events including PV events since there are only eight parameters EV1 to EV8 available for this setting Time segment is a function that turns on a given contact when a preset time expires after the start of program operation Information that a time event carries is retained even after the segment for which the event was set comes to an end You can set the points of time at which the time event turns on and off both for the same segment and other segments SEGI SEG2 SEG3 SEG4 SEGS5 Loop 2 l program pattern N i TSP2 Loop 1 program pattern gt TSPn Target setpoint Time event 1 f On time Off time Time event 2 J L On time Off time Time event 3 SO E E ee ee eee i i DA On time Off time Fig 3 4 6 Example of Program Patterns and Time Events Set for Dual loop Type UP750 IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 3 4 References Related to Instrument Alarms and Events gt Ref 3 99 UP550 UP750 s Parameters for Setting Time Events To change the settings of these parameters see the Initial Settings user s manual or the Parameters user s manual for your controller model Program parameters Parameters for Setting the Event Action EVn ONn and OFFn UP750 UP550 sot B Register No De
365. s set to STOP state preset output value POUT 0 control output is actually turned off after the cycle time in progress elapses When turning off heater in STOP state wait for one or more of cycle times after the operation is stopped Heater burnout alarm may occur if turning off heater here Cycle time CT f E When turning off heater On i in STOP state Control 130ms E turn off here output lt 7 o gt I One or more of cycle times Control i output 75 x 0 value i RUN state gt STOP state However preset output value POUT 0 IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt Ref 3 4 lt Ref 3 4 References Related to Instrument Alarms and Events gt Ref 3 77 References Related to Instrument Alarms and Events A IMPORTANT Information in this reference applies to the following models UP750 UP550 UP35 UT750 UTS UT400 UT3 UP750 If your controller is a UT series model see Ref 3 3 References Related to Alarms UP500 UP3 N A N A N A N A Note Some of the functions discussed below may be limited to models with a specific suffix and or option code Each section will expressly refer to this limitative condition where it applies This section contains refere
366. s the E5 key time and PVT AL3 i again to display the parameter HY1 E RHY oop Adjust the parameter value using the vt eee BA keys then press the C key AY 1 to register it HY2 DY2 HY3 Ova HY4 T IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 3 3 References Related to Alarms gt Ref 3 67 lt lt Ref 3 3 Reference Related to Alarms gt gt Ref 3 3 3 Using the alarm timer Control stable signal event Alarm timer function can be used with the UT750 UT550 UT520 UT551 UT450 and UT420 The alarm timer notifies the operator when PV is stable The timer starts counting the moment that PV attains the target setpoint or is within that hysteresis range Then when the set time elapses alarm 1 relay output turns ON To use the alarm timer the AL1 setup param eter that determines the type of alarm is set to 21 to 24 Timer time is set with the 1 A1 operating parameter Timer output turns OFF in the following cases When power is turned OFF When operation stops When target setpoint No is changed to any number other than 1 During remote control When timer time is set to OFF E The alarm timer can only be set for alarm 1 It cannot be set for alarms 2 to 4 Example of the alarm timer operation 1 The ON OFF operation in upward detection is shown below in Fig 3 3 3 SP Alarm HY ON Alarm output OFF Alarm lamp
367. s the cycle time IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 3 4 References Related to Instrument Alarms and Events gt Ref 3 87 Set the on off rate upper limit ORH and on off rate lower limit ORL so that the range of the on off rate is wider than the range of steady state control output values as shown in Fig 3 4 5 In addition set the on off rate detec tion band close to the target setpoint This is because the controller begins calculating the on off rate when the PV input value falls within the on off rate detection band Setting the band at a larger value forces the sensor ground alarm function to work before the output stabilizes This means the sensor ground alarm turns on very frequently On off rate detection band ORB On off rate detection band ORB Fig 3 4 5 On off rate lower limit ORL Sensor ground alarm output Target setpoint a PV input value S On off rate moving average of control output _ The sensor ground alarm turns on because the on off rate has exceeded its upper limit Parameters used to operate the sensor ground alarm are summarized below You must configure two or more different types of parameter To change the settings of these parameters see the Initial Settings user s manual or the Parameters user s manual for your controller model e Setup parameters Alarms related Parameters
368. sage 2 Register numbers for registering message 3 MG4 D0831 to D0840 an ey Register numbers for registering message 4 Messages are displayed in the following way A message appears when the controller is showing an operating display and the status of the contact input terminal where the message is registered changes from OFF to ON The four maximum messages correspond to the setup parameters MG1 to MG4 For example if the message text registered with the MG1 is POWER DOWN and for some reason the status of the assigned contact changes from OFF to ON the message POWER DOWN appears on the display This contact is selected by registering the I Relay number with an increment of 5000 that corresponds to the DI number of the contact terminal as the MG1 setting as explained earlier see Table 3 1 7 For example if you use terminals 19 and 20 as shown in the Fig 3 1 7 register 5161 the I Relay number of DI1 plus 5000 as the MG1 setting Pressing the DISP key on the UT750 s front panel clears the message from display Showing an operating parameter setting display by holding down the key for more than 3 seconds on the display also clears the message Message 1 created with the LL100 tool
369. scription Setting Range Default Notet Code EVn Event number 0 or 1 to 16 Note3 0 unregistered Note2 ONn On time of time event OFF or 0 00 to 99 59 OFF unused 116 to 139 Note2 Hour minute or minute second Note4 OFFn Off time of time event OFF or 0 00 to 99 59 OFF unused Note2 Hour minute or minute second Note4 Note1 These parameters are supported by B registers 116 to 139 Note2 n denotes the event number and takes a value from 1 to 8 meaning there are eight events The number is the total sum including both PV events and time events Note3 0 means no events are used registered To use PV events be sure to set a value from 1 to 16 to specify the event number n 1 to 8 For example specify EV1 as PV event 1 by setting the EVn parameter to 1 For PV events use a value from 21 to 28 Note4 To set the time unit hour minute or minute second use the setup parameter TMU The time unit is hour minute if TMU is 0 factory set default or minute second if TMU is 1 For more information on the time unit see Ref 5 1 1 Selecting the Segment Setting Method Time Setting Method or Ramp Grade Setting Method IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 3 4 References Related to Instrument Alarms and Events gt Ref 3 1 00 2 When the Controller Is Model UP35 1 If your controller is Model UP350 you can set a pair
370. se a maximum of eight target setpoints SP only four of them are made available however when the controller is shipped from the factory To change the number of target setpoints set the GRP setup parameter to a desired value from 1 to 8 For each target setpoint you can configure parameters see the paragraphs below such as PID constants that have been exclusively assigned to that target setpoint To do this select a PID group number appropriate for each target setpoint number using the operating parameter PID PID parameter number The paragraphs below list the parameters discussed here The main points of the procedure for setting target setpoints are as follows e Determine the number of target setpoints using the parameter shown in paragraph 1 below e Select the PID group to be set for each target setpoint using the parameter shown in paragraph 2 e Actually set the values of parameters such as PID constants using the parameters shown in paragraph 3 1 The following parameters are used to change the numbers of target set points PID group number Change parameters as explained in the User s Manuals Initial Settings and Parameter Map e Setup parameters Control Action related Parameters UT450 nae Description Setting range Default co Code rP PID group number 1to8 4 940 GRP numbers of Target SPs Note1 Note1 Only four target setpoints are made available when the controller
371. segment while the program is running This section describes how to operate the advance function Operation of the advance function for the UP750 and UP550 is different from that for the UP350 The following shows operation of the advance function for the UP750 and UP550 For that for the UP350 consult page Ref 5 38 Use the advance function as appropriate for your needs 1 For the UP750 and UP550 A Note The advance function is set by key input external contact input or communication command For external contact input see Ref 3 1 References Related to Contact Input earlier in this manual For the communication function see the separate GREEN Series Communications User s Manual The advance function can be used by key input as follows Press the key on the operating display to highlight ADV ON Next press the key For more information on key input see the User s Manual Operations Applying the advance function to the currently running segment advances the program to the next segment However operation differs as follows depending on the operating state of the segment E f the advance function is applied during any segment other than the last segment of the program pattern the program advances to the next segment regardless of the JC setting E If the advance function is applied in the last segment of the program pattern the programs acts according to the JC setting For example i
372. set default 1 e Prohibits any parameter setting from being changed When 1 is selected no change is allowed to any of the operating and setup parameters only viewing the parameters is allowed however In this case it is only possible to change the LOCK parameter Selecting OFF turns the keylock function OFF Prohibits operating parameters from being viewed The operating parameter setting display is not shown so settings cannot be changed The setup parameter setting display can be viewed however by holding down the key for more than 3 seconds when an operating display is being shown If a password has been set a password verification display will appear If the correct password was entered the setup parameter setting display appears You can now change the setup parameter setting Disables the key You are not allowed to stop program operation with the front panel Disables the rae 1 key Prohibits program 1 from starting Use this option to prevent program 1 from starting by mistake in an application where for example only program 2 needs to be routinely used Disables the key Prohibits program 1 from starting Use this option to prevent program 1 from starting by mistake in an application where for example only program 2 needs to be routinely used Disables both the and keys Prohibits program operation Prohibits program 1 parameter settings from being changed Alt
373. set to OFF the controller operates in the regular PID control mode The code is set to OFF when the controller is shipped from the factory If you set the code to 1 the Super overshoot prevention function works For more information on the Super functions see Ref 2 1 5 A CAUTION e Use Super2 only for PID or PI control The function does not work in any of the following control modes On off control P control control using the proportional band term only PD control control using the proportional band and derivative terms only and heating cooling control e Do not use the Super 2 function for the fast response process such as flowrate or pressure control If you will use the Super2 function for PID control also use auto tuning together with the function to maximize the function s capability After auto tuning set the Super code SC to either 2 or 3 Super2 is effective when used in the following cases The Super2 function is designed to prevent hunting by means of a phase compensation block built in the PID computation block see Fig 2 1 4 below Switch for turning on off PV Super 2 function oka SP o gt Phase compensation block PID computation block gt MV Fig 2 1 4 Super2 is effective when used in the following cases e There is a frequent change in the load e The controlle
374. setpoints are available with each of the UT35 holds true Note4 Shown only for heating cooling control Note5 Shown only for heating cooling control Table 4 1 3 D register number list n 1 n 2 n 3 n 4 n P 306 331 356 381 n l 307 332 357 382 n D 308 333 358 383 n MR 311 336 361 386 n Pc 314 339 364 389 n lc 315 340 365 390 n De 316 341 366 391 n DB 318 343 368 392 n RP 319 344 494 IM 05J01B02 01E and UT320 n 1 to 4 Note2 Not shown for on off control however the parameter is shown for the on off control mode of heating cooling control Note3 If the heating side proportional band is set to 0 0 in heating cooling control the heating side goes into on off control Likewise if the cooling side proportional band is set to 0 0 the cooling side goes into on off control 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 4 1 References Related to Target Setpoints gt Ref 4 10 lt lt Ref 4 1 Reference Related to Target Setpoints gt gt Ref 4 1 2 Selecting PID selection method Target SP selection Zone PID or Selection by specified PID number The following four method of PID selection are available with each of the UT750 UT5 UT4 0 and UT3 You can select either of these four methods using the ZON program parameter e T
375. shown in the following example Here we explain how to display the parameter setting display and to change the parameter values Before carrying out these operations be sure to refer to the User s Manuals Initial Settings and Parameter Map of the controller The parameter map is very helpful in finding the path to the setting display for a particular parameter de Referring to the User s Manual above UP750 UP550 Parameters Map display the setup parameter main menu e PARA rans py dy Then display the submenu CTL 2 Press the key time and again to display the parameter ZON Adjust the parameter value to 0 or 1 using the La J keys then press the key to Register it For example when you want to select Segment PID adjust the parameter value to 0 and register it by pressing the key AMD RHY RDV This completes the setting operation If other settings are unnecessary return to operating display IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 5 1 References Related to Segment Operation gt Ref 5 8 E When zone PID control is selected Zone PID control automatically switches PID settings according to PV Regardless whether the program is p
376. shown in the table where default numbers are registered This specifies the terminal that will execute the function With operation mode switching the auto mode is selected when the contact is ON and the manual mode is selected when the contact is OFF With control mode switching the remote mode is selected when the contact is ON and the local mode is selected when the contact is OFF With STOP RUN status switching the STOP status is selected when the contact is ON and the RUN status is selected when the contact is OFF With cascade control use separate contact input terminals to set the cascade auto and manual modes Each mode is executed when the state of the contact input changes from OFF to ON It does not matter what the contact s state ON OFF was prior to the change The UT551 can switch mode between auto and manual in the control modes other than cascage control Note 6 Parameters SP 0 to SP 3 correspond to bits 0 to 3 with which a selection is made from eight choices of target setpoints see the table below When the controller is shipped from the factory contact input DI3 terminal number 40 is set to SP 0 Likewise D14 is set to SP 1 DI5 to SP 2 and DI6 to SP 3 as shown below SP 0 bit 0 SP 1 bit 1 SP 2 bit 2 SP 3 bit 3 Target setpoints lt DI3 gt lt DIl4 gt lt DI5 gt lt DI6 gt TSP 2 SP OFF ON OFF OFF 3 SP ON ON OFF OFF 4 SP OFF OFF
377. signed to that target setpoint To do this select a PID group number appropriate for each target setpoint number using the operating parameter PID PID parameter number The paragraphs below list the parameters discussed here The main points of the procedure for setting target setpoints are as follows e Select the PID group to be set for each target setpoint using the parameter shown in paragraph 1 below e Actually set the values of parameters such as PID constants using the parameters shown in paragraph 2 1 The following parameter is used to specify the PID group Change parameter as explained in the User s Manuals Initial Settings and Parameter Map e Operating parameters UT35 ne Description Setting range Default nil Code Pa PID parameter MENU or 1Gr to 4Gr MENU No D register PID display number No IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 4 1 References Related to Target Setpoints gt Ref 4 9 2 The following parameters are used to set the value of the following parameters such as PID constants Change parameter as explained in the User s Manuals Initial Settings and Parameter Map e Operating parameters UT35 Mise Description Setting range Default oo Code n F Promotional band Heating side 0 1 to 999 9 5 0 Refer to the n P Note1 proportional band in heating cooling control Note2
378. signments Default Settings for Individual Control Modes UT Modes 1 Single loop control UT mode 1 E UT750 DO Output Type Function DO1 Relay Alarm 1 output DO2 Relay Alarm 2 output DO3 Relay Alarm 3 output or cooling side output in heating cooling control Note DO4 Transistor Alarm 4 output or cooling side output in heating cooling control Note DO5 Transistor Alarm 3 output DO6 Transistor Alarm 4 output DO7 Transistor Not assigned Note When heating cooing control using relay or transistor output in control output is selected cooling side output is assigned to DO3 or DO4 E UT550 UT520 UT551 DO Output Type Function DO1 Relay Alarm 1 output DO2 Relay Alarm 2 output DO3 Relay Alarm 3 output Note2 DO4 Note1 Transistor Alarm 4 output Note2 DO5 Note1 Transistor Not assigned DO6 Note1 Transistor Not assigned DO7 Note1 Transistor FAIL output Note1 Used for the UT55 1 UT55 3 UT551 LIC and UT551 OD only Note2 If the control output selects a transistor output alarm 4 output is assigned to the relay terminal for output 1 and alarm 3 output is also assigned to the relay terminal for output 2 UT550 20 only D register and I relay numbers assigned to contact outputs at the factory before shipment The registered numbers of the alarm and other functions assigned to contact output reg
379. sistor output alarm 4 output is assigned to the relay terminal for output 1 and alarm 3 output is also assigned to the relay terminal for output 2 UT550 2 only UT520 only D register and I relay numbers assigned to contact outputs at the factory before shipment The registered numbers of the alarm and other functions assigned to contact output registration parameters DO1 to DO7 are shown below Model Function Registered number Common to UT750 UT550 UT551 and UT520 Alarm 1 output 5689 I relay number Alarm 2 output Alarm 3 output 5690 I relay number l relay number Alarm 4 output 5693 l relay number Cooling output 5691 D 1607 D register number via DO3 UT750 only Cooling output 1609 D register number via DO4 FAIL output 1613 D register number UT550 UT551 and FAIL output 1611 D register number UT520 only IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 3 2 References Related to Contact Output gt Ref 3 47 6 Loop control with PV switching UT mode 6 m UT750 D register and I relay numbers assigned to DO Output Type Function contact outputs at the factory before shipment DO1 Relay Alarm 1 output The registered numbers of the alarm and oth
380. sured input attains the wait zone the wait state is changed to the operating state and the program advances to the next segment During the wait state the program timer is stopped therefore the time event EVn value is held SEG n SEG n 1 i n 1 to 98 Ramp to target setpoint i gt E Wait zone Ta Wait zone The moment that the PV attains the wait zone the program advances stopped here to the next segment SEG n 1 me gt lt me EVn Ao Wait time EVn 1 Fig 5 2 17 Example of wait operation when the measured input attains the wait zone before the wait time elapses IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 5 2 References Related to Program Setup gt Ref 5 29 Operation when the measured input does not attain the wait zone within the wait time If the wait time elapses before the measured input attains the wait zone the wait state is changed to the operating state and the program advances to the next segment the moment that the wait time elapses This happens even if the measured input has not attained the wait zone SEG n n 1 to 98 Ramp to target setpoint eae gt E Wait zone Wait zone Though PV has not attained the wait zone the program advances to the next segment SEG n 1 the moment that the wait time elapses Z IN Program timer PV stopped here gt it gt lt EVn fo EVn 1 Wait time Fig 5 2 18 Example of wait operation when
381. switch between auto and manual modes with the front panel am key The following parameters are used Change parameters as explained in the User s Manuals Initial Settings and Parameter Map e Setup parameters Security related Parameters LOCK UT35 wate Description Setting range Default D register No Code Lact Key lock OFF No key lock turns the OFF 1036 LOCK key lock function OFF 1 to 3 See the Table 7 1 1 IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 7 1 References Related to Security gt Ref 7 4 2 When the Model Is UT450 or UT420 The keylock function of the UT450 and UT420 works as described in the table below Two or more options of the keylock function can be selected using security related setup parameters Table 7 1 2 Keylock Function Options Keylock Function Option Description A J keylock Locks the A keys on the controller front panel to prohibit their operation However the password setting or the following security related parameters setting operation is possible AM key lock e Locks the am key on the controller front panel to prohibit switching between auto and manual modes Remote Local The R L operating parameter which is used to switch between remote and local modes is not shown mode lock This prohibits you from switching bet
382. switching Prd Bit 3 of PID number seting on piae switching Q not specified 1177 PN 3 lt Status switching gt do not use the status s switching and the rising edge switching at the same r En Remote switching time 0 not specified 1178 REM lt Rising dege switching gt Note PID number selection by LE L Local switching muy Secu a 0 not specified 1180 LCL lt Rising dege switching gt setup parameter ZON 3 IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 3 1 References Related to Contact Input gt Ref 3 12 Note1 The I Relay numbers used here are 161 to 168 DI numbers for contact input terminals are specified by these I Relay numbers each of which is incremented by 5000 For more information on I Relay numbers see Ref 8 1 4 The relationship between the factory set DI numbers and input terminal assignments may differ depending on the UT mode of your controller Always refer to the terminal wiring diagrams in the Installation user s manual to verify the factory set terminal assignments of each UT mode Note2 Note3 Note4 Note 5 The range of I Relay numbers each number plus 5000 equals the setting range DI DI2 DIS DI4 DI5 DI6 DI7 DI8 5161 5162 5163 5164 5165 5166 5167 5168 lt Register an I Relay number with an increment of 5000 with the parameter e g A M of a function you want to use as in the example
383. t Alarm and PID related Parameters Heating cooling control is not provided for the UT551 with embedded Ethernet UT750 UT5 Description Setting range Default oe Code Code n SP OP Target setpoint 1 0 0 t0100 0 of 0 0 of Refer to the Note1 n SP PV input range PV input range Table 4 1 1 n Al fin A l Alarm 1 setpoint Note2 When PV alarm is used n A1 0 0 to 100 0 of PV input range 5 A 2 n A2 a Ag Alarm 2 setpoint Note2 When Deviation alarmiis pd ne Ti is n A2 used 100 0 to 100 0 of ete aise athe n A3 AF Alarm 3 setpoint Note2 PA inputrange span When Deviation Table 4 1 1 n A3 When Timer alarm is used n A4 AY Alarm 4 setpoint Note2 for alarm 1 only is used reir n A4 00 00 to 99 59 n P Pp Promotional band Heating side 0 1 to 999 9 5 0 Refer to the n P proportional band In heating cooling control Table 4 1 1 in heating cooling control Note3 0 0 to 999 9 Note4 n I acl Integral time Heating side OFF or 1 to 6000 sec 240 seconds Refer to the n 1 integral time in heating cooling Table 4 1 1 control Note3 n D n d Derivative time Heating side OFF or 1 to 6000 sec 60 seconds Refer to the n D derivative time Table 4 1 1 in heating cooling control Note3 n OH n oHt Output high limit Heating side 5 0 to 105 0 100 0 Refer to the n OH output high limit Heating side limiter in Table 4 1 1 in
384. t lt bit 4 gt lt bit 5 gt lt bit 6 gt 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 3 1 References Related to Contact Input gt Ref 3 31 The UP750 is designed so that functions assigned to its contact input terminals can be changed In addition functions can be assigned to the terminals of an optional I O expansion module Select the desired contact input terminal with which a function predefined for each setup parameter contact input registration parameter is executed To do this register the I Relay number corresponding to the terminal s DI number with the setup parameter whose you want to see Use the following parameter map to reassign terminal functions as necessary A CAUTION If you change any of the contact input terminal assignments check that the new assignment agrees with the current wiring If necessary rewire the terminals Setup Parameter Map OK an LOOP1 j LOOP2 lFor example when you want to use the DI2 terminal number 18 for the function of program operation starting call up the parameter PROG setting display and set the value to 5162 The 5162 means I relay number of DI2 plus 5000 e Refer to the Table 3 1 12
385. t 0 0 of PV input range span PV input range span for deviation alarms 5 0 to 105 0 for lt lt lt 100 0 for upper limit output value alarms 0 0 for lower limit Note1 These parameters are supported by B registers 116 to 139 Note2 n denotes the event number and takes a value from 1 to 8 meaning there are eight events The number is the total sum including both PV events and time events Note3 0 means no events are used registered To use PV events be sure to set a value from 21 to 28 to specify the event number n 1 to 8 For example specify EV1 as PV event 1 by setting the EVn parameter to 21 For time events use a value from 1 to 16 Note4 For more information on the setting range see Alarm Type Code in Table 3 4 4 Note5 These setpoints are for the secondary loop or loop 2 See Alarm Type Code in Table 3 4 4 for more information on the setting range IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 3 4 References Related to Instrument Alarms and Events gt Ref 3 93 2 When the Controller Is Model UP35 You can separately set two events each for program pattern 1 and program pattern 2 The types of PV event available with the UP350 are summarized in Table 3 4 5 Use the nAL1 nAL2 nA1 and nA2 program parameters shown in the table to change the type of PV event or set its value Confirm the factory set values and change them or set new values only if n
386. t lt Ref 3 4 References Related to Instrument Alarms and Events gt gt Ref 3 4 2 Setting the Operating Conditions of Instrument Alarms Setting the operating conditions of instrument alarms is possible with the UP550 or UP750 There are the following three operating conditions alarm modes for instrument alarms Use the parameter AMD to select from the alarm mode options as shown below The instrument alarm is always effective enabled This is the factory set option The instrument alarm is ineffective disabled when the controller is at a stop RESET mode The instrument alarm is ineffective disabled when the controller is at a stop RESET mode or in manual operation MAN mode The parameter used here is summarized below To change the settings of these parameters see the Initial Settings user s manual or the Parameters user s manual for your controller model e Setup parameters Alarms related Parameters AMD UP750 oe Description Setting Range Default vila Code AMD Alarm mode 0 Always effective 0 923 1 Ineffective during stop of operation RESET mode 2 Ineffective during stop of operation RESET mode or manual operation MAN mode The figure below is a partial view of the parameter map Use this figure to guide you to the display for configuring the setup parameter discussed above Setup Parameter Map for UP550 UP750 OK
387. t 4 RP lt 5 RP lt 6 RP Table 4 1 4 Zone PID reference point parameter nRP D register numbers list n 1 Note1 n 2 Note1 n 3 n 4 n 5 n 6 1st 2nd Note2 ist 2nd 1st 2nd 1st 2nd 1st 2nd ist 2nd n RP 319 519 344 544 369 569 394 594 419 619 444 644 Note1 With UT350 or UT320 numbers of n are 1 or 2 only Note2 The D registers for the loop 2 can be used with UT750 or UT5 only IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 4 1 References Related to Target Setpoints gt Ref 4 12 Setting Hysteresis for Zone Switching If you have selected the zone PID method you can set hysteresis for zone switching To do this use the RYH parameter The factory set hysteresis is 0 5 of the PV input span In the case of the UT750 and UT5 the RYH parameter belongs to the same submenu CTL as the ZON and n RP parameters discussed earlier If the model is UT4L0 this parameter belongs to setup parameters related to control operation If the model is UT3 hysteresis for zone switching is fixed at 0 5 of the PV input span The following parameters are used Change parameters as explained in the User s Manuals Initial Settings and Parameter Map e Setup parameters Control Action related Parameters RHY
388. t Toc gt lt Ref 2 2 References Related to Retransmission Output gt Ref 2 22 TIP1 The retransmission range can be represented with the PV input range scaled with RTH1 Max value and RTL1 Min value TIP2 The retransmission range can be represented with the PV input range scaled with RTH2 Max value and RTL2 Min value When UT5 TH1 TH2 TL1 and TL2 are used TIP3 The setpoints 8 to 17 can be set for UT551 only However the UT551 with embedded Ethernet dose not have heating cooling control TIP4 When opening or closing a valve by key operation in manual mode opration the transmission output becomes 5 0 2 When the Model Is UP350 UT400 or UT3L1 The type of retransmission output signal is changed using the following setup parameter Change the parameter settings as explained in the Initial Settings or Parameters user s manual that comes with your controller e Setup parameters Retransmission Output Parameters RET UP35 UT4000 oe D register UT3 Description Setting range Default No 9 Code r EL Retransmission OFF or 1 to 4 Note1 1 1013 RET output 1 type Note1 See the below Table 2 2 2 for the meaning of the setting values Table 2 2 2 Parameter Settings and Types of Retransmission Output Parameter Setting Type of Retransmission Output OFF Turns the function
389. t for four target setpoints In addition the RVD reference deviation is assigned in advance to the 4th target setpoint making parameter setting easier Operating display Parameters n p etc that can be set according Operation parameters Use C key to change the display of the parameters er oe see a ae a eP er U al j 4 as p ld dd d x lar ear dar Yar 7 Pe gPe IP 4Pe l c porosenoawm BAe Ye We lde ede 3dc 4de idb aad ban edb 3db Ydb j TEE 2 P 7 Parameters n p etc that can be set according to the each target setpoints IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 4 1 References Related to Target Setpoints gt Ref 4 4 To set target setpoints and their associate parameters such as PID constants use the operating parameters listed below The setting parameters differs depending on the controller model Refer to the paragraph that is applicable to your model 1 When the Model Is UT750 or UT5 Change parameters as explained in the User s Manuals Initial Settings and Parameter Map e Operating parameters Setpoin
390. t to 0 mA IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 4 1 References Related to Target Setpoints gt Ref 4 8 Note5 Not shown for heating cooling control Note6 Shown only for heating cooling control Note7 Shown only for position proportional PID control or heating cooling control Table 4 1 2 D register number list n 1 n 2 n 3 n 4 n 5 n 6 n 7 n 8 n P 306 331 356 381 406 431 456 481 n l 307 332 357 382 407 432 457 482 n D 308 333 358 383 408 433 458 483 n OH 309 334 359 384 409 434 459 484 n OL 310 335 360 385 410 435 460 485 n MR 311 336 361 386 411 436 461 486 n H 312 337 362 387 412 437 462 487 n DR 313 338 363 388 413 438 463 488 n Pc 314 339 364 389 414 439 464 489 n lc 315 340 365 390 415 440 465 490 n Dce 316 341 366 391 416 441 466 491 n Hc 317 342 367 392 417 442 467 492 n DB 318 343 368 393 418 443 468 493 n PO 320 345 370 395 420 445 470 495 n Oc 321 346 371 396 421 446 471 496 3 When the Model Is UT350 or UT320 The UT35 and UT32 are designed so that you can use a maximum of four target setpoints SP For each target setpoint you can configure parameters see the paragraphs below such as PID constants that have been exclusively as
391. t values Deviation derivative type PID control The deviation derivative type PID control mode is adopted in order to improve the follow up capability of UP series program controllers for marginal variations in the SP value of a program pattern By allowing the derivative term D to positively act upon variations resulting from a marginal change in the program pattern the controller keeps track of the pattern without delay Bees MV For UT3 When SP number is set to 0 When using communication function For UP35 Program mode operation except for hold or soak mode IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 Ref 2 7 lt Toc gt lt Ref 2 1 References Related to Control Output gt Table 2 1 3 Control Mode vs Operating Condition Relationship for UP350 UT350 and UT32L 2 2 Type of PID Operating Condition Control Mode Control Method Description of Control Action Mode Fixed point control mode C MD 1 PV derivative type PID control Control output bump is not allowed during change in SP value Use this control method in order to protect the PV value from any disorder that may result when the contro output MV reacts over sensitively against a change in the SP value during continuous fixed point control If the PV derivative type PID control mode is used with the permitted control output
392. tal number including time events Therefore in order to set two or more PV events and output them through contact terminals 1 specify their DO output terminal numbers 2 select the numbers of desired PV events from EV1 to EV8 and allocate them to the terminal numbers and 3 register I relay numbers each being incremented by 5000 that correspond to the allocated PV events For information on how to register the I relay numbers see Ref 3 2 2 Changing Contact Output Functions for the UP550 and UP750 In addition rewire the controller as required according to the output terminal numbers you specified The l relay numbers used for the statuses of PV events are defined as 113 to 122 For more information on the I relay numbers see Table 8 1 11 in Ref 8 1 4 l relay Outline and l relay Map Note that the relay numbers used for PV events are shared by local events Table 3 4 3 Terminal Number DO Number Factory set Assignment Output Type 6 DO1 PV event 1 output local event 1 Relay a 5 po2 BV event 2 output local event 2 Relay 3 4 pOoS Instrument alarm output Relay or cooling side control output Note es 7 Commonterminal forDO01t0D03 ee Ae Do4 es Timeevent 1 output st Transistor or cooling side control output Note oe Sa Do5 Time event 2 output ts Transistor ee DOO i SOC S Time event 3 output ts Transistor ee DOP Time event 4 output Transistor 85 C
393. ted to Contact Output gt Ref 3 40 Ref 3 2 References Related to Contact Output A IMPORTANT Information in this reference applies to the following models UP750 UP550 UP35 UT750 UTS UT4000 UT3 UP750 UP550 NONE Note1 UT750 UT5 NONE Note1 NONE Note1 Note1 In the case of the UP350 UT400 and UT3L it is not possible to change the factory set output contact assignments Therefore the explanations on changing output contact assignments do not apply to these models Note2 Some of the functions discussed below may be limited to models with a specific suffix and or option code Each section will expressly refer to this limitative condition where it applies A CAUTION The contact output functions of a UT UP series controller are pre assigned to their respective output terminals when the controller is shipped from the factory The terminal assignments in each of the UT UP modes are defined in terms of the most frequently used Check the controller model you will use and the factory set terminal assignments for each controller mode of the model To do this see the terminal wiring diagrams in the Installation user s manual of each controller model and mode Changes should only be made if you require any of the functions listed below or need to change any of the terminal numbers A CAUTION If you change any of the conta
394. th UP750 UP550 UT750 UT550 UT551 and UT520 Whether to use the biasing or approximation function is specified by the parameter 1 PMD Note which is set to specify ten segment linearizer biasing at the time of shipping As shown in the following Operating parameters Ten segment linearizer input parameters table the setting display of parameter 1 PMD is located after the ten segment linearizer input 1 to 11 and ten segment linearizer output 1 to 11 Note e 1 PMD is the parameter for UP750 UP550 and UT750 e 1 MD is the parameter for UT550 UT551 and UT520 2 PMD can also be used if the UP UT mode is set for using loop 2 or the secondary loop For how to set the parameters required for the functions discussed here see Ml Setting the Required Param eters in the end of this subsection IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 1 1 References Related to PV Input gt Ref 1 5 E Ten segment Linearizer Biasing This function is used to correct an input signal affected by sensor deterioration The corrected values b are obtained by adding the corresponding bias values to each of the 11 points of optionally set input values a The input values used to configure the ten segment linearizer are set with parameters 1 a1 to 1 a11 Note The bias values b axis for each of the input values a are set with parameters 1 61 to 1 611 Note Note e 1 a1 to 1 a11 and 1 b
395. the UT450 UT420 the same units and decimal point position set for the PV input range are used for the remote input range For this reason if the PV input range is set to a thermocouple type K 270 0 to 1370 0 C the initial value of R SL is set to 270 0 and that of R SH is set to 1370 0 Step3 Change the initial settings of R SL and R SH to the actual values for the remote input Range In this example the R SL is set to 10 0 and the R SH is set to 50 0 IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 1 2 References Related to Remote Input gt Ref 1 26 E Setting the Required Parameters Carry out the operation shown below UT5 s parameter setting way is shown in the following example Here we explain how to display the parameter setting display and to change the parameter values Before carrying out these operations be sure to refer to the User s Manuals Initial Settings and Parameter Map of the controller The parameter map is very helpful in finding the path to the setting display for a particular parameter 1 Referring to the User s Manual above display the setup parameter main menu UTMD Then display the submenu IN Press the key time and again to display the parameter IN3 Adjust the parameter value using the 4 amp keys then press the GIJ key to register it For example when you want to select 1 to 5V input rang
396. the measured input does not attain the wait zone within the wait time IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 5 2 References Related to Program Setup gt Ref 5 30 lt lt Ref 5 2 References Related to Program Setup gt gt Ref 5 2 5 Using the Hold Functions Changing Segment Setpoint in Hold Status Functions that change the segment setpoint in the hold status apply to Models UP750 UP550 and UP350 This hold function enables program control to be in the hold status the timer stops while the program is running see Note1 below In this hold status the following three segment setpoints can be changed see also Note2 e Changing the target segment setpoint e Increasing the segment ramp time e Decreasing the segment ramp time This section describes the operations after individual setpoints are changed Note1 Junction codes key operations and external contacts enable programs to be in the hold status For key operations see the Program Setup section of the appropriate User s Manual available separately For external contacts by which programs are in the hold status see Ref 3 1 References Related to Contact Input Note2 To change each setpoint see the Program Setup section in the appropriate User s Manual A CAUTION Changes can be made to parameter settings only during soak segments constant setpoint that are on hold However with dual loop control on the UP750 see th
397. the preset output function differs depending on the controller model This section explains the function for each of the following models Refer to the paragraph that is applicable to your model 1 When the model is UP750 UP550 UT750 UT500 or UT400 2 When the model is UP350 UT35H or UT320 A caution e The default value of the preset output values is set to 0 0 of contro output Change the setting value if necessary e The setting range of the preset output values is 5 0 to 105 0 of control output However the preset output value will not be limited even when the n OH and n OL limits of output have been set 1 When the model is UP750 UP550 UT750 UT5LIL or UT4L0 In the following situations the controller outputs the preset output value e An input burnout has occurred during the AUTO mode or CAS mode operation e Anabnormality in an analog digital conversion circuit has occurred during the AUTO mode or CAS mode operation e The status of the controller changed from the operating mode to the stop mode With UP750 or UP550 the status changed from the operating mode to the reset mode The following parameters are used Change parameters as explained in the User s Manuals Initial Settings and Parameter Map Operating parameters PID related Parameters n PO and n Oc UP750 UT750 pores nee 0 Descri
398. their operation However the password setting or the following security related parameters setting operation is possible AM key lock Locks the am key on the controller front panel to prohibit switching between auto and manual modes Operation mode lock The parameters in the main menu MODE which are used to select operation mode are not shown This prohibits you from making the following changes by key operation 1 When the Model Is UT750 e Switching between loop 2 auto and manual modes e Selecting from auto manual and cascade modes during cascade control the parameters are shown only during cascade secondary loop control cascade control or cascade control with 2 universal inputs e Switching between loop 1 remote and local modes e Switching between loop 2 remote and local modes Switching between STOP and RUN statuses Selecting target setpoint number common to loops 1 and 2 2 When the Model Is UT550 UT551 UT520 e Selecting from auto manual and cascade modes during cascade control the parameters are shown only during cascade secondary loop control cascade control or cascade control with 2 universal inputs e Switching between loop 1 remote and local modes e Switching between STOP and RUN statuses e Selecting target setpoint number common to loops 1 and 2 LP1 operating The LP1 operating parameter main menu see Fig 7 1 1 is not shown parameter lock This prohibits you
399. these as appropriate for your selected model 1 For the UP750 and UP550 A CAUTION e The moment that the repeat operation starts the event settings for the segments in that operation are defaulted For this reason reset any events needed in the repeat operation e If the STC program start condition parameter is set to either PV ramp start or PV time start the start condition is applied to the repeat operation when it starts To use the repeat operation set the repeat start segment repeat end segment and number of repeat cycles The next page shows the difference in program pattern progression when repeat operation is used and when not RCY repeat cycles 1 RST repeat start segment No 3 REN repeat end segment No 5 With the above settings segments Nos 3 to 5 are repeated 1 time as shown on the next page The following parameters are used To change parameter values follow the Program Setup or Parameters section of the appropriate User s Manual Program parameters repeat operation parameters RCY RST and REN UP750 UP550 a B register No Description Setting range Default UP750 UP550 only Code RCY Number of repetitions 0 to 999 CONT 0 no repeat operation 29 Indefinite repetitions RST Start of repetition 1 30 segment number 1 RST REN lt 99 REN End of repetition 1 31 segment number IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 5 2 Re
400. tings match the control mode you will use Table 3 2 1 Contact Output Terminals of UT750 for Single loop Control and Their Factory set Functions Terminal No DO No Factory set Function Output Type 6 DO1 Alarm 1 output Relay as Se cy Alarm 2 output sts S Relay i DB Alam 3output ssts S Relay or cooling side control output Note1 a Sr Common terminal for DO1 to DO3 tt i lt sSsSSSSS 840 DA Alarm 4 output Transistor or cooling side control output Note1 833 D5 Unassigned itst lt sSCS Transistor 3200 C lt i lt z WK Unassigned ssts S Transistor 8t DOF FAIL output Transistor 385 Common terminal for DO4 to DO7 tt ss lt sSS Note1 When heating cooling control is selected as the option of the Control Output Selection parameter cooling side output is assigned to either DO3 relay output or DO4 open collector transistor output IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 3 2 References Related to Contact Output gt Ref 3 42 Table 3 2 2 Contact Output Terminals of UT550 UT551 for Single loop Control and Their Factory set Functions Terminal No DO No Factory set Function Output Type 6 DO1 Alarm 1 output Relay 5B OR Alarm 2 output ss S Relay he BOR S Alarm 3 output Relay O Common terminal for DO1 to DO3 tt ss i lt sSSS 840 DA Alarm 4 output ss S Transistor 83K Unassigned ss S Transistor 3
401. tions of controller functions in Ref 1 1 4 Changing the PV sampling period they should be taken only as rough guides Therefore you must check whether or not the period is appropriate before you use the controller Carry out this check at the time of the operation test of the system that uses the controller This check is performed by monitoring the sampling error counter The counter value shows how many times the controller failed to process its operation at the current PV sampling period The controller increments the counter value by 1 per 10 ms of control period delay when it cannot execute all the processing within the specified period PV sampling 30ms period fy gt Processing Processing This chart shows that processing cannot be executed within the specified sampling period In this example the processing is delayed by 30 ms so the sampling error counter is incremented by 3 Fig 1 1 5 PV Sampling Period If the counter value is not 0 it means that some of the processing of the controller remains unprocessed For this reason if an exact control is required set the sampling period so that the counter value will not increase unless a long time has elapsed If the counter value increases in a short period of time change the sampling period to a larger value You can monitor the counter value through the display of setup parameter SMEC or SMC for UT50O0 as shown in the following
402. to display main menu LP 1 Then display the submenu PAR 7 Press the key 5 times to display the parameter ORB Set the ON OFF rate detection band value using the 4 keys then press the key to register it 8 Press the key once to display the param eter ORH Set the ON OFF rate high limit value using the 4 keys then press the key to register it 9 Press the key once to display the param eter ORL Set the ON OFF rate low limit value using the a keys then press the key to register it lt Ref 3 4 References Related to Instrument Alarms and Events gt Ref 3 89 Setup Parameter Map for UP550 UP750 Password H Operating Parameter Setting display i The parameter setting operation for the sensor ground alarm is completed Pressing the gt key
403. tops resets at the end of that segment At the end of the last segment the start setpoint is taken as the target setpoint An example of program continue being used as the segment end condition is as follows PV When SEG n ends the program advances to the next segment SEG n 1 SEGn SEGnH1 net to98 Target setpoint of SEG n gt Time me gt lt gt TIMEn TIMEn 1 Fig 5 2 8 Example of program continue as the segment end condition E Segment hold JC 1 When segment hold JC 1 is selected as the segment end condition the program pauses is placed on hold at the end of the current segment While the program is on hold the HOLD lamp is lit The program is kept on hold until the hold state is released either by key input or external contact input When the hold state is released for the last segment in the program the program stops resets Executing the advance function while the program is on hold releases the hold state Ref Ref 5 2 7 Using the Advance Function An example of segment hold being used as the segment end condition is as follows PV A Program is held here until the hold state is released n 1 to 98 The program pauses goes on hold at the end of a segment SEG n for which the segment hold is set as the end condition gt Time e _ gt e a TIMEn TIMEn 1 lt During hold state Fig 5 2 9 Example of segment hold as the se
404. trol Note1 DO4 Transistor Time event 1 output or cooling side output in heating cooling control Note1 DO5 Transistor Time event 2 output DO6 Transistor Time event 3 output DO7 Transistor Time event 4 output Note1 When heating cooing control using relay or transistor output in control output is selected cooling side output is assigned to DO3 or DO4 for the UP750 TIP If the output type other than a relay see the table above is selected for control output time event 5 output will be assigned to the relay terminal for output 1 for the UP550 and time event 6 output will be assigned to the relay terminal for output 2 for the UP550 2H only D register and I register numbers assigned to contact outputs and extended contact outputs set at the factory The registered numbers of the alarm and other functions assigned to contact output registration parameters DO1 to DO7 are shown below Registered contact Model output parameters Function Registered number DO1 PV event 1 output 5705 l relay number DO2 PV event 2 output 5706 l relay number DO3 Instrument alarm 1 output 5689 I relay number Common to UP750 gt and UP550 DO4 Time event 1 output 5129 l relay number DO5 Time event 2 output 5130 l relay number DO6 Time event 3 output 5131 I relay number DO7 Time event 4 output 5132 l relay number DO3 Cooling side output in 1607 D register number heating cooling control UP750 only
405. trollers FA M3 etc Note3 e Centralized watching of control status with the personal computer or the graphic display Note3 Note1 Refer to Ref 6 1 1 when you want to register SELECT displays Note2 Only UP750 or UT750 can build the User defining area Refer to the manual of LL200 PC based Custom Computation Building Tool for more details Note3 Refer to the manual of GREEN series Communication function Optional for more details Each D register has a D register number The number of each D register can be confirmed by the D register Map See Table 8 1 2 the table is for UP750 and UP550 to Table 8 1 6 the table is for UT350 and UT32L When you want to know the classification of D registers see the Table 8 1 1 below Table 8 1 1 Register No Classification Description 1 to 49 Process values Note1 Operating display data PV SP OUT values etc 50 to 100 User area Note2 For communication with display 101 to 200 LOCAL operation LOCAL setup parameters Local setpoints PID numbers parameters event settings Operation modes and A M C A M MOUT etc 20110230 parameters 231 to 300 Operating parameters Operation related parameters AT SC BS FL etc 301 to 800 PID related parameters P I D etc Message Up to 20 alphanumeric characters used 801 to 900 Message display for each message 901 to 1000 Control action parameters SP ALM CTL
406. ual switching 5161 DI1 1129 A M Note2 lt Status switching gt rl Remote Local switching The setting range equals the 5168 D18 1131 R L Note3 range of I Relay numbers lt Status switching gt each number plus 5000 Ss that correspond to the DI Grr ee oie Note4 numbers of the contact input 5162 DI2 1133 S R lt Status switching gt terminals you want to use Note1 Pras Switch to Cascade mode 0 not specified 1134 CAS only when in Refer to the Note 1 below cascade control Note5 for the relationship between lt Rising edge switching gt the DI numbers and the Relay numbers AL Switch to Auto mode 0 not specified 1135 AUT Noted lt Rising edge switching gt nan Switch to Manual mode 0 not specified 1136 MAN Noted lt Rising edge switching gt opin Bit O of SP number 5163 DI3 1137 SP 0 setting Note6 lt Status switching gt oP il Bit 1 of SP number 5164 D14 1138 SP 1 setting Note6 lt Status switching gt GPF Bit 2 of SP number 5165 DI5 1139 SP 2 setting Note6 lt Status switching gt op j Bit 3 of SP number 5166 DI6 1140 SP 3 setting Note6 lt Status switching gt Pall Bit 0 of PID number seting 0 not specified 1174 PN 0 lt Status switching gt Pra i Bit 1 of PID number seting 0 not specified IIIS PN 1 lt Status switching gt Bit 2 of PID number seting For UT551 only 0 not specified 1176 n PN 2 lt Status switching gt Note For Remote Local
407. ue Select whichever mode you think appropriate when you start using the controller Pv When in stability oriented mode py Wheninresponsiveness oriented Py When Super2 function is not used 4 SC 2 mode SC 3 A SC OFF Control characteristics at point SP 0 Control characteristics at point SP 0 Control characteristics at point SP 0 set in PID control mode set in PID control mode set in PID control mode 1 SP 0 sees ees FSP 0 eee FSP 0 assess JSP 1 gt 4 SP 1 gt 1 JSP 1 BS The settleability of hunting Hunting settles down SP 2 SP control stability precedes SP 2 faster compared j The amplitude of hunting LA here though this involves Pa with the case where increases as the change a longer settling time La SC 2 in the SP value becomes compared with the case large where SC 3 gt gt Time Time tine Fig 2 1 5 The parameters used in this reference topic are as shown below To set change any of the parameters see the Initial Settings or Parameter Map user s manual of the model in question e Operating parameters Operation related Parameters SC UP750 UT5 UP550 UT4000 UT750 UP3 Description Setting Range Default D register No UT3 Code Code sc ob On off of Super function OFF or 1 2o0r3 OFF Note2 Loop 1 242 SC Note1 Loop 2 272 Note3 Note1 When selecting the sta
408. ult or e minute second if TMU is 1 IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 3 4 References Related to Instrument Alarms and Events gt Ref 3 1 01 lt lt Ref 3 4 References Related to Instrument Alarms and Events gt gt Ref 3 4 7 Using Local Events Using local events is possible with the UP550 or UP750 Local events work only if the controller is in local mode The UP350 does not have local mode and therefore has no local events A CAUTION The output terminals for each events have been predetermined at the factory according to the UP mode Confirm the terminal numbers allocated to instrument alarms or event outputs If you have made any change to the instrument alarm or event settings you must also change the DO output terminal assignments and the wiring Note Note For example a single loop control type UP750 controller comes with the factory set DO contact output assignments shown in Table 3 4 7 The terminal numbers for PV events 1 and 2 is 6 and 5 and its DO numbers are DO1 and DO2 In other words two contact outputs are allocated to PV events when the controller is shipped from the factory On the other hand these output terminals for PV events are changed to those for local events E21A and E22A because their l relay numbers are shared as noted below Therefore set the local event type and local event setpoint for each of these two local event
409. ut 1 and alarm 3 output is also assigned to the relay terminal for output 2 UT550 2 only 3 Cascade secondary loop control UT mode 3 Ref 3 45 D register and I relay numbers assigned to contact outputs at the factory before shipment The registered numbers of the alarm and other functions assigned to contact output registration parameters DO1 to DO7 are shown below Model Function Registered number Common to UT750 UT550 UT551 and UT520 Alarm 1 output 5689 I relay number Alarm 2 output Alarm 3 output 5690 I relay number 5691 I relay number Alarm 4 output UT750 only UT550 UT551 and UT520 only FAIL output FAIL output 5693 I relay number 1613 D register number 1611 D register number D register and I relay numbers assigned to E UT750 contact outputs at the factory before shipment DO Output Type ___ Function The registered numbers of the alarm and other DO1 Relay Alarm 1 output functions assigned to contact output registration DO2 Relay Alarm 2 output parameters DO1 to DO7 are shown below DO3 Relay Alarm 3 output F or cooling side control in Model Function Registered number heating cooling control Note Alarm 1 output 5689 l relay number DO4 Transistor Alarm 4 output Alarm 2 output 5690 l relay number or cooling side control in Common to UT750 heating cooling
410. utput 4 along with an increment of 5000 with the DO1 parameter As indicated on the Relay Map the I Relay number of alarm output 4 is 693 Therefore register 5693 with the DO1 parameter OFF STATUS No 385 No 449 No 513 No 5777 No 647 No 7057 385 ADIERR 449 AMI 513 577 CSPNO 0 641 705 eee 578 CSPNO 1 642 706 ee eA Ti 79 CSPNO 2 643 707 UCALB E 498 562 RDI 644 754 435 USER E 499 563 RDIM03 436 500 564 RDIM04 437 UTMD 501 565 RDI105 629 693 ALO14 757 438 RANGE 502 566 RDI106 630 694 758 439 SETUP 503 567 RDI07 631 695 440 504 568 RDI108 632 696 760 441 PARA E 505 569 RDI201 633 697 ALO21 761 442 MODE E 506 570 RDI202 634 698 ALO22 762 443 507 571 RDI203_ 635 699 ALO23 763 L relay number for 444 508 572 RDI204 636 700 764 alarm output 4 445 EEPE 509 573 RDI205 637 701 ALO24 765 446 510 574 RDI206 638 702 766 447 SYSTEM E 511 575 RDI207 639 703 767 448 512 576 RDI208 640 704 768 IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 3 2 References Related to Contact Output gt Ref 3 43 As another example note that the FAIL output is allocated the D register numbered 1609 Note for the single loop control mode of the UT550 UT551 and UT520 If you want the FAIL output to be delivered from termina
411. ween the two modes by key operation PID parameter The PID operating parameter which is used to select from the groups 1 to 8 of PID parameters number lock is not shown This prohibits you from changing your choice of PID parameters by key operation The following parameters are used Change parameters as explained in the User s Manuals Initial Settings and Parameter Map e Setup parameters Security related Parameters DAT A M R L PID UT400 Description Setting range Default D register No Code JAL 4 Jkey lock OFF or ON OFF 1024 DAT Data setting key lock Aen aM key lock OFF or ON OFF 1025 A M rL Lock of Remote Local OFF or ON OFF 1028 R L selection parameter Pl Lock of parameter for PID OFF or ON OFF 1032 PID parameter display number IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 7 1 References Related to Security gt Ref 7 5 3 When the Model Is UT750 UT550 UT551 or UT520 The keylock function of the UT750 UT550 UT551 or UT520 works as described in the table below Two or more options of the keylock function can be selected using security related setup parameters Table 7 1 3 Keylock Function Options Keylock Function Option Description 4 keylock Locks the A keys on the controller front panel to prohibit
412. xample assume that controller s measurement range is 0 to 1000 C An RDV setting of 1 corresponds to a reference deviation of 10 C Assuming that n SP is 500 C which is in zone 2 the RDV upper limit will be 510 C and the RDV lower limit 490 C as shown in Fig 4 1 3 As long as the PV is controlled around SP and within the RDV range the second set of PID constants can be used And when PV goes out of the RDV range the controller stops using the PID constants of the second set and starts using those of the fourth set 4 P 4 1 to 4 DB EU 100 RH A eee 1000 C J A 2RP J 2 2 2 nnn n Jone 2 RDV upper limit 510 C Uses the 2nd set of PID constants Reference deviation 10 C Target setpoint n SP NK 500 C T a n SP RDV lower limit 490 C VRP 22 222 eee eee eee ee ee ee eee eee eee eee EU 0 RL Vv 0 C Fig 4 1 3 IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 4 1 References Related to Target Setpoints gt Ref 4 14 2 2 When Target Setpoint SP number selection Method Is Selected In the SP number selection method the operators of the controller can switch between the eight target setpoints as necessary In the case of the UT350 and UT32H switch between the four SPs Switching is carried out by setting the parameter SP NO using key operation or by using external DIS contact inputs Switching of target setpoint is
413. ximum of 23 Note1 Up to two expansion modules can be installed at a time Each has eight contact inputs and eight contact outputs Therefore connecting two modules to the controller provides a total of 23 inputs 16 8 x 2 inputs from the two modules and 7 standard inputs from the controller actually there are only seven standard inputs available be cause terminal 20 of the above mentioned eight terminals is reserved as a common terminals Note1 Requires Yokogawa s optional add on module for the uFA40 compact program controller UT750 lt b gt u BUS Communication MAX 15m 8 Input terminals 8 Input aN RERERRBRBRRE a terminals oar es POWER D O RUNO O Tra lt sKegafe lt JARA ei Pine are Bre a lsr i YOKOGAWA as 2 8 YOKOGAWA BaF AV DO OJA OUTPUT 240V AC 2A 24V DC 2A BUS ZAV DC OTA OUTPUT 240V AC 2A 24V DC 2A 8 Output lellis ror rss 8 Output SS ST ac 7 E SEO terminals eS fe hani B RE RIE Bg alee RISB KA I O Expansion Module1 I O Expansion Module2 Fig 3 1 6 I O Expansion Module wiring outline The connectable contact I O expansion modules optional are shown below
414. y number eee Cooling side control output in loop 2 1615 D register number DOs Instrument alarm 1 output 5689 l relay number Cooling side control output in loop 1 1607 D register number Doi Time event 1 output 5129 l relay number Cooling side control output in loop 1 1609 D register number DOs Time event 2 output 5130 I relay number Cooling side control output in loop 2 1617 D register number DO6 Time event 3 output 5131 l relay number DO7 Time event 4 output 5132 I relay number 8 Cascade control with two universal inputs UP mode 13 This function is for the UP750 only The contact output functions in this control mode is the same as for cascade control UP mode 4 in Item 3 For more details refer to Item 3 earlier in this manual 9 Loop control with PV switching and two universal inputs UP mode 14 This function is for the UP750 only The contact output functions in this control mode is the same as for the loop control with PV switching UP mode 6 in Item 4 For more details refer to Item 4 earlier in this manual 10 Loop control with PV auto selector and two universal inputs UP mode 15 This function is for the UP750 only The contact output functions in this control mode is the same as for the loop control with PV auto selector UP mode 7 in Item 5 For more details refer to Item 5 earlier in this manual 11 Custom computation control UP mode 21 This function is for the UP750 only The
415. y set function 19 DI1 5161 ee 18 Sa peas Di2 EOR 5162 EESE Assign the function of selecting the program pattern number 40 DI3 5163 1 to 15 Note1 39 OK 5164 88 OB 5165 Assigns the function of starting program operation OFF gt ON 87 DE 5166 Assigns the function of stopping program operation OFF 3ON 36 C D7 5167 Assigns the function of starting Local mode operation OFF sON a re Common terminal for DH to DIZ 0 o 28 IB 6168 no function ac Common terminal forDI8 0 Note1 The ON and OFF status of the DI1 DI2 DI3 and Dl4 contact inputs can be programmed as shown in the Table 3 1 13 to define 15 choices of program pattern numbers IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 3 1 References Related to Contact Input gt Ref 3 30 Table 3 1 13 Program pattern No DI1 bit 0 DI2 bit 1 DI3 bit 2 D14 bit 3 1 ON OFF OFF OFF 2 OFF ON OFF OFF 3 ON ON OFF OFF 4 OFF OFF ON OFF 5 ON OFF ON OFF 6 OFF ON ON OFF 7 ON ON ON OFF 8 OFF OFF OFF ON 9 ON OFF OFF ON 10 OFF ON OFF ON 11 ON ON OFF ON 12 OFF OFF ON ON 13 ON OFF ON ON 14 OFF ON ON ON 15 ON ON ON ON A TIP When you want to define the program pattern 100 set the ON OFF status of bit 0 to bit 6 as follows Refer to the parameter list on page Ref 3 31 for the bit 4 to bit 8 lt bit 0 gt lt bit 1 gt lt bit 2 gt lt bit3 g
416. yet been set Setting the PWD parameter back to 0 does not enable you to cancel your current password IM 05J01B02 01E 5th Edition Mar 25 2005 00 lt Toc gt lt Ref 7 1 References Related to Security gt Ref 7 2 lt lt Ref 7 1 References Related to Security gt gt Ref 7 1 2 Using the keylock function to prevent unauthorized key operation This function prohibits you from working with the predefined group of operation panel keys during controller operation or with the parameter setting display A CAUTION e The keylock function locks all of the predefined group of operation panel keys If any of the panel keys is found to be disabled while correct operation is being carried out in accordance with the User s Manual first check the setpoint of the LOCK parameter A CAUTION e Even when the keylock function is enabled relevant key operation is possible with an external contact Operation based on external contacts has priority over key operation For this reason it is possible to operate the controller by external contact input switching even when keys are locked The keylock function differs depending on the controller model This section explains the function for each of the following models Refer to the paragraph that is applicable to your model 1 When the Model Is UT35 or UT3200 2 When the Model Is UT450 or UT420 3 When the Model Is UT750 UT550

GREEN Series User's Manual - Detailed Instruction -

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents